Ncert Exemplar - Maths

00 Preface.
pdf
01 Relations and Functions.pdf
02 Inverse Trigonometric Functions.pdf
03 Matrics.pdf
04 Determinants.pdf
05 Continuity and Differentiability.pdf
06 Application of Derivatives.pdf
07 Integrals.pdf
08 Application of Integrals.pdf
09 Differential Equations.pdf
10 Vector Algebra.pdf
11 3D Geometry.pdf
12 Linear Programming.pdf
13 Probability.pdf
14 Design of Question Paper II.pdf
15 Design of Question Paper I.pdf
16 Answers.pdf
MATHEMATICS
EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS
Class XII
ISBN 978-93-5007-024-6
First Edition
January 2010 Magha 1931
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system

or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise without the prior permission of the
publisher.
This book is sold subject to the condition that it shall not, by way of trade,
be lent, re-sold, hired out or otherwise disposed of without the publishers
consent, in any form of binding or cover other than that in which it is published.
The correct price of this publication is the price printed on this page, Any
revised price indicated by a rubber stamp or by a sticker or by any other
means is incorrect and should be unacceptable.
PD 10T BS
National Council of Educational
Research and Training, 2010
OFFICES OF THE PUBLICATION

DEPARTMENT, NCERT
NCERT Campus
Sri Aurobindo Marg
New Delhi 110 016
Phone : 011-26562708
108, 100 Feet Road

Hosdakere Halli Extension
Banashankari III Stage
Bangalore 560 085
Rs 125.00
Phone : 080-26725740
Navjivan Trust Building

P.O.Navjivan
Ahmedabad 380 014
Phone : 079-27541446
CWC Campus
Opp. Dhankal Bus Stop
Panihati
Kolkata 700 114
Phone : 033-25530454
CWC Complex
Maligaon
Guwahati 781 021
Phone : 0361-2674869
Publication Team
Printed on 80 GSM paper with NCERT

watermark
Published at the Publication Department
by the Secretary, National Council of
Educational Research and Training, Sri
Aurobindo Marg, New Delhi 110 016 and
printed at Kausik Offset Printers, C-34,
Sector 58, Noida 201301
Head, Publication
Department
: Peyyeti Rajakumar
Chief Production
Officer
: Shiv Kumar
Chief Editor
: Shveta Uppal
Chief Business
Manager
: Gautam Ganguly
Assitant Editor
: Bijnan Sutar
Production Assistant : Prakash Veer Singh

Cover Design
Shweta Rao
FOREWORD
The National Curriculum Framework (NCF) 2005 initiated a new phase of development
of syllabi and textbooks for all stages of school education. Conscious effort has been
made to discourage rote learning and to diffuse sharp boundaries between different
subject areas. This is well in tune with the NPE 1986 and Learning Without Burden1993 that recommend child centred system of education. The textbooks for Classes
IX and XI were released in 2006 and for Classes X and XII in 2007. Overall the books
have been well received by students and teachers.
NCF2005 notes that treating the prescribed textbooks as the sole basis of
examination is one of the key reasons why other resources and sites of learning are
ignored. It further reiterates that the methods used for teaching and evaluation will
also determine how effective these textbooks proves for making childrens life at school
a happy experience, rather than source of stress or boredom. It calls for reform in
examination system currently prevailing in the country.
The position papers of the National Focus Groups on Teaching of Science,
Teaching of Mathematics and Examination Reform envisage that the mathematics
question papers, set in annual examinations conducted by the various Boards do not
really assess genuine understanding of the subjects. The quality of question papers is
often not up to the mark. They usually seek mere information based on rote
memorization, and fail to test higher-order skills like reasoning and analysis, let along
lateral thinking, creativity, and judgment. Good unconventional questions, challenging
problems and experiment-based problems rarely find a place in question papers. In
order to address to the issue, and also to provide additional learning material, the
Department of Education in Science and Mathematics (DESM) has made an attempt
to develop resource book of exemplar problems in different subjects at secondary and
higher-secondary stages. Each resource book contains different types of questions of
varying difficulty level. Some questions would require the students to apply
simultaneously understanding of more than one chapters/units. These problems are
not meant to serve merely as question bank for examinations but are primarily meant
to improve the quality of teaching/learning process in schools. It is expected that these
problems would encourage teachers to design quality questions on their own. Students
and teachers should always keep in mind that examination and assessment should test
comprehension, information recall, analytical thinking and problem-solving ability,

creativity and speculative ability.
A team of experts and teachers with an understanding of the subject and a
proper role of examination worked hard to accomplish this task. The material was
discussed, edited and finally included in this source book.
NCERT will welcome suggestions from students, teachers and parents which
would help us to further improve the quality of material in subsequent editions.
Professor Yash Pal

Chairperson
National Steering Committee
National Council of Educational
Research and Training
New Delhi
21 May 2008
iv
PREFACE
The Department of Education in Science and Mathematics (DESM), National
Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT), initiated the
development of Exemplar Problems in science and mathematics for secondary
and higher secondary stages after completing the preparation of textbooks based
on National Curriculum Framework2005.
The main objective of the book on Exemplar Problems in Mathematics is to
provide the teachers and students a large number of quality problems with varying
cognitive levels to facilitate teaching learning of concepts in mathematics that are
presented through the textbook for Class XII. It is envisaged that the problems included
in this volume would help the teachers to design tasks to assess effectiveness of their
teaching and to know about the achievement of their students besides facilitating
preparation of balanced question papers for unit and terminal tests. The feedback
based on the analysis of students responses may help the teachers in further improving
the quality of classroom instructions. In addition, the problems given in this book are
also expected to help the teachers to perceive the basic characteristics of good quality
questions and motivate them to frame similar questions on their own. Students can
benefit themselves by attempting the exercises given in the book for self assessment
and also in mastering the basic techniques of problem solving. Some of the questions
given in the book are expected to challenge the understanding of the concepts of
mathematics of the students and their ability to applying them in novel situations.
The problems included in this book were prepared through a series of workshops
organised by the DESM for their development and refinement involving practicing
teachers, subject experts from universities and institutes of higher learning, and the
members of the mathematics group of the DESM whose names appear separately.
We gratefully acknowledge their efforts and thank them for their valuable contribution
in our endeavour to provide good quality instructional material for the school system.
I express my gratitude to Professor Krishna Kumar, Director and Professor
G. Ravindra, Joint Director, NCERT for their valuable motivation and guidiance from
time to time. Special thanks are also due to Dr. V. P. Singh, Reader in Mathematics,
DESM for coordinating the programme, taking pains in editing and refinement of problems
and for making the manuscript pressworthy.
We look forward to feedback from students, teachers and parents for further
improvement of the contents of this book.
Hukum Singh
Professor and Head
DEVELOPMENT TEAM
EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS MATHEMATICS
MEMBERS
D.R. Sharma, Vice Principal, J.N.V. Mouli, Panchkula, Chandigarh
Hukum Singh, Professor and Head, DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
J.C. Nijhawan, Principal (Retd.), Directorate of Education, Delhi
P. K. Jain, Professor (Retd.), Department of Mathematics Delhi University, Delhi
P.K. Chaurasia, Lecturer, DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
Ram Avtar, Professor (Retd.), DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
R.P. Maurya, Reader, DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
Rahul Sofat, Lecturer, Airforce Golden Jubilee Institute, Subroto Park, New Delhi
Reeta Oze, H.O.D, Mathematics Section, Army Public School, Dhaula Kuan, New
Delhi
Sangeet Arora, P.G.T. Apeejay School, Saket, New Delhi
Sunil Bajaj, Head Mathematics Section, SCERT, Haryana, Gurgaon,
Sanjay Mudgal, Lecturer, DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
MEMBER - COORDINATOR
V.P. Singh, Reader, DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The Council gratefully acknowledges the valuable contributions of the following
participants of the Exemplar Problems Workshop:
Ashok Kumar.V, PGT, Kendriya Vidyalaya No. 1, Panambur Mangalore,
Karnataka; T.Sudha Rani, PGT, J.N.V. Pedavegi, West Godavari District (A.P.); Dinesh
Dhingra, PGT, Delhi Public School Vasundhara Ghaziabad (U.P.); Rajpal Singh,
Lecturer, Rajkiya Pratibha Vikas Vidyalaya, Gandhi Nagar, Delhi; Dinesh Sharma,
PGT, Navyug School, Lodhi Road, New Delhi; Anil Kumar Mishra, Lecturer, S.S.B.L.
Inter College Deoria (U.P.); C.Gurumurthy, Director Academic Rouse Avenue CBSE,
New Delhi, Quddus Khan, Lecturer, Shibli National College, Azamgarh (U.P.); G.D.
Dhall, Reader (Retd.) DESM, NCERT, New Delhi and S.N.Yadav, PGT (Retd.),
K.V. Andrewsganj, New Delhi.
Special thanks are due to Professor Hukum Singh, Head, DESM, NCERT for his
support during the development of this book.
The Council also acknowledges the efforts of Deepak Kapoor, Incharge, Computer
Station; Rakesh Kumar, Surender Kumar and Mrs. Praveen, DTP Operators;
Abhimanyu Mohanty, Proof Reader.
The contribution of APC Office, Administration of DESM, Publication Department
and Secretariat of NCERT is also duly acknowledged.
CONTENTS
FOREWORD
iii
v
PREFACE
CHAPTER
Relations and Functions
CHAPTER
Inverse Trigonometric Function
18
CHAPTER
Matrices
42
CHAPTER
Determinants
65
CHAPTER
Continuity and Differentiability
86
CHAPTER
Application of Derivatives
117
CHAPTER
Integrals
143
CHAPTER
Application of Integrals
170
CHAPTER
Differential Equations
179
CHAPTER
10
Vector Algebra
204
CHAPTER
11
Three Dimensional Geometry
220
CHAPTER
12
Linear Programming
241
CHAPTER
13
Probability
258
Answers
287
Design of the Question Paper , Set-I
306
Design of the Question Paper, Set-II
336
Chapter
RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

1.1 Overview
1.1.1 Relation
A relation R from a non-empty set A to a non empty set B is a subset of the Cartesian
product A B. The set of all first elements of the ordered pairs in a relation R from a
set A to a set B is called the domain of the relation R. The set of all second elements in
a relation R from a set A to a set B is called the range of the relation R. The whole set
B is called the codomain of the relation R. Note that range is always a subset of
codomain.
1.1.2 Types of Relations
A relation R in a set A is subset of A A. Thus empty set and A A are two extreme
relations.
(i) A relation R in a set A is called empty relation, if no element of A is related to any
element of A, i.e., R = A A.
(ii) A relation R in a set A is called universal relation, if each element of A is related
to every element of A, i.e., R = A A.
(iii) A relation R in A is said to be reflexive if aRa for all aA, R is symmetric if
aRb bRa, a, b A and it is said to be transitive if aRb and bRc aRc
a, b, c A. Any relation which is reflexive, symmetric and transitive is called
an equivalence relation.
Note: An important property of an equivalence relation is that it divides the set
into pairwise disjoint subsets called equivalent classes whose collection is called
a partition of the set. Note that the union of all equivalence classes gives
the whole set.
1.1.3 Types of Functions

(i) A function f : X Y is defined to be one-one (or injective), if the images of
distinct elements of X under f are distinct, i.e.,
x1 , x2 X, f (x1) = f (x2) x1 = x2.
(ii) A function f : X Y is said to be onto (or surjective), if every element of Y is the
image of some element of X under f, i.e., for every y Y there exists an element
x X such that f (x) = y.
MATHEMATICS
(iii) A function f : X Y is said to be one-one and onto (or bijective), if f is both oneone and onto.
1.1.4 Composition of Functions
(i) Let f : A B and g : B C be two functions. Then, the composition of f and
g, denoted by g o f, is defined as the function g o f : A C given by
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
g o f (x) = g (f (x)), x A.
If f : A B and g : B C are one-one, then g o f : A C is also one-one
If f : A B and g : B C are onto, then g o f : A C is also onto.
However, converse of above stated results (ii) and (iii) need not be true. Moreover,
we have the following results in this direction.
Let f : A B and g : B C be the given functions such that g o f is one-one.
Then f is one-one.
Let f : A B and g : B C be the given functions such that g o f is onto. Then
g is onto.
1.1.5 Invertible Function

(i) A function f : X Y is defined to be invertible, if there exists a function
g : Y X such that g o f = Ix and f o g = IY. The function g is called the inverse
of f and is denoted by f 1.
(ii) A function f : X Y is invertible if and only if f is a bijective function.
(iii) If f : X Y, g : Y
h o (g o f) = (h o g) o f.
Z and h : Z S are functions, then
(iv) Let f : X Y and g : Y Z be two invertible functions. Then g o f is also

invertible with (g o f)1 = f 1 o g1.
1.1.6 Binary Operations
(i) A binary operation * on a set A is a function * : A A A. We denote * (a, b)
by a * b.
(ii) A binary operation * on the set X is called commutative, if a * b = b * a for every
a, b X.
(iii) A binary operation * : A A A is said to be associative if
(a * b) * c = a * (b * c), for every a, b, c A.
(iv) Given a binary operation * : A A A, an element e A, if it exists, is called
identity for the operation *, if a * e = a = e * a, a A.
(v) Given a binary operation * : A A A, with the identity element e in A, an

element a A, is said to be invertible with respect to the operation *, if there
exists an element b in A such that a * b = e = b * a and b is called the inverse of
a and is denoted by a1.
1.2 Solved Examples
Short Answer (S.A.)
Example 1 Let A = {0, 1, 2, 3} and define a relation R on A as follows:
R = {(0, 0), (0, 1), (0, 3), (1, 0), (1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 0), (3, 3)}.
Is R reflexive? symmetric? transitive?
Solution R is reflexive and symmetric, but not transitive since for (1, 0) R and
(0, 3) R whereas (1, 3) R.
Example 2 For the set A = {1, 2, 3}, define a relation R in the set A as follows:
R = {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3), (1, 3)}.
Write the ordered pairs to be added to R to make it the smallest equivalence relation.
Solution (3, 1) is the single ordered pair which needs to be added to R to make it the
smallest equivalence relation.
Example 3 Let R be the equivalence relation in the set Z of integers given by
R = {(a, b) : 2 divides a b}. Write the equivalence class [0].
Solution [0] = {0, 2, 4, 6,...}
Example 4 Let the function f : R R be defined by f (x) = 4x 1, x R. Then,
show that f is one-one.
Solution For any two elements x1, x2 R such that f (x1) = f (x2), we have
4x1 1 = 4x2 1
4x1 = 4x2, i.e., x1 = x2
Hence f is one-one.
Example 5 If f = {(5, 2), (6, 3)}, g = {(2, 5), (3, 6)}, write f o g.
Solution f o g = {(2, 2), (3, 3)}
Example 6 Let f : R R be the function defined by f (x) = 4x 3 x R. Then
write f 1.
MATHEMATICS
Solution
Given that f (x) = 4x 3 = y (say), then

4x = y + 3
x=
Hence
y +3
4
(y) =
y +3
4
(x) =
y +3
4
Example 7 Is the binary operation * defined on Z (set of integer) by

m * n = m n + mn m, n Z commutative?
Solution No. Since for 1, 2 Z, 1 * 2 = 1 2 + 1.2 = 1 while 2 * 1 = 2 1 + 2.1 = 3
so that 1 * 2 2 * 1.
Example 8 If f = {(5, 2), (6, 3)} and g = {(2, 5), (3, 6)}, write the range of f and g.
Solution The range of f = {2, 3} and the range of g = {5, 6}.
Example 9 If A = {1, 2, 3} and f, g are relations corresponding to the subset of A A
indicated against them, which of f, g is a function? Why?
f = {(1, 3), (2, 3), (3, 2)}
g = {(1, 2), (1, 3), (3, 1)}
Solution f is a function since each element of A in the first place in the ordered pairs
is related to only one element of A in the second place while g is not a function because
1 is related to more than one element of A, namely, 2 and 3.
Example 10 If A = {a, b, c, d} and f = {a, b), (b, d), (c, a), (d, c)}, show that f is oneone from A onto A. Find f 1.
Solution f is one-one since each element of A is assigned to distinct element of the set
A. Also, f is onto since f (A) = A. Moreover, f 1 = {(b, a), (d, b), (a, c), (c, d)}.
Example 11 In the set N of natural numbers, define the binary operation * by m * n =
g.c.d (m, n), m, n N. Is the operation * commutative and associative?
Solution The operation is clearly commutative since
m * n = g.c.d (m, n) = g.c.d (n, m) = n * m m, n N.
It is also associative because for l, m, n N, we have
l * (m * n) = g. c. d (l, g.c.d (m, n))
= g.c.d. (g. c. d (l, m), n)
= (l * m) * n.
Long Answer (L.A.)

Example 12 In the set of natural numbers N, define a relation R as follows:
n, m N, nRm if on division by 5 each of the integers n and m leaves the remainder
less than 5, i.e. one of the numbers 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4. Show that R is equivalence relation.
Also, obtain the pairwise disjoint subsets determined by R.
Solution R is reflexive since for each a N, aRa. R is symmetric since if aRb, then
bRa for a, b N. Also, R is transitive since for a, b, c N, if aRb and bRc, then aRc.
Hence R is an equivalence relation in N which will partition the set N into the pairwise
disjoint subsets. The equivalent classes are as mentioned below:
A0 = {5, 10, 15, 20 ...}
A1 = {1, 6, 11, 16, 21 ...}
A2 = {2, 7, 12, 17, 22, ...}
A3 = {3, 8, 13, 18, 23, ...}
A4 = {4, 9, 14, 19, 24, ...}
It is evident that the above five sets are pairwise disjoint and
4
A0 A1 A2 A3 A 4 = A i = N .
i =0
Example 13 Show that the function f : R R defined by f (x) =
x
, xR , is
x +1
2
neither one-one nor onto.

Solution For x1, x2 R, consider
f (x1) = f (x2)
x1
x
= 22
+1 x2 +1
x12
x1 x22 + x1 = x2 x12 + x2
x1 x2 (x2 x1) = x2 x1
x1 = x2 or x1 x2 = 1
We note that there are point, x1 and x2 with x1 x2 and f (x1) = f (x2), for instance, if
1
2
2
1
, then we have f (x1) = and f (x2) =
but 2 . Hence
2
5
5
2
f is not one-one. Also, f is not onto for if so then for 1R x R such that f (x) = 1
we take x1 = 2 and x2 =
MATHEMATICS
which gives
x
=1 . But there is no such x in the domain R, since the equation
x +1
2
x2 x + 1 = 0 does not give any real value of x.

Example 14 Let f, g : R R be two functions defined as f (x) = x + x and
g (x) = x x x R. Then, find f o g and g o f.
Solution Here f (x) = x + x which can be redefined as
2 x if x 0
f (x) =
0 if x < 0
Similarly, the function g defined by g (x) = x x may be redefined as

0 if x 0
g (x) =
2 x if x < 0
Therefore, g o f gets defined as :

For x 0, (g o f ) (x) = g (f (x) = g (2x) = 0
and for x < 0, (g o f ) (x) = g (f (x) = g (0) = 0.
Consequently, we have (g o f ) (x) = 0, x R.
Similarly, f o g gets defined as:
For x 0, (f o g ) (x) = f (g (x) = f (0) = 0,
and for x < 0, (f o g ) (x) = f (g(x)) = f (2 x) = 4x.
i.e.
0, x > 0
( f o g ) ( x) =
4 x , x < 0
Example 15 Let R be the set of real numbers and f : R R be the function defined
by f (x) = 4x + 5. Show that f is invertible and find f 1.
Solution Here the function f : R R is defined as f (x) = 4x + 5 = y (say). Then
4x = y 5
or
x=
y 5
.
4
This leads to a function g : R R defined as

g (y) =
Therefore,
y 5
.
4
( g o f ) (x) = g(f (x) = g (4x + 5)

=
or
Similarly
4x + 5 5
= x
4
g o f = IR
(f o g) (y) = f (g(y))
y 5
= f
4
y 5
= 4
+5 = y
4
or
f o g = IR .
Hence f is invertible and f 1 = g which is given by

f
(x) =
x 5
4
Example 16 Let * be a binary operation defined on Q. Find which of the following

binary operations are associative
(i) a * b = a b for a, b Q.
ab
for a, b Q.
(ii) a * b =
4
(iii) a * b = a b + ab for a, b Q.
(iv) a * b = ab2 for a, b Q.
Solution
(i) * is not associative for if we take a = 1, b = 2 and c = 3, then
(a * b) * c = (1 * 2) * 3 = (1 2) * 3 = 1 3 = 4 and
a * (b * c) = 1 * (2 * 3) = 1 * (2 3) = 1 ( 1) = 2.
MATHEMATICS
Thus (a * b) * c a * (b * c) and hence * is not associative.

(ii) * is associative since Q is associative with respect to multiplication.
(iii) * is not associative for if we take a = 2, b = 3 and c = 4, then
(a * b) * c = (2 * 3) * 4 = (2 3 + 6) * 4 = 5 * 4 = 5 4 + 20 = 21, and
a * (b * c) = 2 * (3 * 4) = 2 * (3 4 + 12) = 2 * 11 = 2 11 + 22 = 13
(iv) * is not associative for if we take a = 1, b = 2 and c = 3, then (a * b) * c =
(1 * 2) * 3 = 4 * 3 = 4 9 = 36 and a * (b * c) = 1 * (2 * 3) = 1 * 18 =
1 182 = 324.
Objective Type Questions

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Examples 17 to 25.
Example 17 Let R be a relation on the set N of natural numbers defined by nRm if n
divides m. Then R is
(A) Reflexive and symmetric
(B) Transitive and symmetric
(C) Equivalence
(D) Reflexive, transitive but not
symmetric
Solution The correct choice is (D).
Since n divides n, n N, R is reflexive. R is not symmetric since for 3, 6 N,
3 R 6 6 R 3. R is transitive since for n, m, r whenever n/m and m/r n/r, i.e., n
divides m and m divides r, then n will devide r.
Example 18 Let L denote the set of all straight lines in a plane. Let a relation R be
defined by lRm if and only if l is perpendicular to m l, m L. Then R is
(A) reflexive
(C) transitive
(B) symmetric
(D) none of these
Solution The correct choice is (B).

Example 19 Let N be the set of natural numbers and the function f : N N be
defined by f (n) = 2n + 3 n N. Then f is
(A) surjective
(C) bijective
Solution (B) is the correct option.
(B) injective
(D) none of these
Example 20 Set A has 3 elements and the set B has 4 elements. Then the number of
injective mappings that can be defined from A to B is

(A) 144
(B) 12
(C) 24
(D) 64
Solution The correct choice is (C). The total number of injective mappings from the
set containing 3 elements into the set containing 4 elements is 4P3 = 4! = 24.
Example 21 Let f : R R be defined by f (x) = sin x and g : R R be defined by
g (x) = x2, then f o g is
(A) x2 sin x
(B) (sin x)2
(C) sin x2
(D)
sin x
x2
Solution (C) is the correct choice.

Example 22 Let f : R R be defined by f (x) = 3x 4. Then f 1 (x) is given by
x+4
3
(C) 3x + 4
(A)
x
4
3
(D) None of these
(B)
Solution (A) is the correct choice.

Example 23 Let f : R R be defined by f (x) = x2 + 1. Then, pre-images of 17
and 3, respectively, are
(A) , {4, 4}
(B) {3, 3},
(C) {4, 4},
(D) {4, 4, {2, 2}
1
Solution (C) is the correct choice since for f ( 17 ) = x f (x) = 17 or x2 + 1 = 17
x = 4 or f 1 ( 17 ) = {4, 4} and for f 1 (3) = x f (x) = 3 x2 + 1
= 3 x2 = 4 and hence f 1 ( 3) = .
Example 24 For real numbers x and y, define xRy if and only if x y + 2 is an
irrational number. Then the relation R is
(A) reflexive
(B) symmetric
(C) transitive
(D) none of these
Solution (A) is the correct choice.
Fill in the blanks in each of the Examples 25 to 30.
Example 25 Consider the set A = {1, 2, 3} and R be the smallest equivalence relation
on A, then R = ________
10
MATHEMATICS
Solution R = {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3)}.

Example 26 The domain of the function f : R R defined by f (x) =
x 2 3x + 2 is
________.
Solution Here x2 3x + 2 0
(x 1) (x 2) 0
x 1 or x 2
Hence the domain of f = ( , 1] [2, )
Example 27 Consider the set A containing n elements. Then, the total number of
injective functions from A onto itself is ________.
Solution n!
Example 28 Let Z be the set of integers and R be the relation defined in Z such that
aRb if a b is divisible by 3. Then R partitions the set Z into ________ pairwise
disjoint subsets.
Solution Three.
Example 29 Let R be the set of real numbers and * be the binary operation defined on
R as a * b = a + b ab a, b R. Then, the identity element with respect to the
binary operation * is _______.
Solution 0 is the identity element with respect to the binary operation *.
State True or False for the statements in each of the Examples 30 to 34.
Example 30 Consider the set A = {1, 2, 3} and the relation R = {(1, 2), (1, 3)}. R is a
transitive relation.
Solution True.
Example 31 Let A be a finite set. Then, each injective function from A into itself is not
surjective.
Solution False.
Example 32 For sets A, B and C, let f : A B, g : B C be functions such that
g o f is injective. Then both f and g are injective functions.
Solution False.
Example 33 For sets A, B and C, let f : A B, g : B C be functions such that
g o f is surjective. Then g is surjective
Solution True.
11
Example 34 Let N be the set of natural numbers. Then, the binary operation * in N
defined as a * b = a + b, a, b N has identity element.
Solution False.
1.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
1. Let A = {a, b, c} and the relation R be defined on A as follows:
R = {(a, a), (b, c), (a, b)}.
Then, write minimum number of ordered pairs to be added in R to make R
reflexive and transitive.
2.
Let D be the domain of the real valued function f defined by f (x) =
25 x 2 .
Then, write D.
3.
Let f , g : R R be defined by f (x) = 2x + 1 and g (x) = x2 2, x R,

respectively. Then, find g o f.
4.
5.
Let f : R R be the function defined by f (x) = 2x 3 x R. write f 1.

If A = {a, b, c, d} and the function f = {(a, b), (b, d), (c, a), (d, c)}, write f 1.
6.
If f : R R is defined by f (x) = x2 3x + 2, write f (f (x)).
7.
Is g = {(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 5), (4, 7)} a function? If g is described by
g (x) = x + , then what value should be assigned to and .
8.
Are the following set of ordered pairs functions? If so, examine whether the
mapping is injective or surjective.
(i) {(x, y): x is a person, y is the mother of x}.
(ii){(a, b): a is a person, b is an ancestor of a}.
If the mappings f and g are given by
f = {(1, 2), (3, 5), (4, 1)} and g = {(2, 3), (5, 1), (1, 3)}, write f o g.
9.
10. Let C be the set of complex numbers. Prove that the mapping f : C R given by
f (z) = |z|, z C, is neither one-one nor onto.
11. Let the function f : R R be defined by f (x) = cosx, x R. Show that f is
neither one-one nor onto.
12. Let X = {1, 2, 3}and Y = {4, 5}. Find whether the following subsets of X Y are
functions from X to Y or not.
(i)
f = {(1, 4), (1, 5), (2, 4), (3, 5)} (ii)
g = {(1, 4), (2, 4), (3, 4)}
(iii)
h = {(1,4), (2, 5), (3, 5)}
(iv)
k = {(1,4), (2, 5)}.
13. If functions f : A B and g : B A satisfy g o f = IA, then show that f is oneone and g is onto.
12
MATHEMATICS
14. Let f : R R be the function defined by f (x) = 2 cos x
R.Then, find
the range of f.
15. Let n be a fixed positive integer. Define a relation R in Z as follows: a, b Z,
aRb if and only if a b is divisible by n . Show that R is an equivalance relation.
Long Answer (L.A.)

16. If A = {1, 2, 3, 4 }, define relations on A which have properties of being:
(a)
reflexive, transitive but not symmetric
(b)
symmetric but neither reflexive nor transitive
(c)
reflexive, symmetric and transitive.
17. Let R be relation defined on the set of natural number N as follows:
R = {(x, y): x N, y N, 2x + y = 41}. Find the domain and range of the
relation R. Also verify whether R is reflexive, symmetric and transitive.
18. Given A = {2, 3, 4}, B = {2, 5, 6, 7}. Construct an example of each of the
following:
(a) an injective mapping from A to B
(b) a mapping from A to B which is not injective
(c) a mapping from B to A.
19. Give an example of a map
(i) which is one-one but not onto
(ii) which is not one-one but onto
(iii) which is neither one-one nor onto.
x2
20. Let A = R {3}, B = R {1}. Let f : A B be defined by f (x) = x 3
x A . Then show that f is bijective.
21. Let A = [1, 1]. Then, discuss whether the following functions defined on A are
one-one, onto or bijective:
(i)
f ( x)
(iii) h( x )
x
2
(ii) g(x) = x
xx
(iv) k(x) = x2.
22. Each of the following defines a relation on N:

(i)
x is greater than y, x, y N
(ii)
x + y = 10, x, y N
23.
24.
25.
26.
13
(iii)
x y is square of an integer x, y N
(iv)
x + 4y = 10 x, y N.
Determine which of the above relations are reflexive, symmetric and transitive.
Let A = {1, 2, 3, ... 9} and R be the relation in A A defined by (a, b) R (c, d) if
a + d = b + c for (a, b), (c, d) in A A. Prove that R is an equivalence relation
and also obtain the equivalent class [(2, 5)].
Using the definition, prove that the function f : A B is invertible if and only if
f is both one-one and onto.
Functions f , g : R R are defined, respectively, by f (x) = x2 + 3x + 1,
g (x) = 2x 3, find
(i) f o g
(ii) g o f
(iii) f o f
(iv) g o g
Let * be the binary operation defined on Q. Find which of the following binary
operations are commutative
(i) a * b = a b
(iii) a * b = a + ab
a, b Q
a, b Q
(ii) a * b = a2 + b2
(iv) a * b = (a b)2
27. Let * be binary operation defined on R by a * b = 1 + ab,

operation * is
(i) commutative but not associative
(ii) associative but not commutative
(iii) neither commutative nor associative
(iv) both commutative and associative
a, b Q
a, b Q
a, b R. Then the

Choose the correct answer out of the given four options in each of the Exercises from
28 to 47 (M.C.Q.).
28. Let T be the set of all triangles in the Euclidean plane, and let a relation R on T
be defined as aRb if a is congruent to b a, b T. Then R is
(A) reflexive but not transitive
(B) transitive but not symmetric
(C) equivalence
(D) none of these
29. Consider the non-empty set consisting of children in a family and a relation R
defined as aRb if a is brother of b. Then R is
(A) symmetric but not transitive
(B) transitive but not symmetric
(C) neither symmetric nor transitive
(D) both symmetric and transitive
14
MATHEMATICS
30. The maximum number of equivalence relations on the set A = {1, 2, 3} are
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 5
31. If a relation R on the set {1, 2, 3} be defined by R = {(1, 2)}, then R is

(A) reflexive
(B) transitive
(C) symmetric
(D) none of these
32. Let us define a relation R in R as aRb if a b. Then R is

(A) an equivalence relation
(B) reflexive, transitive but not

symmetric
(C) symmetric, transitive but

not reflexive
(D) neither transitive nor reflexive

but symmetric.
33. Let A = {1, 2, 3} and consider the relation

R = {1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3), (1, 2), (2, 3), (1,3)}.
Then R is
(A) reflexive but not symmetric
(B) reflexive but not transitive
(C) symmetric and transitive
(D) neither symmetric, nor

transitive
34. The identity element for the binary operation * defined on Q ~ {0} as
a*b=
ab
2
a, b Q ~ {0} is
(A) 1
(B) 0
(C) 2
(D) none of these
35. If the set A contains 5 elements and the set B contains 6 elements, then the
number of one-one and onto mappings from A to B is
(A) 720
(B) 120
(C) 0
(D) none of these
36. Let A = {1, 2, 3, ...n} and B = {a, b}. Then the number of surjections from A into
B is
(A)
P2
(C) 2n 1
(B) 2n 2
(D) None of these
37. Let f : R R be defined by f (x) =
1
x
x R. Then f is
(A) one-one
(B) onto
(C) bijective
(D) f is not defined
38. Let f : R R be defined by f (x) = 3x2 5 and g : R R by g (x) =
x
.
x +1
Then g o f is
(A)
3 x 2 5
9 x 4 30 x 2 + 26
(B)
3 x 2 5
9 x 4 6 x 2 + 26
(C)
3x 2
x4 + 2 x2 4
(D)
3x 2
9 x 4 + 30 x 2 2
39. Which of the following functions from Z into Z are bijections?

(A) f (x) = x3
(B) f (x) = x + 2
(C) f (x) = 2x + 1
(D) f (x) = x2 + 1
40. Let f : R R be the functions defined by f (x) = x3 + 5. Then f 1 (x) is
1
(A) ( x + 5) 3
(B) ( x 5) 3
(C) (5 x) 3
(D) 5 x
41. Let f : A B and g : B C be the bijective functions. Then (g o f)1 is

(A)
(C)
f 1 o g1
g 1 o f1
(B) f o g
(D) g o f
3x + 2
3
42. Let f : R R be defined by f (x) = 5 x 3 . Then
5
1
(A)
f (x) = f (x)
(B) f 1 (x) = f (x)
(C)
(fof)x=x
15
(D) f
(x) =
1
f (x)
19
x ,if x is rational
43. Let f : [0, 1] [0, 1] be defined by f (x) =
1 x, if x isirrational
16
MATHEMATICS
Then (f o f) x is
(A)
constant
(B) 1 + x
(C)
x
(D) none of these
44. Let f : [2, ) R be the function defined by f (x) = x2 4x + 5, then the range
of f is
(A)
R
(B) [1, )
(B) [5, )
(C)
[4, )
45. Let f : N R be the function defined by f (x) =
2 x 1
and g : Q R be
2
another function defined by g (x) = x + 2. Then (g o f)

(A)
7
2
46. Let f : R R be defined by
(C)
3
is
2
(B) 1
(B) none of these
2x: x > 3
f ( x) = x 2 :1< x 3
3 x : x 1
Then f ( 1) + f (2) + f (4) is

(A)
9
(C)
5
(B) 14
(D) none of these
47. Let f : R R be given by f (x) = tan x. Then f 1 (1) is

(A)
(C)
4
does not exist
(B) {n +
: n Z}
4
(D) none of these
Fill in the blanks in each of the Exercises 48 to 52.

48. Let the relation R be defined in N by aRb if 2a + 3b = 30. Then R = ______.
49. Let the relation R be defined on the set
A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} by R = {(a, b) : |a2 b2| < 8. Then R is given by _______.
50. Let f = {(1, 2), (3, 5), (4, 1) and g = {(2, 3), (5, 1), (1, 3)}. Then g o f = ______
and f o g = ______.
51. Let f : R R be defined by f ( x ) =
17
. Then ( f o f o f ) (x) = _______

1 + x2
52. If f (x) = (4 (x7)3}, then f 1(x) = _______.
State True or False for the statements in each of the Exercises 53 to 63.
53. Let R = {(3, 1), (1, 3), (3, 3)} be a relation defined on the set A = {1, 2, 3}. Then R
is symmetric, transitive but not reflexive.
54. Let f : R R be the function defined by f (x) = sin (3x+2) x R. Then f is
invertible.
55. Every relation which is symmetric and transitive is also reflexive.
56. An integer m is said to be related to another integer n if m is a integral multiple of
n. This relation in Z is reflexive, symmetric and transitive.
57. Let A = {0, 1} and N be the set of natural numbers. Then the mapping
f : N A defined by f (2n1) = 0, f (2n) = 1,
n N, is onto.
58.The relation R on the set A = {1, 2, 3} defined as R = {{1, 1), (1, 2), (2, 1), (3, 3)}
is reflexive, symmetric and transitive.
59. The composition of functions is commutative.
60. The composition of functions is associative.
61. Every function is invertible.
62. A binary operation on a set has always the identity element.
Chapter
INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC
FUNCTIONS
2.1 Overview
2.1.1 Inverse function
Inverse of a function f exists, if the function is one-one and onto, i.e, bijective.
Since trigonometric functions are many-one over their domains, we restrict their
domains and co-domains in order to make them one-one and onto and then find
their inverse. The domains and ranges (principal value branches) of inverse
trigonometric functions are given below:
Functions
Domain
Range (Principal value
branches)
y = sin1x
[1,1]
y = cos1x
[1,1]
y = cosec1x
R (1,1)
y = sec1x
R (1,1)
y = tan1x
y = cot1x

,
2 2
[0,]

, {0}
2 2
[0,]

,
2 2
R
(0,)
Notes:
(i) The symbol sin1x should not be confused with (sinx)1. Infact sin1x is an
angle, the value of whose sine is x, similarly for other trigonometric functions.
(ii) The smallest numerical value, either positive or negative, of is called the
principal value of the function.
INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS
19
(iii) Whenever no branch of an inverse trigonometric function is mentioned, we mean

the principal value branch. The value of the inverse trigonometic function which
lies in the range of principal branch is its principal value.
2.1.2 Graph of an inverse trigonometric function
The graph of an inverse trigonometric function can be obtained from the graph of
original function by interchanging x-axis and y-axis, i.e, if (a, b) is a point on the graph
of trigonometric function, then (b, a) becomes the corresponding point on the graph of
its inverse trigonometric function.
It can be shown that the graph of an inverse function can be obtained from the
corresponding graph of original function as a mirror image (i.e., reflection) along the
line y = x.
2.1.3 Properties of inverse trigonometric functions
1.
2.
3.
,
2 2
sin1 (sin x) = x
cos1(cos x) = x
x [0, ]
tan1(tan x) = x

x
,
2 2
cot1(cot x) = x
x ( 0, )
sec1(sec x) = x
x [0, ]
cosec1(cosec x) = x :
sin (sin1 x) = x
cos (cos1 x) = x
tan (tan1 x) = x
cot (cot1 x) = x
sec (sec1 x) = x
cosec (cosec1 x) = x
x
x
x
x
x
x
:
:
:
:
:
:

, {0}
2 2
[1,1]
[1,1]
R
R
R (1,1)
R (1,1)
sin 1
1
x
cosec 1 x :
x R (1,1)
cos 1
1
x
sec 1 x
x R (1,1)
20
MATHEMATICS
1
cot 1 x
x
= + cot1x
tan 1
x>0
x<0
:
:
:
:
:
:
x
x
x
x
x
x
[1,1]
[1,1]
R
R
R (1,1)
R (1,1)
4.
sin1 (x) = sin1x

cos1 (x) = cos1x
tan1 (x) = tan1x
cot1 (x) = cot1x
sec1 (x) = sec1x
cosec1 (x) = cosec1x
5.
sin1x + cos1x =
x [1,1]
tan1x + cot1x =
x R
x R[1,1]
sec1x + cosec1x =
6.
x y
tan1x + tan1y = tan1 1 xy : xy < 1
x y
; xy > 1
tan1x tan1y = tan1 1 + xy
7.
2tan1x = sin1
2x
1 x2
1 x 1
1 x2
1 x2
x0
1 < x < 1
2tan1x = cos1
2x
1 x2
2.2 Solved Examples
Short Answer (S.A.)
2tan1x = tan1
Example 1 Find the principal value of cos1x, for x =
3
.
2
Solution If cos
3
2 = , then cos =
3
.
2
Since we are considering principal branch, [0, ]. Also, since

the first quadrant, hence cos1
3
2
Example 2 Evaluate tan1 sin
Solution tan1 sin
= tan1 sin = tan1(1) = .

2

4
Example 3 Find the value of cos1 cos

Solution cos1 cos
13
= cos1
6
.
6
Example 4 Find the value of tan1 tan
9
8
13
.
6
1
cos (2 + ) = cos cos
6
6
Solution tan1 tan
3
> 0, being in
2
.
6
21
9
.
8
= tan1 tan +
8
1
= tan tan =
8
8
1
Example 5 Evaluate tan (tan ( 4)).
Solution Since tan (tan1x) = x, x R, tan (tan1( 4) = 4.

Example 6 Evaluate: tan1 3 sec1 (2) .
22
MATHEMATICS
Solution
tan1 3 sec1 ( 2) = tan1 3 [ sec12]

=
1
+ cos 1 =
+ = .
3
3 3
3
2
3
1
1
Example 7 Evaluate: sin cos sin 2
1
1
Solution sin cos sin
3
2
sin 1 cos
1
= sin
1
2
.
6
Example 8 Prove that tan(cot1x) = cot (tan1x). State with reason whether the
equality is valid for all values of x.
Solution Let cot1x = . Then cot = x
or, tan
= x tan 1 x =
2
2
1
1
1
So tan(cot x) = tan = cot = cot cot x = cot(tan x)
2
2
The equality is valid for all values of x since tan1x and cot1x are true for x R.
1 y
Example 9 Find the value of sec tan
.
2
1
Solution Let tan
which gives
Therefore,
y
y

= , where , . So, tan = ,
2
2
2 2
sec=
y2
4
2
4 + y2
y
sec tan 1 = sec =

.
2
2
1
Example 10 Find value of tan (cos1x) and hence evaluate tan cos
Solution Let cos1x = , then cos = x, where [0,]
8
.
17
tan(cos1x) = tan =
Therefore,
1 cos 2
1 x2
=
.
x
cos
2
Hence
8
1
8
15 .
17
tan cos 1 =
=
8
17
8
17
1
Example 11 Find the value of sin 2cot
5
12
5
5
Solution Let cot1 = y . Then cot y =
.
12
12

1
Now sin 2cot
5
12
= sin 2y
= 2
= 2siny cosy
12
13

since cot y < 0, so y 2 ,
5
13
120
169
1
Example 12 Evaluate cos sin
1
Solution cos sin
1
= cos sin
3
1
= 4 1 4
1
4
sec 1
4
3
1
4
3
1 1
+ cos 1
sec 1
= cos sin
4
3
4
4
1
3
1
3
cos cos 1
sin sin 1 sin cos 1
4
4
4
4
2
3 15 1 7
= 4 4 4 4
1
3
1
4
4
3 15 7
16
23
24
MATHEMATICS
Long Answer (L.A.)

Example 13 Prove that 2sin1
Solution Let sin1
Thus tan =
Therefore,
3
17
tan1
=
5
31
4

3
3
= , then sin = , where ,
5
5
2 2
3
3
, which gives = tan1 .
4
4
2sin1
3
17
tan1
5
31
= 2 tan1
17
31
= 2 tan1
3
17
tan1
4
31
3
2.
17
24
17
tan 1 4 tan 1
tan 1
=
31 = tan1
1 9
7
31
16
24 17
tan 1 7 31
=
=
1+ 24 . 17
4
7 31
Example 14 Prove that

cot17 + cot18 + cot118 = cot13
Solution We have
cot17 + cot18 + cot118
= tan1
1
1
1
+ tan1 + tan1
7
8
18
1 1
7+8
1 1
tan
+ tan
=
1
1
18
1
7 8
1
(since cot1 x = tan1
(since x . y =
1
, if x > 0)
x
1 1
. < 1)
7 8
3 1
+
tan 1 11 18
1 3
1 1
+ tan
= tan
=
1 3 1
11
18
11 18
1
= tan
65
195
1
= tan
1
3
25
(since xy < 1)
= cot1 3
Example 15 Which is greater, tan 1 or tan1 1?

Solution From Fig. 2.1, we note that tan x is an increasing function in the interval
tan 1 > tan . This gives

, , since 1 >
4
4
2 2
tan x
tan 1 > 1
4
tan 1 > 1 > tan1 (1).
tan 1 > 1 >
p/2
p/4
p/2
Example 16 Find the value of
sin 2 tan 1 + cos (tan 1 3) .

3
Solution Let tan1

Therefore,
2
= x and tan1
3
3 = y so that tan x =
2
and tan y =
3
sin 2 tan 1 + cos (tan 1 3)

3
= sin (2x) + cos y

2
2.
1
2 tan x
1
3 +
+
2
=
= 1 + tan x
4
1+ tan 2 y
1+
1+
3
9
( )
12 1 37
+ = .
13 2 26
3.
26
MATHEMATICS
Example 17 Solve for x
1 x 1
1
tan 1
= tan x, x > 0
+
x
1
2
Solution
1 x
1
From given equation, we have 2 tan 1
= tan x
1+ x
2 tan 1 1 tan 1 x = tan 1 x
2 = 3tan 1 x
= tan 1 x
6
4
x=
1
3
Example 18 Find the values of x which satisfy the equation

sin1 x + sin1 (1 x) = cos1 x.
Solution From the given equation, we have
sin (sin1 x + sin1 (1 x)) = sin (cos1x)
sin (sin1 x) cos (sin1 (1 x)) + cos (sin1 x) sin (sin1 (1 x) ) = sin (cos1 x)
x 1 (1 x) 2 + (1 x) 1 x 2 = 1 x 2
x 2 x x 2 + 1 x 2 (1 x 1) = 0
x
2 x x 2 1 x 2 = 0
x = 0
or
2x x2 = 1 x2
x = 0
or
x=
1
.
2
Example 19 Solve the equation sin16x + sin1 6 3 x =
1
Solution From the given equation, we have sin1 6x = sin 6 3 x
2
1
sin (sin1 6x) = sin sin 6 3 x
2
6x = cos (sin1 6 3 x)
6x = 1 108x 2 . Squaring, we get
27
36x2 = 1 108x2
x=
144x2 = 1
1
12
Note that x =
1
1
is the only root of the equation as x =
does not satisfy it.
12
12
Example 20
Show that

1 sin cos
2 tan1 tan .tan = tan
2
cos + sin
4 2

.tan
2
4 2
1
Solution L.H.S. = tan

1 tan 2 tan 2
2
4 2
2 tan
1
1 2 x
since 2 tan x = tan
1 x 2
1 tan
2
2 tan
2 1 + tan
1
2
= tan
2
tan

2
1 tan 2
2 1 + tan
2
. 1 tan 2
2
= tan 1
2
2
2
1
tan
tan
1
tan
+
2
2
2
2 tan
28
MATHEMATICS
2
1 tan
2
tan 1

2
2
2
1 + tan 1 tan
+ 2 tan 1+ tan
2
2
2
2
1 tan 2
2
2
2
2
1+ tan
1+ tan
2
2
tan 1
2
1 tan
2 tan
2+
2
2
2
1+ tan
1+ tan
2
2
sin cos
tan 1
cos + sin
2 tan
2 tan
= R.H.S.
Objective type questions

Example 21 Which of the following corresponds to the principal value branch of tan1?

(A) ,
2 2

(B) ,
2 2

(C) , {0}
2 2
(D) (0, )
Solution (A) is the correct answer.

Example 22 The principal value branch of sec1 is

(A) , {0}
2 2
(B)
(C) (0, )

(D) ,
2 2
[0, ]
29
Solution (B) is the correct answer.

Example 23 One branch of cos1 other than the principal value branch corresponds to
3
2, 2
(C) (0, )
(A)
(B)
[ , 2]
(D) [2, 3]
Solution (D) is the correct answer.

43
1
Example 24 The value of sin cos
is
5
(A)
3
5
(B)
7
5
(C)
10
(D)
10
40 + 3
3
1
1
Solution (D) is the correct answer. sin cos
= sin cos 8 +
5
5
3
3
1
1
= sin cos
= sin sin
5
2 5

1
= sin sin = .
10
10
Example 25 The principal value of the expression cos1 [cos ( 680)] is

(A)
2
9
(B)
2
9
(C)
34
9
(D)
Solution (A) is the correct answer. cos1 (cos (680)) = cos1 [cos (720 40)]
= cos1 [cos ( 40)] = cos1 [cos (40)] = 40 =
2
.
9
Example 26 The value of cot (sin1x) is

(A)
1+ x 2
x
x
(B)
1+ x 2
30
MATHEMATICS
(C)
1
x
(D)
1 x 2
.
x
Solution (D) is the correct answer. Let sin1 x = , then sin = x
cosec =
1 + cot2 =
Example 27 If tan1x =
(A)
1
x
1
x2
cosec2 =
cot =
1
x2
1 x 2
.
x
for some x R, then the value of cot1x is

10
(B)
2
5
(C)
3
5
Solution (B) is the correct answer. We know tan1x + cot 1x =

cot1x =
(D)
. Therefore
2
2
10
cot1x =
=
.
5
2
10
Example 28 The domain of sin1 2x is

(A) [0, 1]
1
(C) ,
2
(B) [ 1, 1]
1
2
(D) [2, 2]
Solution (C) is the correct answer. Let sin12x = so that 2x = sin .

Now 1 sin 1, i.e., 1 2x 1 which gives
3
Example 29 The principal value of sin1 2 is
1
1
x .
2
2
4
5
(A)
2
3
(B)
(C)
4
3
(D)
31
5
.
3

3
1
1
sin 1
= sin sin = sin sin = .
3
3
3
Example 30 The greatest and least values of (sin1x)2 + (cos1x)2 are respectively
(A)
5 2
2
and
4
8
(B)
and
2
2
(C)
2
2
and
4
4
(D)
2
and 0 .
4
Solution (A) is the correct answer. We have

(sin1x)2 + (cos1x)2 = (sin1x + cos1x)2 2 sin1x cos1 x
=
2sin 1 x sin 1
4
2
2
sin 1 x + 2 sin 1 x
4
1
2
1
+
2
sin
x
sin
x
=
2
8
2
1
2
2
sin
x
+
=
4 16
2 2
2 2
2
+ ,
2
i.e.
Thus, the least value is

and the Greatest value is
8
2 4 16
16
i.e.
5 2
.
4
Example 31 Let = sin1 (sin ( 600), then value of is
32
MATHEMATICS
(A)
(B)
(C)
2
3
(D)
2
.
3
10
1
sin 1 sin 600
= sin sin
180
3
2
2
1
1
= sin sin 4 = sin sin
3
3
1
1
= sin sin = sin sin = .
3
3 3
Example 32 The domain of the function y = sin1 ( x2) is

(A) [0, 1]
(C) [1, 1]
(B) (0, 1)
(D)
Solution (C) is the correct answer. y = sin1 ( x2) siny = x2

i.e. 1 x2 1 (since 1 sin y 1)
1 x2 1
0 x2 1
x 1 i.e. 1 x 1
Example 33 The domain of y = cos1 (x2 4) is

(A) [3, 5]
(B) [0, ]
(C) 5, 3 5, 3
(D) 5, 3 3, 5
Solution (D) is the correct answer. y = cos1 (x2 4 ) cosy = x2 4

i.e. 1 x2 4 1 (since 1 cos y 1)
3 x2 5
3 x 5
x 5, 3 3, 5
Example 34 The domain of the function defined by f (x) = sin1x + cosx is
(B) [1, + 1]
(A) [1, 1]
( , )
(C)
33
(D)
Solution (A) is the correct answer. The domain of cos is R and the domain of sin1 is
[1, 1]. Therefore, the domain of cosx + sin1x is R [ 1,1] , i.e., [1, 1].
Example 35 The value of sin (2 sin1 (.6)) is
(A) .48
(B) .96
(C) 1.2
(D) sin 1.2
Solution (B) is the correct answer. Let sin1 (.6) = , i.e., sin = .6.
Now sin (2) = 2 sin cos = 2 (.6) (.8) = .96.
Example 36 If sin1 x + sin1 y =
(A)
, then value of cos1 x + cos1 y is

2
(B)
(C) 0
Solution (A) is the correct answer. Given that sin1 x + sin1 y =

Therefore,
(D)
2
3
(D)
3
4
.
2
1
1
cos x + cos y =
2
2
2
cos1x + cos1y =
.
2
1
1 3
+ tan 1 is
Example 37 The value of tan cos
5
4
(A)
19
8
(B)
8
19
(C)
19
12
1
1 3
+ tan 1 = tan
Solution (A) is the correct answer. tan cos
5
4
1
1 4
+ tan 1
tan
3
4
34
MATHEMATICS
= tan tan 1
4 1
3+4
1 19 19
= tan tan = .
8 8
1 4 1
3 4
Example 38 The value of the expression sin [cot1 (cos (tan1 1))] is
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C)
1
3

sin [cot1 (cos
1 2
2
1
=
)] = sin [cot1
]= sin sin
3
3
2
4
1
Example 39 The equation tan1x cot1x = tan1
has
3
(A) no solution
(B) unique solution
(C) infinite number of solutions
(D) two solutions
Solution (B) is the correct answer. We have
tan1x cot1x =
and tan1x + cot1x =

6
2
Adding them, we get 2tan1x =
2
3
tan1x =
i.e., x = 3 .
3
Example 40 If 2 sin1x + cos1x , then

(A) =
, =
2
2
(B) = 0, =
(C) =
, =
2
2
(D) = 0, = 2
(D)
2
.
3
Solution (B) is the correct answer. We have
+
+
sin1x +
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
0 sin x + (sin x + cos x)
0 2sin1x + cos1x
sin1 x 2
2
Example 41 The value of tan2 (sec12) + cot2 (cosec13) is

(A) 5
(B) 11
(C) 13
(D) 15

tan2 (sec12) + cot2 (cosec13) = sec2 (sec12) 1 + cosec2 (cosec13) 1
= 22 1 + 32 2 = 11.
2.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
5
13
1
+ cos cos
.
6
6
1.
1
Find the value of tan tan
2.
1
Evaluate cos cos
3.
Prove that cot
4.
Find the value of tan
5.
Find the value of tan1 tan .

3
6.
Show that 2tan1 (3) =
3
2
2 cot 1 3
1
3
7.
cot 1
1
3
1 4
+ tan .
2
3
tan 1 sin
35
36
7.
MATHEMATICS
Find the real solutions of the equation
tan 1
x ( x + 1) + sin 1 x 2 + x + 1 =
.
2
8.
1 1
1
Find the value of the expression sin 2 tan
+ cos tan 2 2 .
3
9.
If 2 tan1 (cos ) = tan1 (2 cosec ), then show that =
,
4
where n is any integer.

10.
1 1
1 1
Show that cos 2 tan
= sin 4 tan
.
7
3
11.
Solve the following equation cos tan 1 x = sin cot 1 .

4
Long Answer (L.A.)

1
1 x2
1 x 2
12.
Prove that tan
13.
1
Find the simplified form of cos
14.
1
Prove that sin
8
3
77
sin 1
sin 1
.
17
5
85
15.
1
Show that sin
5
3
63
cos 1
tan 1
.
13
5
16
16.
1
Prove that tan
17.
1
Find the value of 4 tan
1 x 1 x
1
cos 1 x 2
2
3
4
3
cos x
sin x , where x
,
.
5
5
4 4
1
2
1
+ tan 1 = sin 1
.
4
9
5
1
1
tan 1
.
5
239
37
4+ 7
4 7
and justify why the other value
3
3
1 1 3
sin
2
4
18.
Show that tan
19.
is ignored?
If a1, a2, a3,...,an is an arithmetic progression with common difference d, then
evaluate the following expression.
d
d
d
d
1
1
1
tan tan 1
+ tan
+ ... + tan
+ tan
1 + a1 a2
1 + a2 a3
1 + a3 a4
1 + an 1 an

Choose the correct answers from the given four options in each of the Exercises from
20 to 37 (M.C.Q.).
20.
Which of the following is the principal value branch of cos1x?

(A)
21.

2 , 2
(B)
(0, )
2
Which of the following is the principal value branch of cosec1x?
(C)
[0, ]
(D)
(A)
2 2
(B)
23.
[0, ]
2

(D)
2 , 2
If 3tan1 x + cot1 x = , then x equals

2 , 2 {0}
(A)
(C)
22.
(0, )
(B)
The value of sin1

(A)
3
5
(B)
cos
(C)
33
5
is
7
5
(C)
10
(D)
1
.
2
(D)
10
38
MATHEMATICS
24.
The domain of the function cos1 (2x 1) is

(A)
[0, 1]
(B)
[1, 1]
(C)
( 1, 1)
(D)
[0, ]
25.
The domain of the function defined by f (x) = sin1

(A)
(C)
26.
[1, 2]
[0, 1]
1
If cos sin
28.
1
The value of cos cos
3
2
(B)
If tan1 x + tan1y =
If sin
2a
1 a2
(D)
.96
(D)
sin 1.5
3
2
5
2
(D)
7
2
(D)
(D)
(C)
5
6
(C)
1
2
is
7
6
4
, then cot1 x + cot1 y equals
5
5
1
is equal to
(B)
(A)
31.
(C)
The value of the expression 2 sec1 2 + sin1

(A)
30.
2
5
(B)
The value of sin (2 tan1 (.75)) is equal to

.75
(A)
(B)
1.5
(C)
(A)
29.
[1, 1]
none of these
+ cos 1 x = 0 , then x is equal to

5
1
5
(A)
27.
(B)
(D)
x 1 is
(B)
cos
2
5
1 a 2
1 a2
(C)
tan 1
3
5
2x
, where a, x ]0, 1, then
1 x 2
the value of x is
(A)
(B)
a
2
(C)
(D)
2a
1 a 2
32.
1
The value of cot cos
(A)
33.
25
24
7
25
(B)
The value of the expression tan

(A)
(C)
(B)
5 2
2
(D)
39
is
25
7
24
25
(C)
1
2
cos 1
2
5
(D)
7
24
(D)
is
52
5
1 cos
Hint :tan =
2
1 + cos
34.
If | x | 1, then 2 tan1 x + sin1

(A)
(B)
4 tan1 x
2x
1 x2
0
is equal to
(C)
36.
If cos1 + cos1 + cos1 = 3, then ( + ) + ( + ) + ( + )

equals
(A)
0
(B)
1
(C)
6
(D)
12
The
number
of
real
solutions
of
the
equation
37.

1 + cos 2 x = 2 cos 1 (cos x)in , is
2
(A)
0
(B)
1
(C)
1
1
If cos x > sin x, then
35.
(A)
(C)
1
< x1
2
1 x <
1
2
(B)
0x<
(D)
x>0
(D)
1
2
Infinite
40
MATHEMATICS

38.
1
The principal value of cos1 is__________.
2
39.
3
The value of sin1 sin is__________.
5
40.
If cos (tan1 x + cot1
41.
1
The set of values of sec1 is__________.
2
42.
The principal value of tan1
43.
44.
3 ) = 0, then value of x is__________.
3 is__________.
14
The value of cos1 cos

is__________.
3
The value of cos (sin1 x + cos1 x), |x| 1 is______ .
45.
sin 1 x + cos 1 x
3
,when x =
The value of expression tan
is_________.
2
2
46.
If y = 2 tan1 x + sin1
47.
48.
2x
1 x2
for all x, then____< y <____.
x y
The result tan1x tan1y = tan1 1 + xy is true when value of xy is _____
1
The value of cot (x) for all x R in terms of cot1x is _______.
State True or False for the statement in each of the Exercises 49 to 55.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
All trigonometric functions have inverse over their respective domains.

The value of the expression (cos1 x)2 is equal to sec2 x.
The domain of trigonometric functions can be restricted to any one of their
branch (not necessarily principal value) in order to obtain their inverse functions.
The least numerical value, either positive or negative of angle is called principal
value of the inverse trigonometric function.
The graph of inverse trigonometric function can be obtained from the graph of
their corresponding trigonometric function by interchanging x and y axes.
n
> , nN , is valid is 5.
4
54.
The minimum value of n for which tan1
55.
1 1
The principal value of sin1 cos sin

is .
2
3

41
Chapter
Matrices
3.1 Overview
3.1.1
A matrix is an ordered rectangular array of numbers (or functions). For example,
x 4 3
A= 4 3 x
3 x 4
The numbers (or functions) are called the elements or the entries of the matrix.
The horizontal lines of elements are said to constitute rows of the matrix and the
vertical lines of elements are said to constitute columns of the matrix.
3.1.2
Order of a Matrix
A matrix having m rows and n columns is called a matrix of order m n or simply

m n matrix (read as an m by n matrix).
In the above example, we have A as a matrix of order 3 3 i.e.,
3 3 matrix.
In general, an m n matrix has the following rectangular array :
A = [aij]m n
a11
a
21
=
am1
a12
a22
am 2
a1n
a23 a2 n
1 i m, 1 j n i, j N.
am3 amn m n
a13
The element, aij is an element lying in the ith row and jth column and is known as the
(i, j)th element of A. The number of elements in an m n matrix will be equal to mn.
3.1.3
Types of Matrices
(i)
A matrix is said to be a row matrix if it has only one row.
MATRICES
(ii)
43
A matrix is said to be a column matrix if it has only one column.
(iii) A matrix in which the number of rows are equal to the number of columns,
is said to be a square matrix. Thus, an m n matrix is said to be a square
matrix if m = n and is known as a square matrix of order n.
(iv) A square matrix B = [bij]nn is said to be a diagonal matrix if its all non
diagonal elements are zero, that is a matrix B = [bij]nn is said to be a
diagonal matrix if bij = 0, when i j.
(v)
A diagonal matrix is said to be a scalar matrix if its diagonal elements are

equal, that is, a square matrix B = [bij]nn is said to be a scalar matrix if
bij = 0, when i j
bij = k, when i = j, for some constant k.
(vi) A square matrix in which elements in the diagonal are all 1 and rest are
all zeroes is called an identity matrix.
In other words, the square matrix A = [aij]nn is an identity matrix, if
aij = 1, when i = j and aij = 0, when i j.
(vii) A matrix is said to be zero matrix or null matrix if all its elements are
zeroes. We denote zero matrix by O.
(ix) Two matrices A = [aij] and B = [bij] are said to be equal if
(a) they are of the same order, and
(b) each element of A is equal to the corresponding element of B, that is,
aij = bij for all i and j.
3.1.4
Additon of Matrices
Two matrices can be added if they are of the same order.

3.1.5
Multiplication of Matrix by a Scalar
If A = [aij] mn is a matrix and k is a scalar, then kA is another matrix which is obtained

by multiplying each element of A by a scalar k, i.e. kA = [kaij]mn
3.1.6
Negative of a Matrix
The negative of a matrix A is denoted by A. We define A = (1)A.

3.1.7
Multiplication of Matrices
The multiplication of two matrices A and B is defined if the number of columns of A is

equal to the number of rows of B.
44
MATHEMATICS
Let A = [aij] be an m n matrix and B = [bjk] be an n p matrix. Then the product of

the matrices A and B is the matrix C of order m p. To get the
(i, k)th element cik of the matrix C, we take the ith row of A and kth column of B,
multiply them elementwise and take the sum of all these products i.e.,
cik = ai1 b1k + ai2 b2k + ai3 b3k + ... + ain bnk
The matrix C = [cik]mp is the product of A and B.
Notes:
3.1.8
1.
If AB is defined, then BA need not be defined.
2.
If A, B are, respectively m n, k l matrices, then both AB and BA are

defined if and only if n = k and l = m.
3.
If AB and BA are both defined, it is not necessary that AB = BA.
4.
If the product of two matrices is a zero matrix, it is not necessary that

one of the matrices is a zero matrix.
5.
For three matrices A, B and C of the same order, if A = B, then

AC = BC, but converse is not true.
6.
A. A = A2, A. A. A = A3, so on
Transpose of a Matrix
1.
If A = [aij] be an m n matrix, then the matrix obtained by interchanging

the rows and columns of A is called the transpose of A.
Transpose of the matrix A is denoted by A or (AT). In other words, if
A = [aij]mn, then AT = [aji]nm.
2.
Properties of transpose of the matrices
For any matrices A and B of suitable orders, we have

(i) (AT)T = A,
(ii) (kA)T = kAT (where k is any constant)
(iii) (A + B)T = AT + BT
(iv) (AB)T = BT AT
3.1.9
Symmetric Matrix and Skew Symmetric Matrix

(i)
A square matrix A = [aij] is said to be symmetric if AT = A, that is,

aij = aji for all possible values of i and j.
MATRICES
(ii)
45
A square matrix A = [aij] is said to be skew symmetric matrix if AT = A,

that is aji = aij for all possible values of i and j.
Note : Diagonal elements of a skew symmetric matrix are zero.

(iii) Theorem 1: For any square matrix A with real number entries, A + AT is
a symmetric matrix and A AT is a skew symmetric matrix.
(iv) Theorem 2: Any square matrix A can be expressed as the sum of a
symmetric matrix and a skew symmetric matrix, that is
A=
(A + A T ) (A A T )
+
2
2
3.1.10 Invertible Matrices

(i)
If A is a square matrix of order m m, and if there exists another square

matrix B of the same order m m, such that AB = BA = Im, then, A is said
to be invertible matrix and B is called the inverse matrix of A and it is
denoted by A1.
Note :
1.
A rectangular matrix does not possess its inverse, since for the products
BA and AB to be defined and to be equal, it is necessary that matrices A
and B should be square matrices of the same order.
2.
If B is the inverse of A, then A is also the inverse of B.
(ii)
Theorem 3 (Uniqueness of inverse) Inverse of a square matrix, if it

exists, is unique.
(iii) Theorem 4 : If A and B are invertible matrices of same order, then

(AB)1 = B1A1.
3.1.11 Inverse of a Matrix using Elementary Row or Column Operations
To find A1 using elementary row operations, write A = IA and apply a sequence of
row operations on (A = IA) till we get, I = BA. The matrix B will be the inverse of A.
Similarly, if we wish to find A1 using column operations, then, write A = AI and apply a
sequence of column operations on A = AI till we get, I = AB.
Note : In case, after applying one or more elementary row (or column) operations on
A = IA (or A = AI), if we obtain all zeros in one or more rows of the matrix A on L.H.S.,
then A1 does not exist.
46
MATHEMATICS
3.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer (S.A.)
Example 1 Construct a matrix A = [a ij] 22 whose elements a ij are given by
aij = e2ix sin jx .
Solution
Thus
For
i = 1, j = 1,
a 11
e2x sin x
For
i = 1, j = 2,
a 12
e2x sin 2x
For
i = 2, j = 1,
a 21
e4x sin x
For
i = 2, j = 2,
a 22
e4x sin 2x
e 2 x sin x e 2 x sin 2 x
A = 4x
4x
e sin x e sin 2 x
Example 2 If A =
2 3
1 3 2
1
4 6 8
,B=
,C=
,D=
, then
1 2
4 3 1
2
5 7 9
which of the sums A + B, B + C, C + D and B + D is defined?

Solution Only B + D is defined since matrices of the same order can only be added.
Example 3 Show that a matrix which is both symmetric and skew symmetric is a zero
matrix.
Solution Let A = [aij] be a matrix which is both symmetric and skew symmetric.
Since A is a skew symmetric matrix, so A = A.
Thus for all i and j, we have aij = aji.
(1)
Again, since A is a symmetric matrix, so A = A.

Thus, for all i and j, we have
aji = aij
Therefore, from (1) and (2), we get
aij = aij for all i and j
or
2aij = 0,
i.e.,
aij = 0 for all i and j. Hence A is a zero matrix.
(2)
MATRICES
47
1 2 x
Example 4 If [ 2 x 3]
= O , find the value of x.
3 0 8
Solution We have
[2x
or
or
1 2 x
3]
= O 2x 9 4x
3 0 8
2 x2
9x
32 x
= 0
= 0
2 x 2 23x 0
x(2 x 23) 0
x
8
23
2
x = 0, x =
Example 5 If A is 3 3 invertible matrix, then show that for any scalar k (non-zero),
kA is invertible and (kA)1 =
1 1
A
k
Solution We have
(kA)
1 1
A
k
Hence (kA) is inverse of
k.
1 1
A
k
1
k
(A. A1) = 1 (I) = I
or
(kA)1 =
1 1
A
k
Long Answer (L.A.)

Example 6 Express the matrix A as the sum of a symmetric and a skew symmetric
matrix, where
2
A= 7
1
4
3
2
6
5 .
4
Solution We have
2
A= 7
1
4
3
2
6
5 ,
4
then A =
2 7
4 3
6 5
1
2
4
48
MATHEMATICS
1
A + A
=
2
2
Hence
4 11
11 6
5 3
5
11
3 =
2
8
5
2
1
A A
=
2
2
and
0
3
7
3
0
7
7
3
7 =
2
0
7
2
11
2
5
2
3
2
3
3
2
3
2
0
7
2
7
2
7
2
0
Therefore,
11
2
2
A + A A A 11
+
=
3
2
2
2
5 3
2
2
Example 7 If A =
1 3
2 0
1 2
5
0
2

3 3
+
2 2

7
4
2
3
2
0
7
2
2
1 , then show that A satisfies the equation
3
A34A23A+11I = O.
Solution
A2 = A A =
7
2 2 4 6
7
= 7 3 5 = A
2
.
1 2 4
0
1 3
2 0
1 2
2
1 3
1 2 0
3
1 2
2
1
3
MATRICES
1 + 6 + 2
2 + 0 1
=
1 + 4 + 3
3+0+ 4
6+02
3+ 0+ 6
2 3 + 6
4 + 0 3
2 2 + 9
9 7 5
= 1 4 1
8 9 9
and
9 7 5
1 3
A3 = A2 A = 1 4 1 2 0
8 9 9
1 2
9 14 5
= 1 8 1
8 18 9
2
1
3
27 0 10
3 0 2
24 0 18
18 7 15
2 4 3
16 9 27
28 37 26
= 10 5 1
35 42 34
Now
A3 4A2 3A + 11(I)
28 37 26
10 5 1 4
=
35 42 34
9 7 5
1 3 2
1 0 0
1 4 1 3 2 0 1 +11 0 1 0
8 9 9
1 2 3
0 0 1
28 36 3 + 11
10 4 6 + 0
=
35 32 3 + 0
37 28 9 + 0
5 16 + 0 + 11
42 36 6 + 0
26 20 6 + 0
1 4 + 3 + 0
34 36 9 + 11
49
50
MATHEMATICS
0 0 0
= 0 0 0
0 0 0
=O
2 3
Example 8 Let A =
. Then show that A2 4A + 7I = O.
1 2
Using this result calculate A5 also.

3 2 3
1 12
2 2
Solution We have A =
=
,
1 2 1 2
4 1
8 12
7 0
4A=
and 7 I =
.
4 8
0 7
Therefore,
Thus
0 0
1 8 + 7 12 12 + 0
=
A2 4A + 7I =
=O
0 0
4 + 4 + 0 1 8 + 7
A2 = 4A 7I
A3 = A.A2 = A (4A 7I) = 4 (4A 7I) 7A

= 16A 28I 7A = 9A 28I
and so
A5 = A3A2
= (9A 28I) (4A 7I)
= 36A2 63A 112A + 196I
= 36 (4A 7I) 175A + 196I
= 31A 56I
2 3
1 0
= 31
56
1 2
0 1
118 93
=
31 118
MATRICES
51

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in Examples 9 to 12.
Example 9 If A and B are square matrices of the same order, then
(A + B) (A B) is equal to
(A) A2 B2
(B)
A2 BA AB B2
(C) A2 B2 + BA AB
(D)
A2 BA + B2 + AB
Solution (C) is correct answer. (A + B) (A B) = A (A B) + B (A B)

= A2 AB + BA B2
Example 10 If A =
2
4
1
5
2
3
and B = 4
1
1
(A) only AB is defined
3
2 , then
5
(B) only BA is defined
(C) AB and BA both are defined (D) AB and BA both are not defined.
Solution
defined.
(C) is correct answer. Let A = [aij]23 B = [bij]32. Both AB and BA are
0 0 5
Example 11 The matrix A = 0 5 0 is a
5 0 0
(A) scalar matrix
(B)
diagonal matrix
(C) unit matrix
(D)
square matrix
Solution (D) is correct answer.

Example 12 If A and B are symmetric matrices of the same order, then (AB BA)
is a
(A) Skew symmetric matrix
(B)
Null matrix
(C) Symmetric matrix
(D)
None of these
Solution (A) is correct answer since

(AB BA) = (AB) (BA)
52
MATHEMATICS
= (BA AB)
= (AB BA)
Fill in the blanks in each of the Examples 13 to 15:
Example 13 If A and B are two skew symmetric matrices of same order, then AB is
symmetric matrix if ________.
Solution AB = BA.
Example 14 If A and B are matrices of same order, then (3A 2B) is equal to
________.
Solution 3A 2B.
Example 15 Addition of matrices is defined if order of the matrices is ________
Solution Same.
State whether the statements in each of the Examples 16 to 19 is true or false:
Example 16 If two matrices A and B are of the same order, then 2A + B = B + 2A.
Solution True
Example 17 Matrix subtraction is associative
Solution False
Example 18 For the non singular matrix A, (A)1 = (A1).
Solution True
Example 19 AB = AC B = C for any three matrices of same order.
Solution False
3.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
1.
If a matrix has 28 elements, what are the possible orders it can have? What if it
has 13 elements?
a
2.
In the matrix A =
2
0
1
3
5
x
x2
y
2
5
, write :
MATRICES
(i)
The order of the matrix A
(ii)
The number of elements
(iii) Write elements a23, a31, a12

3.
Construct a2 2 matrix where

(i 2 j ) 2
2
(i)
aij =
(ii)
aij = | 2i
3j|
4.
Construct a 3 2 matrix whose elements are given by aij = ei.xsinjx
5.
Find values of a and b if A = B, where

a 4 3b
A=
,
8
6
6.
8.
If possible, find the sum of the matrices A and B, where A =
and B =
7.
B=
b2 2
b 2 5b
2a 2
If
X=
x
a
3
5
y
b
1
2
1
3 ,
z
6
1
2
and Y =
3
7
(ii)
1
2
1
, find
4
(i)
X +Y
2X 3Y
(iii)
A matrix Z such that X + Y + Z is a zero matrix.
Find non-zero values of x satisfying the matrix equation:

( x 2 + 8)
2 x 2
8 5 x
2
2
x
+
=
4 4 x
3 x
(10)
9.
3
2
If A =
0 1
0
and B =
1 1
1
24
6x .
1
, show that (A + B) (A B) A2 B2.
0
53
54
MATHEMATICS
10. Find the value of x if
1 x 1
1 3 2
2 5 1
15 3 2
5
1
11. Show that A =
1
2 = O.
x
3
satisfies the equation A2 3A 7I = O and hence
2
find A1.
12. Find the matrix A satisfying the matrix equation:
2 1
A
3 2
4
13. Find A, if 1
3
3
14. If A = 1
2
3
5
A=
4
1
0
2
1 0
=
3
0 1
4 8 4
1 2 1
3 6 3
and B =
2 1 2
, then verify (BA)2 B2A2
1 2 4
15. If possible, find BA and AB, where

2 1 2
,B=
A=
1 2 4
4 1
2 3 .
1 2
16. Show by an example that for A O, B O, AB = O.
1 4
2 4 0
2 8 . Is (AB) = BA?
17. Given A =
and B =
3 9 6
1 3
18. Solve for x and y:
MATRICES
55
2
3
8
x + y +
= O.
1
5
11
19. If X and Y are 2 2 matrices, then solve the following matrix equations for X and Y
2X + 3Y =
2 3
, 3X + 2Y =
4 0
2
1
2
.
5
20. If A = 3 5 , B = 7 3 , then find a non-zero matrix C such that AC = BC.

21. Give an example of matrices A, B and C such that AB = AC, where A is nonzero matrix, but B C.
1 2
2
, B=
2 1
3
22. If A =
3
and C =
4
1 0
, verify :
1 0
(i) (AB) C = A (BC) (ii) A (B + C) = AB + AC.
x 0 0
a 0 0
23. If P = 0 y 0 and Q = 0 b 0 , prove that
0 0 z
0 0 c
xa
PQ = 0
0
0 0
yb 0 = QP.
0 zc
24. If : 2 1 3
25. If A =
2 1 ,
1 0
1 1
0 1
B =
A (B + C) = (AB + AC).
1
0
1
1
0 = A, find A.
1
5 3
8 7
4
and C =
6
1 2
1 0
1
, verify that
2
56
MATHEMATICS
1 0
26. If A = 2 1
0 1
1
3 , then verify that A2 + A = A (A + I), where I is 3 3 unit
1
matrix.
0
27. If A =
4
1
3
2
and
4
(i)
(A) = A
(ii)
(AB) = BA
(iii)
(kA) = (kA).
4 0
B = 1 3 , then verify that :
2 6
1 2
1 2
28. If A = 4 1 , B = 6 4 , then verify that :
5 6
7 3
(i)
(2A + B) = 2A + B
(ii)
(A B) = A B.
29. Show that AA and AA are both symmetric matrices for any matrix A.
30. Let A and B be square matrices of the order 3 3. Is (AB)2 = A2 B2 ? Give
reasons.
31. Show that if A and B are square matrices such that AB = BA, then
(A + B)2 = A2 + 2AB + B2.
32. Let A =
1 2
4 0
2
, B=
, C =
1 3
1 5
1
Show that:
(a)
A + (B + C) = (A + B) + C
(b)
A (BC) = (AB) C
0
and a = 4, b = 2.
2
MATRICES
(c)
(a + b)B = aB + bB
(d)
a (CA) = aC aA
(e)
(AT)T = A
(f)
(bA)T = b AT
(g)
(AB)T = BT AT
(h)
(A B)C = AC BC
(i)
(A B)T = AT BT
57
cos sin
cos2 sin2
33. If A =
, then show that A2 =
.
sin cos
sin2 cos2
34. If A =
0
x
x
0 1
, B=
0
1 0
0
35. Verify that A2 = I when A = 4
3
and x2 = 1, then show that (A + B)2 = A2 + B2.
1
3
3
1
4 .
4
36. Prove by Mathematical Induction that (A)n = (An), where n N for any square
matrix A.
37. Find inverse, by elementary row operations (if possible), of the following matrices
1 3
5 7
(i)
38. If
xy
z 6 x
39. If A =
matrix.
(ii)
1
2
3
.
6
8 w
, then find values of x, y, z and w.
0 6
1 5
9 1
and B =
, find a matrix C such that 3A + 5B + 2C is a null
7 12
7 8
58
MATHEMATICS
40. If A =
3
4
5
, then find A2 5A 14I. Hence, obtain A3.
2
41. Find the values of a, b, c and d, if

3
a b
=
c d
a
6
1 2d
4
c d
a b
.
3
42. Find the matrix A such that
2
1
1 0 A =
3 4
43. If A =
1 8
1
2
9 22
10
5 .
15
1 2
, find A2 + 2A + 7I.
4 1
cos sin
44. If A =
, and A 1 = A , find value of .
sin cos
0 a
45. If the matrix 2 b
c 1
3
1 is a skew symmetric matrix, find the values of a, b and c.
0
cos x sinx
46. If P (x) =
, then show that
sinx cosx
P (x) . P (y) = P (x + y) = P (y) . P (x).

47. If A is square matrix such that A2 = A, show that (I + A)3 = 7A + I.
48. If A, B are square matrices of same order and B is a skew-symmetric matrix,
show that ABA is skew symmetric.
Long Answer (L.A.)
49. If AB = BA for any two sqaure matrices, prove by mathematical induction that
(AB)n = An Bn.
MATRICES
59
0 2 y z
50. Find x, y, z if A = x y z satisfies A = A1.
x y z
51. If possible, using elementary row transformations, find the inverse of the following
matrices
(i)
2
5
3
1 3
3 1
2 3
(ii)
2
52. Express the matrix 1
4
2
1
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
(iii)
2 0
5 1
0 1
1
0
3
3 1
1 2 as the sum of a symmetric and a skew symmetric
1 2
matrix.
Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Exercises
53 to 67.
0 0 4
53. The matrix P = 0 4 0 is a
4 0 0
(A)
square matrix
(B)
diagonal matrix
(C)
unit matrix
(D)
none
54. Total number of possible matrices of order 3 3 with each entry 2 or 0 is

(A)
55. If
(B)
27
(C)
81
(D)
2x y 4x
7 7 y 13
=
, then the value of x + y is
5x 7 4x
y
x 6
(A)
x = 3, y = 1
(B)
x = 2, y = 3
(C)
x = 2, y = 4
(D)
x = 3, y = 3
512
60
MATHEMATICS
56. If A =
sin 1 ( x ) tan
sin
cot 1 ( x)
, B =
cos 1 ( x )
sin
tan
tan 1 ( x)
, then
A B is equal to
(A)
(B)
(C)
2I
(D)
1
I
2
57. If A and B are two matrices of the order 3 m and 3 n, respectively, and
m = n, then the order of matrix (5A 2B) is
(A)
58. If A =
m3
(B) 3 3
(C) m n
(D) 3 n
0 1
, then A2 is equal to
1 0
(A)
0 1
1 0
(B)
1 0
1 0
(C)
0 1
0 1
(D)
1 0
0 1
59. If matrix A = [aij]2 2, where aij = 1 if i j

= 0 if i = j
then A2 is equal to
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
None of these
1 0 0
60. The matrix 0 2 0 is a
0 0 4
(A)
identity matrix
(B)
symmetric matrix
(C)
skew symmetric matrix
(D)
none of these
MATRICES
61. The matrix
0
5
8
61
5 8
0 12 is a
12 0
(A)
diagonal matrix
(B)
symmetric matrix
(C)
(D)
scalar matrix
62. If A is matrix of order m n and B is a matrix such that AB and BA are both
defined, then order of matrix B is
(A)
mm
(B)
nn
(C)
nm
(D)
mn
63. If A and B are matrices of same order, then (ABBA) is a

(A)
(B)
null matrix
(C)
symmetric matrix
(D)
unit matrix
64. If A is a square matrix such that A2 = I, then (AI)3 + (A + I)3 7A is equal to

(A)
(B)
IA
(C)
I+A
(D)
3A
65. For any two matrices A and B, we have

(A)
AB = BA
(B)
AB BA
(C)
AB = O
(D)
None of the above
66. On using elementary column operations C2 C2 2C1 in the following matrix

equation
1
2
3
1
=
4
0
1
1
3 1
, we have :
2 4
(A)
1 5
0 4 =
(B)
1
1 5
0 4 = 0
1
2
1
2
1
1
3 5
2 0
3 5
0 2
62
MATHEMATICS
(C)
1
2
5
1
=
0
0
3
1
3 1
2 4
(D)
1
2
5
1
=
0
0
1
1
3 5
2 0
67. On using elementary row operation R1 R1 3R2 in the following matrix equation:
4 2
1 2
=
3 3
0 3
2 0
, we have :
1 1
(A)
5
3
7
1
=
3
0
7
3
(B)
5
3
7
1 2
=
3
0 3
1
1
(C)
5
3
7
1
=
3
1
2 0
1 1
(D)
4
5
2
1 2
=
7
3 3
2
7
2 0
1 1
3
1
2 0
1 1
Fill in the blanks in each of the Exercises 6881.

68. _________ matrix is both symmetric and skew symmetric matrix.
69. Sum of two skew symmetric matrices is always _________ matrix.
70. The negative of a matrix is obtained by multiplying it by _________.
71. The product of any matrix by the scalar _________ is the null matrix.
72. A matrix which is not a square matrix is called a _________ matrix.
73. Matrix multiplication is _________ over addition.
74. If A is a symmetric matrix, then A3 is a _________ matrix.
75. If A is a skew symmetric matrix, then A2 is a _________.
MATRICES
63
76. If A and B are square matrices of the same order, then

(i)
(AB) = _________.
(ii)
(kA) = _________.
(iii)
[k (A B)] = _________.
(k is any scalar)
77. If A is skew symmetric, then kA is a _________. (k is any scalar)

78. If A and B are symmetric matrices, then
(i)
AB BA is a _________.
(ii)
BA 2AB is a _________.
79. If A is symmetric matrix, then BAB is _________.

80. If A and B are symmetric matrices of same order, then AB is symmetric if and
only if _________.
81. In applying one or more row operations while finding A1 by elementary row
operations, we obtain all zeros in one or more, then A1 _________.
State Exercises 82 to 101 which of the following statements are True or False
82. A matrix denotes a number.
83. Matrices of any order can be added.
84. Two matrices are equal if they have same number of rows and same number of
columns.
85. Matrices of different order can not be subtracted.
86. Matrix addition is associative as well as commutative.
87. Matrix multiplication is commutative.
88. A square matrix where every element is unity is called an identity matrix.
89. If A and B are two square matrices of the same order, then A + B = B + A.
90. If A and B are two matrices of the same order, then A B = B A.
91. If matrix AB = O, then A = O or B = O or both A and B are null matrices.
92. Transpose of a column matrix is a column matrix.
93. If A and B are two square matrices of the same order, then AB = BA.
94. If each of the three matrices of the same order are symmetric, then their sum is
a symmetric matrix.
64
MATHEMATICS
95. If A and B are any two matrices of the same order, then (AB) = AB.
96. If (AB) = B A, where A and B are not square matrices, then number of rows
in A is equal to number of columns in B and number of columns in A is equal to
number of rows in B.
97. If A, B and C are square matrices of same order, then AB = AC always implies
that B = C.
98. AA is always a symmetric matrix for any matrix A.
2
99. If A =
1
3
4
2
1
and B = 4
2
2
3
5 , then AB and BA are defined and equal.
1
100. If A is skew symmetric matrix, then A2 is a symmetric matrix.

101. (AB)1 = A1. B1, where A and B are invertible matrices satisfying commutative
property with respect to multiplication.
Chapter
DETERMINANTS
4.1
Overview
To every square matrix A = [aij] of order n, we can associate a number (real or complex)
called determinant of the matrix A, written as det A, where aij is the (i, j)th element of A.
If A
a b
, then determinant of A, denoted by |A| (or det A), is given by
c d
|A| =
= ad bc.
Remarks
(i)
Only square matrices have determinants.
(ii)
For a matrix A, A is read as determinant of A and not, as modulus of A.
4.1.1 Determinant of a matrix of order one

Let A = [a] be the matrix of order 1, then determinant of A is defined to be equal to a.
4.1.2 Determinant of a matrix of order two

a b
Let A = [aij] =
be a matrix of order 2. Then the determinant of A is defined
c d
as: det (A) = |A| = ad bc.
4.1.3 Determinant of a matrix of order three

The determinant of a matrix of order three can be determined by expressing it in terms
of second order determinants which is known as expansion of a determinant along a
row (or a column). There are six ways of expanding a determinant of order 3
corresponding to each of three rows (R1, R2 and R3) and three columns (C1, C2 and
C3) and each way gives the same value.
66
MATHEMATICS
Consider the determinant of a square matrix A = [aij]33, i.e.,
a11
a21
a31
a12
a22
a32
a13
a23
a33
Expanding |A| along C1, we get

a22
|A| = a11 (1)1+1 a
32
a23
a12
2+1
+
a
(1)
21
a33
a32
a13
a12
3+1
+
a
(1)
31
a33
a22
a13
a23
= a11(a22 a33 a23 a32) a21 (a12 a33 a13 a32) + a31 (a12 a23 a13 a22)
Remark In general, if A = kB, where A and B are square matrices of order n, then
|A| = kn |B|, n = 1, 2, 3.
4.1.4 Properties of Determinants

For any square matrix A, |A| satisfies the following properties.
(i)
|A| = |A|, where A = transpose of matrix A.
(ii)
If we interchange any two rows (or columns), then sign of the determinant
changes.
(iii)
If any two rows or any two columns in a determinant are identical (or
proportional), then the value of the determinant is zero.
(iv)
Multiplying a determinant by k means multiplying the elements of only one row

(or one column) by k.
(v)
If we multiply each element of a row (or a column) of a determinant by constant

k, then value of the determinant is multiplied by k.
(vi)
If elements of a row (or a column) in a determinant can be expressed as the

sum of two or more elements, then the given determinant can be expressed as
the sum of two or more determinants.
DETERMINANTS
(vii)
67
If to each element of a row (or a column) of a determinant the equimultiples of

corresponding elements of other rows (columns) are added, then value of
determinant remains same.
Notes:
(i) If all the elements of a row (or column) are zeros, then the value of the determinant
is zero.
(ii) If value of determinant becomes zero by substituting x = , then x is a
factor of .
(iii) If all the elements of a determinant above or below the main diagonal consists of
zeros, then the value of the determinant is equal to the product of diagonal
elements.
4.1.5 Area of a triangle

Area of a triangle with vertices (x1, y1), (x2, y2) and (x3, y3) is given by
x1
1
x2
2
x3
y1 1
y2 1
.
y3 1
4.1.6 Minors and co-factors

(i)
Minor of an element aij of the determinant of matrix A is the determinant obtained

by deleting ith row and jth column, and it is denoted by Mij.
(ii)
Co-factor of an element aij is given by Aij = (1)i+j Mij.
(iii)
Value of determinant of a matrix A is obtained by the sum of products of elements

of a row (or a column) with corresponding co-factors. For example
|A| = a11 A11 + a12 A12 + a13 A13.
(iv)
If elements of a row (or column) are multiplied with co-factors of elements of

any other row (or column), then their sum is zero. For example,
a11 A21 + a12 A22 + a13 A23 = 0.
4.1.7 Adjoint and inverse of a matrix

(i)
The adjoint of a square matrix A = [aij]nn is defined as the transpose of the matrix
68
MATHEMATICS
[aij]nn, where Aij is the co-factor of the element aij. It is denoted by adj A.
If A
a11
a21
a31
a12
a22
a32
a13
a23 , then adj A
a33
A11
A12
A13
A 21
A 22
A 23
A 31
A 32 , where Aij is co-factor of aij.
A 33
(ii)
A (adj A) = (adj A) A = |A| I, where A is square matrix of order n.
(iii)
A square matrix A is said to be singular or non-singular according as |A| = 0 or

|A| 0, respectively.
(iv)
If A is a square matrix of order n, then |adj A| = |A|n1.
(v)
If A and B are non-singular matrices of the same order, then AB and BA are
also nonsingular matrices of the same order.
(vi)
The determinant of the product of matrices is equal to product of their respective

determinants, that is, |AB| = |A| |B|.
(vii)
If AB = BA = I, where A and B are square matrices, then B is called inverse of

A and is written as B = A1. Also B1 = (A1)1 = A.
(viii) A square matrix A is invertible if and only if A is non-singular matrix.

(ix)
If A is an invertible matrix, then A1 =
1
(adj A)
|A|
4.1.8 System of linear equations

(i)
Consider the equations:
a1x + b1 y + c1 z = d1
a2x + b2 y + c2 z = d2
a3x + b3 y + c3 z = d3,
In matrix form, these equations can be written as A X = B, where

a1
a
A= 2
a3
(ii)
b1
b2
b3
c1
c2 , X
c3
x
y and B
z
d1
d2
d3
Unique solution of equation AX = B is given by X = A1B, where |A| 0.
DETERMINANTS
69
(iii)
A system of equations is consistent or inconsistent according as its solution

exists or not.
(iv)
For a square matrix A in matrix equation AX = B
4.2
(a)
If |A| 0, then there exists unique solution.
(b)
If |A| = 0 and (adj A) B 0, then there exists no solution.
(c)
If |A| = 0 and (adj A) B = 0, then system may or may not be consistent.
Solved Examples
Short Answer (S.A.)

Example 1 If
2x 5
8 x
6 5
, then find x.
8 3
2x 5
8 x
Solution We have
6 5
. This gives
8 3
x2 = 9
2x2 40 = 18 40
1 x
x2
Example 2 If = 1 y
1 z
Solution We have
1
y , 1 = yz
x
z2
1
yz
x
1
zx
y
1
xy , then prove that + 1 = 0.
z
1 1
zx xy
y z
Interchanging rows and columns, we get
1 yz
1 zx
1 xy
x
y
z
x
=
x = 3.
1
y
xyz
z
xyz
x2
xyz
y2
xyz
z2
70
MATHEMATICS
x 1 x2
xyz
y 1 y2
= xyz
z 1 z2
Interchanging C1 and C2
1 x
x2
(1) 1 y
y2
1 z
z2
1 + = 0
Example 3 Without expanding, show that

cosec 2
2
cot
42
cot 2
cosec
40
1
2
1
= 0.
2
Solution Applying C1 C1 C2 C3, we have

cosec 2 cot 2 1
cot
cosec
0
cot 2
1 cosec
40
Example 4 Show that
x
p
q
cot 2
1
2
0 cosec 1 = 0
0
40
2
p q
x q = (x p) (x2 + px 2q2)
q x
Solution Applying C1 C1 C2, we have
x p
p x
0
p q
x q
q x
1 p q
( x p) 1 x q
0 q x
DETERMINANTS
0 p + x 2q
= ( x p) 1
x
q
0
q
x
Applying R1 R1 + R2
Expanding along C1, we have

( x p) ( px x 2 2q 2 ) = ( x p) ( x 2
Example 5 If
b a c a
a b
0
c b , then show that
a c b c
0
px 2q 2 )
is equal to zero.
a b a c
0
b a
b c
0
c a c b
Solution Interchanging rows and columns, we get
Taking 1 common from R1, R2 and R3, we get
b a c a
(1) a b
0
c b
a c b c
0
3
=0
or
=0
Example 6 Prove that (A1) = (A)1, where A is an invertible matrix.

Solution Since A is an invertible matrix, so it is non-singular.
We know that |A| = |A|. But |A| 0. So |A| 0
i.e. A is invertible matrix.
Now we know that AA1 = A1 A = I.

Taking transpose on both sides, we get (A1) A = A (A1) = (I) = I
Hence (A1) is inverse of A, i.e., (A)1 = (A1)
Long Answer (L.A.)
Example 7 If x = 4 is a root of
x 2 3
1 x 1 = 0, then find the other two roots.
3 2 x
71
72
MATHEMATICS
Solution Applying R1 (R1 + R2 + R3), we get
x 4 x 4 x 4
1
1 .
x
x
3
2
Taking (x + 4) common from R1, we get
1 1 1
( x 4) 1 x 1
3 2 x
Applying C2 C2 C1, C3 C3 C1, we get
1
0
0
( x 4) 1 x 1
0 .
3
1 x 3
Expanding along R1,
= (x + 4) [(x 1) (x 3) 0]. Thus, = 0 implies

x = 4, 1, 3
Example 8 In a triangle ABC, if
1
1 sin A
1
1 sin B
1
1 sin C
0 ,
sinA +sin A sinB+sin B sinC+sin C
then prove that ABC is an isoceles triangle.
Solution Let =
1
1 sin A
1
1 sin B
1
1 sin C
sinA +sin 2 A sinB+sin 2 B sinC+sin 2 C
DETERMINANTS
1
1
1
1 sin A 1 sin B 1 sin C
cos 2 A
1
1 sin A
cos 2 B
cos 2 C
sin B sin A
sin C sin B
cos 2 A cos 2 A cos 2 B
cos 2 B cos 2 C
73
R3 R3 R2
. (C3 C3 C2 and C2 C2 C1)
Expanding along R1, we get

= (sinB sinA) (sin2C sin2B) (sinC sin B) (sin2B sin2A)
= (sinB sinA) (sinC sinB) (sinC sin A) = 0
either sinB sinA = 0 or sinC sinB or sinC sinA = 0
A = B or B = C or C = A
i.e. triangle ABC is isoceles.
3
2 sin 3
7 8 cos 2
11 14
2
Example 9 Show that if the determinant
0 , then sin = 0 or
Solution Applying R2 R2 + 4R1 and R3 R3 + 7R1, we get
3
5
10
or
2
sin 3
0 cos 2 4sin 3
0
2 + 7sin3
2 [5 (2 + 7 sin3) 10 (cos2 + 4sin3)] = 0
or
2 + 7sin3 2cos2 8sin3 = 0
or
2 2cos 2 sin 3 = 0
sin (4sin2 + 4sin 3) = 0
1
.
2
74
MATHEMATICS
or
sin = 0 or (2sin 1) = 0 or (2sin + 3) = 0
or
sin = 0 or sin =
1
(Why ?).
2

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Example 10 and 11.
Ax
Example 10 Let
By
Cz
x2 1
y
1 and
A
x
B
y
zy
zx
C
z , then
xy
(A)
1 =
(B)
(C)
1 = 0
(D)
None of these
Solution (C) is the correct answer since
A
x
zy
Ax
x2
xyz
1
By
xyz
Cz
y2
xyz
Example 11 If x, y R, then the determinant
A
=B
C
B C
y z
zx xy
xyz
x
y
z
yz
zx
xy
Ax
x2 1
xyz
By
= xyz
Cz
y2 1
cos x
sin x
cos( x y )
z2 1
sin x
1
cos x
1 lies
sin( x y ) 0
in the interval
(A)
2, 2
(B) [1, 1]
(C)
2,1
(D)
1,
2,
Solution The correct choice is A. Indeed applying R3 R3 cosyR1 + sinyR2, we get
DETERMINANTS
cos x
sin x
0
75
sin x
1
cos x
1
.
0
sin y cos y
Expanding along R3, we have
= (siny cosy) (cos2x + sin2x)

= (siny cosy) =
1
sin y
2
2 cos sin y sin cos y

4
4
=
Hence 2
1
cos y
2
2 sin (y 4 )
2.

Example 12 If A, B, C are the angles of a triangle, then
sin 2 A cotA 1
sin 2 B
2
sin C
cotB 1
................
cotC 1
Solution Answer is 0. Apply R2 R2 R1, R3 R3 R1.

23 + 3
Example 13 The determinant = 15 + 46
3 + 115
Solution Answer is 0.Taking
C1 C3
Example 14
10 is equal to ...............
15
5 common from C 2 and C 3 and applying
3 C2, we get the desired result.

The value of the determinant
76
MATHEMATICS
sin 2 23
sin 2 67
cos180
sin 67
cos 2 180
sin 23
sin 2 23
cos180
..........
sin 2 67
Solution = 0. Apply C1 C1 + C2 + C3.

State whether the statements in the Examples 15 to 18 is True or False.
Example 15
The determinant
cos ( x y )
sin x
cos x
sin ( x y ) cos 2 y
cos x
sin y
sin x
cos y
is independent of x only.
Solution True. Apply R1 R1 + sinyR2 + cosy R3, and expand
Example 16
The value of
1
n
C1
C2
1
n+ 2
n+ 2
C1
C2
n+ 4
n+ 4
C1
is 8.
C2
Solution True
Example 17
If A
x 5 2
2 y 3 , xyz = 80, 3x + 2y + 10z = 20, then
1 1 z
A adj. A
Solution : False.
81 0 0
0 81 0 .
0 0 81
DETERMINANTS
Example 18 If A
0 1 3
1 2 x , A 1
2 3 1
1
2
1
2
1
2
4
3
y
77
5
2
3
2
1
2
then x = 1, y = 1.
Solution True
4.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
Using the properties of determinants in Exercises 1 to 6, evaluate:
1.
x2 x 1 x 1
x 1
x 1
xy 2
0
2
3.
x y
2
x z
5.
zy
2.
xz 2
yz
a x
y
z
x
a y
z
x
y
a z
3x
x
x
4.
x 4
x
x
x
x 4
x
x
x
x 4
6.
x y
3y
y z
y
z
x z
z y
3z
2a
2a
a b c
2b
2b
b c a
2c
2c
c a b
Using the proprties of determinants in Exercises 7 to 9, prove that:
7.
y2 z2
yz
2 2
zx
xy
z x
2
x y
y
0
8.
z
z
y
z
z
y
x
x
x
4 xyz
y
78
9.
MATHEMATICS
a 2 2a 2a 1 1
2a 1
a 2 1
3
3
1
(a 1)3
10.
1
cos C cos B
1
cos A
If A + B + C = 0, then prove that cos C
cos B cos A
1
11.
If the co-ordinates of the vertices of an equilateral triangle with sides of length

x1
a are (x1, y1), (x2, y2), (x3, y3), then x2

x3
y1 1
3a 4
y2 1 =
4 .
y3 1
12.
1 1 sin 3
Find the value of satisfying 4 3 cos 2 = 0 .
2
7 7
13.
4 x 4 x 4 x
If 4 x 4 x 4 x
4 x 4 x 4 x
14.
If a 1 , a 2 , a 3 , ..., a r are in G.P., then prove that the determinant

ar 1
ar 7
ar 11
ar 5
ar 11
ar 17
0 , then find values of x.
ar 9
ar 15
is independent of r.
ar 21
15.
Show that the points (a + 5, a 4), (a 2, a + 3) and (a, a) do not lie on a

straight line for any value of a.
16.
Show that the ABC is an isosceles triangle if the determinant
DETERMINANTS
79
1
1
1
1 + cos B
1 + cos C = 0 .
= 1 + cos A
cos 2 A + cos A cos 2 B + cos B cos 2 C + cos C
17.
Find A if A
0 1 1
A 2 3I
1 0 1 and show that A 1
.
2
1 1 0
Long Answer (L.A.)
18.
1 2 0
If A = 2 1 2 , find A1.
0 1 1
Using
A 1 ,
solve
the
system
x 2y = 10 , 2x y z = 8 , 2y + z = 7.
19.
20.
of
linear
Using matrix method, solve the system

3x + 2y 2z = 3, x + 2y + 3z = 6, 2x y + z = 2 .
Given A
2
4
2
2
2
1
4
4 ,B
5
1
2
0
of
equations
equations
1 0
3 4 , find BA and use this to solve the
1 2
system of equations y + 2z = 7, x y = 3, 2x + 3y + 4z = 17.
21.
22.
a b c
If a + b + c 0 and b c a = 0 , then prove that a = b = c.
c a b
bc a 2
ca b 2
ab c 2
2
Prove that ca b
ab c 2
bc a 2 is divisible by a + b + c and find the
ab c 2
bc a 2
ca b 2
quotient.
80
23.
MATHEMATICS
xa
yb
zc
a b
If x + y + z = 0, prove that yc
zb
za
xc
xb = xyz c a b
ya
b c a
Objective Type Questions (M.C.Q.)

Choose the correct answer from given four options in each of the Exercises from 24 to 37.
24.
25.
26.
If
2x 5
8 x
6
7
2
, then value of x is
3
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
a b b +c a
ba c+a b
The value of determinant
ca a+b c
(A)
a3 + b3 + c 3
(B)
3 bc
(C)
a3 + b3 + c3 3abc
(D)
none of these
The area of a triangle with vertices (3, 0), (3, 0) and (0, k) is 9 sq. units. The
value of k will be
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
b2
27.
ab b c
The determinant ab a
bc ac
bc ac
a b b2
ab equals
c a ab a 2
(A)
abc (bc) (c a) (a b)
(B) (bc) (c a) (a b)
(C)
(a + b + c) (b c) (c a) (a b)
(D) None of these
DETERMINANTS
28.
sin x cos x cos x

The number of distinct real roots of cos x sin x cos x
cos x cos x sin x
0 in the interval
x is
4
4
29.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
If A, B and C are angles of a triangle, then the determinant
1 cos C cos B
cos C
1 cos A is equal to
cos B cos A
1
30.
31.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
None of these
cos t t
Let f (t) = 2sin t t
sin t t
1
f (t )
2t , then lim 2 is equal to
t 0 t
t
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
The maximum value of
(A)
(C)
1
2
1
1
1 cos
1
1 sin
1
81
1
1 is ( is real number)
1
(B)
3
2
(D)
2 3
4
82
MATHEMATICS
0
32.
33.
34.
35.
If f (x) = x a
x b
x a
0
x c
x b
x c , then
0
(A)
f (a) = 0
(B)
f (b) = 0
(C)
f (0) = 0
(D)
f (1) = 0
2
If A = 0 2
1 1
3
5 , then A1 exists if
3
(A)
=2
(B)
(C)
(D)
None of these
If A and B are invertible matrices, then which of the following is not correct?
(A)
adj A = |A|. A1
(B)
det(A)1 = [det (A)]1
(C)
(AB)1 = B1 A1
(D)
(A + B)1 = B1 + A1
1 x
1
1
If x, y, z are all different from zero and 1 1 y
1
0 , then value of
1
1 1 z
x1 + y1 + z1 is
36.
(A)
xyz
(B)
x1 y1 z1
(C)
x y z
(D)
x
The value of the determinant x 2 y
x y
x y
x
x 2y
x 2y
x y is
x
(A)
9x2 (x + y)
(B)
9y2 (x + y)
(C)
3y2 (x + y)
(D)
7x2 (x + y)
DETERMINANTS
37.
83
1 2 5
There are two values of a which makes determinant, = 2 a
1 = 86, then
0 4 2a
sum of these number is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Fill in the blanks

38.
If A is a matrix of order 3 3, then |3A| = _______ .
39.
If A is invertible matrix of order 3 3, then |A1 | _______ .
40.
If x, y, z R, then the value of determinant
2x 2 x
2x 2 x
3 x 3 x
3 x 3 x
4x 4 x
4x 4 x
1
1 is
1
equal to _______.
2
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
0
cos sin
0 = _________.
If cos2 = 0, then cos sin
sin
0
cos
If A is a matrix of order 3 3, then (A2)1 = ________.

If A is a matrix of order 3 3, then number of minors in determinant of A are
________.
The sum of the products of elements of any row with the co-factors of
corresponding elements is equal to _________.
x 3 7
If x = 9 is a root of 2 x 2 = 0, then other two roots are __________.
7 6 x
0
yx
zx
xyz
0
z y
xz
yz
0
= __________.
84
47.
MATHEMATICS
If f (x) =
(1 + x)17
(1 + x)19
(1 + x) 23
(1 + x) 23
(1 + x) 29
(1 + x)34 = A + Bx + Cx 2 + ..., then
(1 + x) 41
(1 + x) 43
(1 + x) 47
A = ________.
State True or False for the statements of the following Exercises:
48.
A3
= A
1 3
, where A is a square matrix and |A| 0.
1 1
A , where a is any real number and A is a square matrix.
a
49.
(aA)1 =
50.
|A1| |A|1 , where A is non-singular matrix.
51.
If A and B are matrices of order 3 and |A| = 5, |B| = 3, then

|3AB| = 27 5 3 = 405.
52.
If the value of a third order determinant is 12, then the value of the determinant
formed by replacing each element by its co-factor will be 144.
53.
x +1 x + 2 x + a
x + 2 x + 3 x + b = 0 , where a, b, c are in A.P.
x + 3 x + 4 x+c
54.
|adj. A| = |A|2 , where A is a square matrix of order two.
55.
sin A cos A sin A + cos B

The determinant sin B cos A sin B+ cos B is equal to zero.
sin C cos A sin C + cos B
56.
x a
If the determinant y b
z c
p u l f
q v m g splits into exactly K determinants of
r+w n h
order 3, each element of which contains only one term, then the value of K is 8.
DETERMINANTS
a
b
c
p
q
r
p+ x a+ x a+ p
x
y 16 , then 1 = q + y b + y b + q = 32 .
r + z c+ z c+r
z
57.
Let
58.
1
1
1
1
The maximum value of 1 (1 sin )
1
1
1 cos
is
1
.
2
85
Chapter
CONTINUITY AND
DIFFERENTIABILITY
5.1
Overview
5.1.1 Continuity of a function at a point

Let f be a real function on a subset of the real numbers and let c be a point in the
domain of f. Then f is continuous at c if
lim f ( x) = f (c)
x c
More elaborately, if the left hand limit, right hand limit and the value of the function
at x = c exist and are equal to each other, i.e.,
lim f ( x)
x
f (c) lim f ( x)
then f is said to be continuous at x = c.
5.1.2 Continuity in an interval

(i) f is said to be continuous in an open interval (a, b) if it is continuous at every
point in this interval.
(ii) f is said to be continuous in the closed interval [a, b] if
f is continuous in (a, b)
lim
xa+
f (x) = f (a)
lim f (x) = f (b)
x b
CONTINUITY AND DIFFERENTIABILITY
87
5.1.3 Geometrical meaning of continuity

(i) Function f will be continuous at x = c if there is no break in the graph of the
function at the point
( c, f (c ) ) .
(ii) In an interval, function is said to be continuous if there is no break in the

graph of the function in the entire interval.
5.1.4 Discontinuity
The function f will be discontinuous at x = a in any of the following cases :
f (x) and xlim
f (x) exist but are not equal.
(i) xlim
a
a+
f (x) and xlim
f (x) exist and are equal but not equal to f (a).
(ii) xlim
a
a+
(iii) f (a) is not defined.
5.1.5 Continuity of some of the common functions

Function f (x)
Interval in which
f is continuous
1. The constant function, i.e. f (x) = c

2. The identity function, i.e. f (x) = x
3. The polynomial function, i.e.

f (x)= a0 xn + a1 x
n1
+ ... + an1 x + an
4. | x a |
( , )
5. xn, n is a positive integer
( , ) {0}
6. p (x) / q (x), where p (x) and q (x) are
R { x : q (x) = 0}
polynomials in x
7. sin x, cos x
8. tan x, sec x
R { (2 n + 1)
9. cot x, cosec x
R { (n : n Z}
: n Z}
2
88
MATHEMATICS
10. e x
11. log x
(0, )
12. The inverse trigonometric functions,

i.e., sin1 x, cos1 x etc.
In their respective
domains
5.1.6 Continuity of composite functions

Let f and g be real valued functions such that (fog) is defined at a. If g is continuous
at a and f is continuous at g (a), then (fog) is continuous at a.
5.1.7 Differentiability
f ( x + h) f ( x )
, wherever the limit exists, is
h 0
h
defined to be the derivative of f at x. In other words, we say that a function f is
The function defined by f (x) = lim
differentiable at a point c in its domain if both lim

h 0
f (c + h ) f (c )
, called left hand
h
f (c + h ) f (c )
, called right hand derivative,
h0
h
denoted by R f (c), are finite and equal.
derivative, denoted by Lf (c), and lim+
(i) The function y = f (x) is said to be differentiable in an open interval (a, b) if

it is differentiable at every point of (a, b)
(ii) The function y = f (x) is said to be differentiable in the closed interval [a, b]
if R f (a) and L f (b) exist and f (x) exists for every point of (a, b).
(iii) Every differentiable function is continuous, but the converse is not true
5.1.8 Algebra of derivatives

If u, v are functions of x, then
(i)
d (u v)
du dv
=
dx
dx dx
du
dv
u
(iii) d u = dx 2 dx
dx v
v
v
(ii)
d
dv
du
(u v) = u + v
dx
dx
dx
89
5.1.9 Chain rule is a rule to differentiate composition of functions. Let f = vou. If

t = u (x) and both
df dv dt
dt
dv
= .
and
exist then
dx dt dx
dx
dt
5.1.10 Following are some of the standard derivatives (in appropriate domains)
d
1
1
2. dx (cos x) =
1 x2
d
1
1
1. dx (sin x) =
1 x2
3.
1
d
(tan 1 x) =
1 + x2
dx
d
1
5. dx (sec x) =
x
1
x2 1
4.
d
1
(cot 1 x) =
1 + x2
dx
, x >1
d
1
1
, x >1
6. dx (cosec x) =
x x2 1
5.1.11 Exponential and logarithmic functions

(i) The exponential function with positive base b > 1 is the function
y = f (x) = bx. Its domain is R, the set of all real numbers and range is the set
of all positive real numbers. Exponential function with base 10 is called the
common exponential function and with base e is called the natural exponential
function.
(ii) Let b > 1 be a real number. Then we say logarithm of a to base b is x if bx=a,
Logarithm of a to the base b is denoted by logb a. If the base b = 10, we say
it is common logarithm and if b = e, then we say it is natural logarithms. logx
denotes the logarithm function to base e. The domain of logarithm function
is R+, the set of all positive real numbers and the range is the set of all real
numbers.
(iii) The properties of logarithmic function to any base b > 1 are listed below:
1. logb (xy) = logb x + logb y
x
2. logb = logb x logb y
y
90
MATHEMATICS
3. logb xn = n logb x
log c x
4. logb x = log b , where c > 1
c
1
5. logb x = log b
x
6. logb b = 1 and logb 1 = 0
(iv) The derivative of ex w.r.t., x is ex , i.e.
w.r.t., x is
d x
(e ) e x . The derivative of logx
dx
1
d
1
(log x)
; i.e.
.
dx
x
x
5.1.12 Logarithmic differentiation is a powerful technique to differentiate functions

of the form f (x) = (u (x))v(x), where both f and u need to be positive functions
for this technique to make sense.
5.1.13 Differentiation of a function with respect to another function
Let u = f (x) and v = g (x) be two functions of x, then to find derivative of f (x) w.r.t.
to g (x), i.e., to find
du
, we use the formula
dv
du
du dx
=
dv dv .
dx
5.1.14 Second order derivative

d2y
is called the second order derivative of y w.r.t. x. It is denoted by y or
dx 2
y2 , if y = f (x).
d dy
dx dx
5.1.15 Rolles Theorem

Let f : [a, b]
R be continuous on [a, b] and differentiable on (a, b), such that f (a)
= f (b), where a and b are some real numbers. Then there exists at least one point c in
(a, b) such that f (c) = 0.
91
Geometrically Rolles theorem ensures that there is at least one point on the curve
y = f (x) at which tangent is parallel to x-axis (abscissa of the point lying in (a, b)).
5.1.16 Mean Value Theorem (Lagrange)
Let f : [a, b]
R be a continuous function on [a, b] and differentiable on (a, b). Then
there exists at least one point c in (a, b) such that f (c) =
f (b) f (a)
.
b a
Geometrically, Mean Value Theorem states that there exists at least one point c in
(a, b) such that the tangent at the point (c, f (c)) is parallel to the secant joining the
points (a, f (a) and (b, f (b)).
5.2 Solved Examples
Short Answer (S.A.)
Example 1 Find the value of the constant k so that the function f defined below is
1 cos 4 x
,x0 .
continuous at x = 0, where f ( x) =
2
8x
x=0
k ,
Solution It is given that the function f is continuous at x = 0. Therefore, lim

f (x) = f (0)
x0
1 cos 4 x
=k
8x2
lim
lim
sin 2 x
lim
=k
x 0
2x
k=1
x 0
2sin 2 2 x
=k
x 0
8x2
2
Thus, f is continuous at x = 0 if k = 1.
Example 2 Discuss the continuity of the function f(x) = sin x . cos x.
Solution Since sin x and cos x are continuous functions and product of two continuous
function is a continuous function, therefore f(x) = sin x . cos x is a continuous function.
92
MATHEMATICS
x 3 + x 2 16 x + 20
,x2
( x 2) 2
Example 3 If f ( x) =
is continuous at x = 2, find
k
,
x
=
2
the value of k.
Solution Given f (2) = k.
x 3 + x 2 16 x + 20
x 2
( x 2) 2
Now, lim f ( x) = lim+ f ( x) = lim

x 2
x2
( x 5)( x 2)2
( x 2)2
As f is continuous at x = 2, we have
= lim
x 2
lim( x 5)
x
lim f ( x) = f (2)
x2
k = 7.
Example 4 Show that the function f defined by
x sin , x 0
f ( x) =
x
0, x = 0
is continuous at x = 0.
Solution Left hand limit at x = 0 is given by
lim f ( x) = lim x sin
x 0
x 0
Similarly lim f ( x)
x
lim x sin
f ( x)
Thus xlim
0
lim f ( x)
x
1
= 0
x
Example 5 Given f(x) =
1
x
[since, 1 < sin
0 . Moreover f (0) = 0.
f (0) . Hence f is continuous at x = 0
1
. Find the points of discontinuity of the composite
x 1
function y = f [f(x)].
Solution We know that f (x) =
Now, for x 1 ,
1
< 1]
x
1
is discontinuous at x = 1
x 1
93
1
x 1
1
1
f (f (x))
= f
=
1 2 x ,
x 1
x 1
which is discontinuous at x = 2.
Hence, the points of discontinuity are x = 1 and x = 2.
Example 6 Let f(x) = x x , for all x R. Discuss the derivability of f(x) at x = 0
x 2 , if x 0
=
f
(
x
)
2
Solution We may rewrite f as
x ,if x < 0
Now Lf (0) = lim
h 0
f (0 + h) f (0)
h2 0
= lim
= lim h = 0
h 0
h0
h
h
f (0 + h) f (0)
h2 0
= lim+
= lim h = 0
h 0
h0
h0
h
h
Since the left hand derivative and right hand derivative both are equal, hence f is
differentiable at x = 0.
Now Rf (0) = lim+
Example 7 Differentiate
Solution Let y =
tan x . Using chain rule, we have
dy
dx
tan x w.r.t. x
d
(tan x )
2 tan x dx
1
2 tan x
1
2 tan x
.sec 2 x
d
( x)
dx
(sec2 x )
(sec 2 x )
4 x tan x
1
2 x
dy
.
dx
Solution Given y = tan (x + y). differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we have
Example 8 If y = tan(x + y), find
94
MATHEMATICS
dy
dx
sec2 ( x
d
(x
dx
y)
y)
= sec2 (x + y) 1
or
dy
= sec2 (x + y)
dx
[1 sec2 (x + y]
Therefore,
dy
dx
dy
sec 2 ( x y )
= cosec2 (x + y).
dx 1 sec 2 ( x y )
Example 9 If ex + ey = ex+y, prove that
dy
= e yx .
dx
Solution Given that ex + ey = ex+y. Differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we have
ex + ey
or
(ey ex+y)
dy
= ex+y ex,
dx
ex y ex
e y ex y
dy
which implies that
dx
dy
Example 10 Find
, if y = tan1
dx
Solution Put x = tan , where
Therefore,
y = tan
dy
dy
= ex+y 1
dx
dx
ex e y ex
e y ex e y
ey
= 3tan1x
3x x3
1
1
<x <
,
.
2
3
3
1 3x
<< .
6
6
3tan tan 3
2
1 3tan
= tan1 (tan3 )
=3
(because
3
dy
=
2 .
dx 1 x
Hence,
x 1 x 2 and 0 < x < 1, then find
Example 11 If y = sin1 x 1 x
x 1 x 2 , where 0 < x < 1.
Solution We have y = sin1 x 1 x

Put
x = sinA and
x = sinB
2
2
Therefore, y = sin1 sin A 1 sin B sin B 1 sin A
= sin1 sin A cos B sin Bcos A

= sin1 sin(A B) = A B
Thus
y = sin1 x sin1
Differentiating w.r.t. x, we get
dy
dx
1
1 x
x
1
1
=
Example 12 If x = a sec3
1 x
d
dx
1
2
2 x 1 x.
and y = a tan3 , find
Solution We have x = a sec3 and y = a tan3 .

Differentiating w.r.t. , we get
dx
d
3a sec 2
(sec ) 3a sec3 tan
d
d
and
dy
d
= 3a tan 2 (tan ) = 3a tan 2 sec2 .
d
d
Thus
dy
dx
dy
d
dx
d
3a tan 2 sec2
3a sec3 tan
tan
sec
sin
dy
at
dx
dy
.
dx
95
96
MATHEMATICS
dy
dx
Hence,
sin
at
3
2 .
log x
dy
=
.
(1 log x)2
dx
Solution We have xy = exy . Taking logarithm on both sides, we get
y log x = x y
y (1 + log x) = x
Example 13 If xy = exy, prove that
x
y = 1 log x
i.e.
Differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we get

dy
dx
(1 log x).1 x
(1 log x)
1
x
log x .
(1 log x) 2
cos x
d2y
=
.
(1 sin x) 2
dx 2
Solution We have y = tanx + secx. Differentiating w.r.t. x, we get
Example 14 If y = tanx + secx, prove that
dy
= sec2x + secx tanx
dx
=
1+ sin x
1
sin x
1 sin x
=
= (1 + sin x)(1 sin x) .
2
2
2
cos x cos x
cos x
1
dy
= 1 sin x .
dx
Now, differentiating again w.r.t. x, we get
thus
d 2 y cos x
=
2
dx 2 (1 sin x)
cos x
(1 sin x) 2
Example 15 If f (x) = |cos x|, find f
3
4
Solution When
2
f (x) = sin x.
Hence, f
3
4
97
< x < , cosx < 0 so that |cos x| = cos x, i.e., f (x) = cos x
3
4
= sin
1
2
Example 16 If f (x) = |cos x sinx|, find f

Solution When 0 < x <
, cos x > sin x, so that cos x sin x > 0, i.e.,

4
f (x) = cos x sin x

f (x) = sin x cos x
Hence f
= sin
cos
1
= (1+ 3) .
6
2
Example 17 Verify Rolles theorem for the function, f (x) = sin 2x in 0,

Solution Consider f (x) = sin 2x in 0,
(i)
The function f is continuous in
. Note that:
0,
, as f is a sine function, which is
always continuous.
(ii)
f (x) = 2cos 2x, exists in 0,
(iii)
f (0) = sin0 = 0 and f

, hence f is derivable in 0, .
2
2
= sin = 0 f (0) = f
Conditions of Rolles theorem are satisfied. Hence there exists at least one c 0,
such that f (c) = 0. Thus
2 cos 2c = 0
2c =
c=
98
MATHEMATICS
Example 18 Verify mean value theorem for the function f (x) = (x 3) (x 6) (x 9)

in [3, 5].
Solution (i) Function f is continuous in [3, 5] as product of polynomial functions is a
polynomial, which is continuous.
(ii) f (x) = 3x2 36x + 99 exists in (3, 5) and hence derivable in (3, 5).
Thus conditions of mean value theorem are satisfied. Hence, there exists at least one
c (3, 5) such that
f (c )
f (5) f (3)
5 3
3c2 36c + 99 =
13
.
3
c= 6
Hence c 6
8 0
=4
2
13
(since other value is not permissible).
3
Long Answer (L.A.)

Example 19 If f (x) =
find the value of f
Solution Given, f (x) =
Therefore,
2 cos x 1
,x
cot x 1
4
so that f (x) becomes continuous at x =
2 cos x 1
,x
cot x 1
4
2 cos x 1
cot x 1
lim f ( x) lim
x
= lim
x
= lim
x
2 cos x 1 sin x
cos x sin x
2 cos x 1
2 cos x 1
2 cos x 1
cos x sin x
cos x sin x
.sin x
cos x sin x
lim
x
lim
x
4
lim
x
Thus,
2cos 2 x 1 cos x + sin x

.
.( sin x )
cos 2 x sin 2 x 2 cos x + 1
cos 2 x cos x + sin x
.
.( sin x )
cos 2 x 2 cos x + 1
cos x sin x
2 cos x 1
1
2
lim f ( x)
99
1
1
2
2
1
2.
1
2
sin x
1
2
1
2
If we define f = , then f (x) will become continuous at x = . Hence for f to be

4
2
4

continuous at x
, f
1
.
2
Example 20 Show that the function f given by
f ( x)
ex
1
ex
0,
, if x 0
if x 0
is discontinuous at x = 0.
Solution The left hand limit of f at x = 0 is given by
lim f ( x) lim
x
1
ex
1
ex
1 0 1
0 1
1
100
MATHEMATICS
lim f ( x) lim
Similarly,
lim
x
1
ex
1
ex
1
1
ex
= xlim0
ex
1 ex
1 e
1 0
1
1 0
1
x
lim f ( x) does not exist. Hence f is discontinuous

Thus lim f ( x) lim f ( x), therefore,
+
x 0
x 0
x 0
at x = 0.
Example 21 Let f ( x)
1 cos 4 x
, if x 0
x2
a
, if x 0
x
16
x 4
, if x 0
For what value of a, f is continuous at x = 0?

Solution Here f (0) = a Left hand limit of f at 0 is
lim f ( x) lim
x
lim 8
2x
1 cos 4 x
x2
sin 2 x
2x
lim
x
2sin 2 2 x
x2
= 8 (1)2 = 8.
and right hand limit of f at 0 is
lim f ( x) lim
x
= xlim0
x
16
x ( 16
( 16
x 4
x 4)
x 4)( 16
x 4)
lim
x ( 16
16
4)
x
x 16
lim
x
16
101
Thus, lim f ( x) lim f ( x) 8 . Hence f is continuous at x = 0 only if a = 8.

x
Example 22 Examine the differentiability of the function f defined by
f ( x)
2 x 3, if 3 x
2
x 1 , if 2 x 0
x 2 , if 0 x 1
Solution The only doubtful points for differentiability of f (x) are x = 2 and x = 0.
Differentiability at x = 2.
Now L f (2) = lim
0
= lim
0
= lim
h
2(2 h) 3 (2 1)
h
lim
h
2h
h
lim 2 2 .
f (2 h) f (2)
h
and R f (2) = lim

h
f (2 h) f (2)
h
2 h 1 ( 2 1)
h
h 1 (1)
h
lim
1
h 0
h 0 h
h
Thus R f (2) L f (2). Therefore f is not differentiable at x = 2.
Similarly, for differentiability at x = 0, we have
= lim
L (f (0)= lim
f (0 h) f (0)
h
= lim
0 h 1 (0 2)
h
= hlim0
h 1
1
lim 1
h
0
h
h
which does not exist. Hence f is not differentiable at x = 0.
102
MATHEMATICS
Example 23 Differentiate tan
1 x2
x
-1
1
,1 .
2
1 x2
x
Solution Let u = tan-1
1 x2
x
Now u = tan
-1
Then u = tan
. Put x = sin. << .

2
4
1 sin 2
sin
-1
2
and v = cos-1 2 x 1 x .
du
dx
dv
dx
du
We want to find dv
= tan-1 (cot )

= tan-1 tan =
2
2
du
Hence dx
Now
2
with respect to cos-1 2 x 1 x , where
sin 1 x
1
.
1 x2
v = cos1 (2x
=
=
=
2
2
1 x2 )
sin1 (2x
sin1 (2sin
1 x2 )
1 sin 2 ) =
sin 1 (sin 2)
2
sin1 {sin ( 2)} [since
< 2 < ]
2
v=
dv
dx
2 )
103
+ 2sin1x
2
1 x2
du
du dx
=
=
dv dv
dx
Hence
1
1 x 2 = 1 .
2
2
1 x2

Example 24 The function f (x) =
sin x
cos x,if x 0
x
k
, if x 0
is continuous at x = 0, then the value of k is

(A)
3
(B)
2
(C)
1
(D)
1.5
Solution (B) is the Correct answer.
Example 25 The function f (x) = [x], where [x] denotes the greatest integer function,
is continuous at
(A)
4
(B)
2
(C)
1
(D)
1.5
Solution (D) is the correct answer. The greatest integer function[x] is discontinuous
at all integral values of x. Thus D is the correct answer.
1
Example 26 The number of points at which the function f (x) = x [ x] is not
continuous is
(A)
(C)
1
3
(B)
(D)
2
none of these
104
MATHEMATICS
Solution (D) is the correct answer. As x [x] = 0, when x is an integer so f (x) is

discontinuous for all x Z.
Example 27 The function given by f (x) = tanx is discontinuous on the set
(A)
n :n Z
(C)
(2n 1)
(B)
:n Z
2
Solution C is the correct answer.
Example 28 Let f (x)= |cosx|. Then,
(A)
f is everywhere differentiable.
(D)
2n : n Z
n
:n Z
2
(B)
f is everywhere continuous but not differentiable at n = n, n Z .
(C)
f is everywhere continuous but not differentiable at x = (2n + 1)
,
2
n Z .
(D)
none of these.
Solution C is the correct answer.
Example 29 The function f (x) = |x| + |x 1| is
(A)
continuous at x = 0 as well as at x = 1.
(B)
continuous at x = 1 but not at x = 0.
(C)
discontinuous at x = 0 as well as at x = 1.
(D)
continuous at x = 0 but not at x = 1.
Solution Correct answer is A.
Example 30 The value of k which makes the function defined by
f ( x)
1
,
x
k
,
sin
(A)
(C)
if x 0
if x 0
8
1
, continuous at x = 0 is
(B)
(D)
1
none of these
1
does not exist.
x 0
x
Example 31 The set of points where the functions f given by f (x) = |x 3| cosx is
differentiable is
Solution (D) is the correct answer. Indeed lim sin
105
(A)
R
(B)
R {3}
(C)
(0, )
(D)
none of these
Solution B is the correct answer.
Example 32 Differential coefficient of sec (tan1x) w.r.t. x is
x
(A)
(C)
1+ x
(B)
x 1+ x
x
1+ x 2
1
(D)
1+ x 2

Example 33
2x
du
1 2 x
tan 1
If u = sin
is
2 and v =
2 , then
1
1
+
x
x
dv
1 x 2
1
(A)
(B)
x
(C)
(D)
1
1+ x 2
2
Example 34 The value of c in Rolles Theorem for the function f (x) = ex sinx,
x [0, ] is
(B)
(C)
(D)
4
6
4
2
Example 35 The value of c in Mean value theorem for the function f (x) = x (x 2),
x [1, 2] is
(A)
3
2
(B)
2
3
Example 36 Match the following
COLUMN-I
(A)
(A) If a function f ( x)
(C)
sin 3x
, if x 0
x
k
, if x 0
2
is continuous at x = 0, then k is equal to
1
2
(D)
3
2
COLUMN-II
(a) |x|
106
MATHEMATICS
(B) Every continuous function is differentiable

(C) An example of a function which is continuous
everywhere but not differentiable at exactly one point
(D) The identity function i.e. f (x) = x xR is a
continuous function
Solution A c, B d,
C a, D b
(b) True
(c) 6
(d) False
1
Example 37 The number of points at which the function f (x) = log | x | is
discontinuous is ________.
Solution The given function is discontinuous at x = 0, 1 and hence the number of
points of discontinuity is 3.
ax +1if x 1
Example 38 If f ( x) =
is continuous, then a should be equal to _______.
x + 2if x <1
Solution a = 2
Example 39 The derivative of log10x w.r.t. x is ________.

Solution
( log10 e )
1
.
x
1 x 1
dy
1 x + 1
, then
+ sin
Example 40 If y = sec
is equal to ______.
dx
x +1
x 1
Solution 0.
Example 41 The deriative of sin x w.r.t. cos x is ________.
Solution cot x
State whether the statements are True or False in each of the Exercises 42 to 46.
f ( x ) and lim f ( x) is equal to f (a).

Example 42 For continuity, at x = a, each of xlim
x a
a+
Solution True.
Example 43 y = |x 1| is a continuous function.
Solution True.
Example 44 A continuous function can have some points where limit does not exist.
Solution False.
Example 45 |sinx| is a differentiable function for every value of x.
107
Solution False.
Example 46 cos |x| is differentiable everywhere.
Solution True.
5.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)

1. Examine the continuity of the function
f (x) = x3 + 2x2 1 at x = 1
Find which of the functions in Exercises 2 to 10 is continuous or discontinuous
at the indicated points:
2.
4.
3x + 5, if x 2
f ( x) = 2
x , if x < 2
at x = 2
at x = 0
2 x 2 3x 2
, if x 2
f ( x) =
x2
5,
if x = 2
x4
, if x 4
f ( x) = 2( x 4)
0,
if x = 4
at x = 2
6.
x cos , if x 0
f ( x) =
x
0,
if x = 0
at x = 0
8.
1
ex
, if x 0
1
f ( x) =
x
1+ e
0,
if x = 0
at x = 0
10.
3.
1 cos 2 x
, if x 0
x2
f (x) =
5,
if x = 0
f ( x) = x + x 1 at x = 1
5.
at x = 4
, if x 0
x a sin
xa
7. f ( x) =
0,
if x = a
at x = a
x2
, if 0 x 1
2
f
(
x
)
=
9.
2 x 2 3x + 3 , if 1< x 2
2
at x = 1
108
MATHEMATICS
Find the value of k in each of the Exercises 11 to 14 so that the function f is continuous
at the indicated point:
11. f ( x)
3 x 8, if x 5
2k
, if x 5
at x 5
12. f ( x)
2 x 2 16
, if x 2
at x 2
4 x 16
k
1 kx
13.
f ( x)
1 kx
x
2x 1
x 1
, if
, if x 2
1 x 0
, if 0 x 1
at x = 0
1 cos kx
x sin x , if x 0
(
)
f
x
=
14.
at x = 0
1
, if x = 0
2
15. Prove that the function f defined by

x
, x0
2
f ( x) = x + 2 x
k
,
x=0
16.
remains discontinuous at x = 0, regardless the choice of k.

Find the values of a and b such that the function f defined by
x4
x 4 + a , if x < 4
f ( x) = a + b
, if x = 4
x4
+ b , if x > 4
x 4
is a continuous function at x = 4.
17.
1
Given the function f (x) = x + 2 . Find the points of discontinuity of the composite
function y = f (f (x)).
109
1
1
, where t =
.
x 1
t +t 2
18.
Find all points of discontinuity of the function f (t ) =
19.
Show that the function f (x) = sin x + cos x is continuous at x = .
Examine the differentiability of f, where f is defined by

20.
x[ x], , if 0 x < 2
f (x) =
( x 1) x, if 2 x < 3
at x = 2.
21.
1
2
x sin
x
f (x) =
0
, if x 0
, if
x=0
at x = 0.
22.
1 + x
f (x) =
5 x
, if x 2
, if
x>2
at x = 2.
23.
Show that f (x) = x 5 is continuous but not differentiable at x = 5.
24.
A function f : R R satisfies the equation f ( x + y) = f (x) f (y) for all x, y R,

f (x) 0. Suppose that the function is differentiable at x = 0 and f (0) = 2.
Prove that f (x) = 2 f (x).
Differentiate each of the following w.r.t. x (Exercises 25 to 43) :

cos 2 x
25.
28.
log log log x5
31.
cos tan x +1
34.
( sin x )cos x
26.
8x
x8
27.
log x + x 2 + a
29.
sin x + cos 2 x
30.
sin n (ax 2 + bx + c )
32.
sinx2 + sin2x + sin2(x2) 33.
35.
sinmx . cosnx
36.
1
sin 1
x +1
(x + 1)2 (x + 2)3 (x + 3)4
110
MATHEMATICS
1 cos x
1
38. tan 1 + cos x , 4 < x < 4
37.
sin x + cos x
cos 1
, 4 < x < 4
2
39.
tan 1 (sec x + tan x), < x <

2
2
40.
a cos x b sin x
a
tan 1
, < x < and tan x > 1
b
x
+
a
x
b
cos
sin
2
2
41.
1
1
sec 1 3
, 0< x<
2
4 x 3x
43.
1+ x2 + 1 x2
tan 1
1+ x2 1 x2
1
42. tan
3a 2 x x3
,
a 3 3ax 2
1 x
3 a
1
3
, 1< x <1, x 0
Find
dy
of each of the functions expressed in parametric form in Exercises from 44 to 48.
dx
44.
x=t+
46.
x = 3cos 2cos3, y = 3sin 2sin3.
47.
sin x =
48.
x=
49.
dy y log x
If x = ecos2t and y = esin2t, prove that dx = x log y .
50.
b
dy
=
If x = asin2t (1 + cos2t) and y = b cos2t (1cos2t), show that dx at t = a .
1
1
, y=t
t
t
45.
1
1

x = e + , y = e

2t
2t
, tan y =
.
2
1+ t
1 t 2
1+ log t
,
t2
y=
3 + 2log t
.
t
51.
If x = 3sint sin 3t, y = 3cost cos 3t, find
dy
at t = .
dx
3
52.
Differentiate
111
x
w.r.t. sinx.
sin x
1 + x 2 1
w.r.t. tan1 x when x 0.
53.
Differentiate tan1
Find
dy
when x and y are connected by the relation given in each of the Exercises 54 to 57.
dx
54.
x
sin (xy) + y = x2 y
55.
56.
sec (x + y) = xy
tan1 (x2 + y2) = a
57.
(x2 + y2)2 = xy
58.
dy dx
If ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, then show that dx . dy =1 .
59.
dy x y
If x = e , prove that dx = x log x .
x
y
dy (1 + log y )
=
.
dx
log y
2
60.
x
y x
If y = e , prove that
61.
(cos x )
If y = (cos x)
62.
If x sin (a + y) + sin a cos (a + y) = 0, prove that
63.
If
64.
d2y
If y = tan x, find
in terms of y alone.
dx 2
1 x 2 +
(cos x ).....
dy
y 2 tan x
=
, show that
.
dx y log cos x 1
1 y 2 = a (x y), prove that
dy sin 2 (a + y )
=
.
dx
sin a
dy
1 y2
=
.
dx
1 x2
112
MATHEMATICS
Verify the Rolles theorem for each of the functions in Exercises 65 to 69.
65. f (x) = x (x 1)2 in [0, 1].
66.

f (x) = sin4x + cos4x in 0, .
2
67.
68.
f (x) = log (x2 + 2) log3 in [1, 1].

f (x) = x (x + 3)ex/2 in [3, 0].
69.
f (x) =
70.
Discuss the applicability of Rolles theorem on the function given by
4 x 2 in [ 2, 2].
f ( x)
71.
x 2 1, if 0 x 1
.
3 x, if 1 x 2
Find the points on the curve y = (cosx 1) in [0, 2], where the tangent is
parallel to x-axis.
72.
Using Rolles theorem, find the point on the curve y = x (x 4), x [0, 4], where
the tangent is parallel to x-axis.
Verify mean value theorem for each of the functions given Exercises 73 to 76.
1
73. f (x) = 4 x 1 in [1, 4].
74. f (x) = x3 2x2 x + 3 in [0, 1].
75.
f (x) = sinx sin2x in [0, ].
76.
f (x) =
77.
Find a point on the curve y = (x 3)2, where the tangent is parallel to the chord
25 x 2 in [1, 5].
joining the points (3, 0) and (4, 1).

78.
Using mean value theorem, prove that there is a point on the curve y = 2x2 5x + 3
between the points A(1, 0) and B (2, 1), where tangent is parallel to the chord AB.
Also, find that point.
Long Answer (L.A.)

79.
Find the values of p and q so that
113
x 2 + 3 x + p, if x 1
f ( x) =
, if x > 1
qx + 2
80.
is differentiable at x = 1.
If xm.yn = (x + y)m+n, prove that
(i)
dy y
= and (ii)
dx x
d2y
=0 .
dx 2
81.
If x = sint and y = sin pt, prove that (1x2)
82.
Find
dy
, if y = xtanx +
dx
dy
d2y
+ p2 y = 0 .
2 x
dx
dx
x 2 +1
.
2

Choose the correct answers from the given four options in each of the Exercises 83 to 96.
83.
84.
If f (x) = 2x and g (x) =
x2
+ 1 , then which of the following can be a discontinuous
2
function
(A) f (x) + g (x)
(B) f (x) g (x)
(C) f (x) . g (x)
(D)
g ( x)
f ( x)
4 x2
The function f (x) =
is
4 x x3
(A) discontinuous at only one point

(B) discontinuous at exactly two points
(C) discontinuous at exactly three points
(D) none of these
85.
The set of points where the function f given by f (x) = 2 x 1 sinx is differentiable is
(A) R
1
(B) R
2
114
86.
MATHEMATICS
(C) (0, )
(D) none of these
The function f (x) = cot x is discontinuous on the set
(A)
{ x = n : n Z}
(B)
(C) x = ( 2n +1) ; n Z
2
87.
88.
89.
; n Z
(iv) x =
2
The function f (x) = e is

(A) continuous everywhere but not differentiable at x = 0
(B) continuous and differentiable everywhere
(C) not continuous at x = 0
(D) none of these.
1
, where x 0, then the value of the function f at x = 0, so that
x
the function is continuous at x = 0, is
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 1
(D) none of these
2
If f (x) = x sin
mx+ 1 , if x 2
If f (x) =
, is continuous at x = , then
2
sin x + n, if x >
2
(A) m = 1, n = 0
(C) n =
90.
{ x = 2n : n Z}
m
2
(B) m =
n
+1
2
(D) m = n =
Let f (x) = |sin x|. Then

(A) f is everywhere differentiable
(B) f is everywhere continuous but not differentiable at x = n, n Z.
(C) f is everywhere continuous but not differentiable at x = (2n + 1)
n Z.
(D) none of these
1 x 2
dy
91. If y = log
is equal to
2 , then
+
1
x
dx
,
2
4 x3
(A)
1 x 4
93.
sin x + y , then
If y =
4x
1 x 4
4 x3
(D)
1 x4
1
4 x4
(C)
92.
(B)
115
dy
is equal to
dx
(A)
cos x
2 y 1
(B)
cos x
1 2y
(C)
sin x
1 2y
(D)
sin x
2 y 1
The derivative of cos1 (2x2 1) w.r.t. cos1x is
1
(A) 2
2
x
(C)
94.
95.
(B)
If x = t2, y = t3, then
2 1 x 2
(D) 1 x2
d2y
is
dx 2
(A)
3
2
(B)
3
4t
(C)
3
2t
(D)
3
2t
The value of c in Rolles theorem for the function f (x) = x3 3x in the interval
[0,
3 ] is
(A) 1
(B) 1
116
MATHEMATICS
(C)
96.
3
2
(D)
For the function f (x) = x +
1
3
1
, x [1, 3], the value of c for mean value theorem is
x
(A) 1
(B)
(C) 2
(D) none of these
Fill in the blanks in each of the Exercises 97 to 101:

97.
An example of a function which is continuous everywhere but fails to be

differentiable exactly at two points is __________ .
98.
Derivative of x2 w.r.t. x3 is _________.
99.
If f (x) = |cosx|, then f
= _______ .
100. If f (x) = |cosx sinx | , then f
101. For the curve
y 1,
= _______.
dy 1 1
at , is __________.
dx 4 4
102. Rolles theorem is applicable for the function f (x) = |x 1| in [0, 2].
103. If f is continuous on its domain D, then | f | is also continuous on D.
104. The composition of two continuous function is a continuous function.
105. Trigonometric and inverse - trigonometric functions are differentiable in their
respective domain.
106. If f . g is continuous at x = a, then f and g are separately continuous at x = a.
Chapter
APPLICATION OF DERIVATIVES
6.1 Overview
6.1.1 Rate of change of quantities
For the function y = f (x),
d
(f (x)) represents the rate of change of y with respect to x.
dx
Thus if s represents the distance and t the time, then
ds
represents the rate of
dt
change of distance with respect to time.

6.1.2 Tangents and normals
A line touching a curve y = f (x) at a point (x1, y1) is called the tangent to the curve at
dy
that point and its equation is given y y1 =
( x , y ) ( x x1 ) .
dx 1 1
The normal to the curve is the line perpendicular to the tangent at the point of contact,
and its equation is given as:
y y1 =
1
( x x1 )
dy
(x , y )
dx 1 1
The angle of intersection between two curves is the angle between the tangents to the
curves at the point of intersection.
6.1.3 Approximation
Since f (x) = lim
x 0
f ( x + x) f ( x)
, we can say that f (x) is approximately equal
x
f ( x + x) f ( x)
x
approximate value of f (x + x) = f (x) + x .f (x).
to
118
MATHEMATICS
6.1.4 Increasing/decreasing functions

A continuous function in an interval (a, b) is :
(i)
strictly increasing if for all x1, x2 (a, b), x1< x2 f (x1) < f (x2) or for all
x (a, b), f (x) > 0
(ii)
strictly decreasing if for all x1, x2 (a, b), x1 < x2 f (x1) > f (x2) or for all
x (a, b), f (x) < 0
6.1.5 Theorem : Let f be a continuous function on [a, b] and differentiable in (a, b) then
(i) f is increasing in [a, b] if f (x) > 0 for each x (a, b)
(ii) f is decreasing in [a, b] if f (x) < 0 for each x (a, b)
(iii) f is a constant function in [a, b] if f (x) = 0 for each x (a, b).
6.1.6 Maxima and minima
Local Maximum/Local Minimum for a real valued function f
A point c in the interior of the domain of f, is called
(i)
local maxima, if there exists an h > 0 , such that f (c) > f (x), for all x in
(c h, c + h).
The value f (c) is called the local maximum value of f .

(ii)
local minima if there exists an h > 0 such that f (c) < f (x), for all x in
(c h, c + h).
The value f (c) is called the local minimum value of f.

A function f defined over [a, b] is said to have maximum (or absolute maximum) at
x = c, c [a, b], if f (x) f (c) for all x [a, b].
Similarly, a function f (x) defined over [a, b] is said to have a minimum [or absolute
minimum] at x = d, if f (x) f (d) for all x [a, b].
6.1.7 Critical point of f : A point c in the domain of a function f at which either
f (c) = 0 or f is not differentiable is called a critical point of f.
Working rule for finding points of local maxima or local minima:
(a)
First derivative test:

(i)
If f (x) changes sign from positive to negative as x increases through

c, then c is a point of local maxima, and f (c) is local maximum value.
(b)
6.1.8
119
(ii)
If f (x) changes sign from negative to positive as x increases through

c, then c is a point of local minima, and f (c) is local minimum value.
(iii)
If f (x) does not change sign as x increases through c, then c is

neither a point of local minima nor a point of local maxima. Such a
point is called a point of inflection.
Second Derivative test: Let f be a function defined on an interval I and

c I. Let f be twice differentiable at c. Then
(i)
x = c is a point of local maxima if f (c) = 0 and f (c) < 0. In this case

f (c) is then the local maximum value.
(ii)
x = c is a point of local minima if f (c) = 0 and f (c) > 0. In this case

f (c) is the local minimum value.
(iii)
The test fails if f (c) = 0 and f (c) = 0. In this case, we go back to

first derivative test.
Working rule for finding absolute maxima and or absolute minima :

Step 1 : Find all the critical points of f in the given interval.
Step 2 : At all these points and at the end points of the interval, calculate the
values of f.
Step 3 : Identify the maximum and minimum values of f out of the values
calculated in step 2. The maximum value will be the absolute maximum
value of f and the minimum value will be the absolute minimum
value of f.
6.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer Type (S.A.)
Example 1 For the curve y = 5x 2x3, if x increases at the rate of 2 units/sec, then
how fast is the slope of curve changing when x = 3?
Solution Slope of curve =
dy
= 5 6x2
dx
d dy
dx
= 12x.
dt dx
dt
120
MATHEMATICS
= 12 . (3) . (2)
= 72 units/sec.
Thus, slope of curve is decreasing at the rate of 72 units/sec when x is increasing at the
rate of 2 units/sec.
at the
4
uniform rate of 2 cm2 /sec in the surface area, through a tiny hole at the vertex of the
bottom. When the slant height of cone is 4 cm, find the rate of decrease of the slant
height of water.
Solution If s represents the surface area, then
r
ds
2
d t = 2cm /sec
Example 2 Water is dripping out from a conical funnel of semi-vertical angle
2
.
l
l=
4
2
s = r.l = l . sin
Therefore,
ds 2 dl
l. =
=
2 dt
dt
2l .
l
p/4
dl
dt
dl
1
1
2
when l = 4 cm, dt = 2.4 .2 = 2 2 = 4 cm/s .
Fig. 6.1
Example 3 Find the angle of intersection of the curves y2 = x and x2 = y.

Solution Solving the given equations, we have y2 = x and x2 = y x4 = x or x4 x = 0
x (x3 1) = 0 x = 0, x = 1
Therefore,
y = 0, y = 1
i.e. points of intersection are (0, 0) and (1, 1)

Further y2 = x
and
x2 = y
2y
dy
= 2x.
dx
dy
=1
dx
1
dy
=
2y
dx
121
At (0, 0), the slope of the tangent to the curve y2 = x is parallel to y-axis and the
tangent to the curve x2 = y is parallel to x-axis.
angle of intersection =
At (1, 1), slope of the tangent to the curve y2 = x is equal to

1
2
3
1+1 = 4 .
2
tan =
1
and that of x2 = y is 2.
2
3
= tan1 4

, .
Example 4 Prove that the function f (x) = tanx 4x is strictly decreasing on
3 3
Solution f (x) = tan x 4x f (x) = sec2x 4
When
< x < , 1 < secx < 2

3
3
Therefore, 1 < sec2x < 4 3 < (sec2x 4) < 0

Thus for
< x < , f (x) < 0

3
3

, .
Hence f is strictly decreasing on
3 3
Example 5 Determine for which values of x, the function y = x4
and for which values, it is decreasing.
Solution y = x4
4 x3
3
dy
= 4x3 4x2 = 4x2 (x 1)
dx
4 x3
is increasing
3
122
MATHEMATICS
Now,
dy
= 0 x = 0, x = 1.
dx
Since f (x) < 0 x ( , 0) (0, 1) and f is continuous in ( , 0] and [0, 1].

Therefore f is decreasing in ( , 1] and f is increasing in [1, ).
Note: Here f is strictly decreasing in ( , 0) (0, 1) and is strictly increasing in
(1, ).
Example 6 Show that the function f (x) = 4x3 18x2 + 27x 7 has neither maxima
nor minima.
Solution f (x) = 4x3 18x2 + 27x 7
f (x) = 12x2 36x + 27 = 3 (4x2 12x + 9) = 3 (2x 3)2
3
f (x) = 0 x = 2 (critical point)
Since f (x) > 0 for all x <
Hence x =
x=
3
3
and for all x >
2
2
3
is a point of inflexion i.e., neither a point of maxima nor a point of minima.
2
3
is the only critical point, and f has neither maxima nor minima.
2
Example 7 Using differentials, find the approximate value of

Solution Let f (x) =
0.082
Using f (x + x) f (x) + x . f (x), taking x = .09 and x = 0.008,

we get f (0.09 0.008) = f (0.09) + ( 0.008) f (0.09)
0.082 =
1
0.008
0.09 0.008 . 2 0.09 = 0.3
0.6
= 0.3 0.0133 = 0.2867.
Example 8 Find the condition for the curves
123
x2 y 2
= 1; xy = c2 to intersect
a 2 b2
orthogonally.
Solution Let the curves intersect at (x1, y1). Therefore,
2 x 2 y dy
x2 y 2
dy b 2 x
=
=
1
=
0
a 2 b 2 dx
dx a 2 y
a 2 b2
b 2 x1
slope of tangent at the point of intersection (m1) = 2
a y1
Again xy = c2 x
y1
dy
dy y
+ y= 0
=
m2 = x .
dx
dx
x
1
b2
For orthoganality, m1 m2 = 1 2 = 1 or a2 b2 = 0.
a
Example 9 Find all the points of local maxima and local minima of the function
3 4
3 45 2
f (x) = x 8 x x +105 .
4
2
Solution f (x) = 3x3 24x2 45x
= 3x (x2 + 8x + 15) = 3x (x + 5) (x + 3)
f (x) = 0 x = 5, x = 3, x = 0
f (x) = 9x2 48x 45
= 3 (3x2 + 16x + 15)
f (0) = 45 < 0. Therefore, x = 0 is point of local maxima
f (3) = 18 > 0. Therefore, x = 3 is point of local minima
f (5) = 30 < 0. Therefore x = 5 is point of local maxima.
124
MATHEMATICS
Example 10 Show that the local maximum value of x +
1
is less than local minimum
x
value.
Solution Let y = x +
1
dy
1
=1 2,
dx
x
x
dy
2
dx = 0 x = 1 x = 1.
d2y
d2y
2
d2y
= + 3 , therefore
(at x = 1) > 0 and
(at x = 1) < 0.
dx 2
dx 2
x
dx 2
Hence local maximum value of y is at x = 1 and the local maximum value = 2.
Local minimum value of y is at x = 1 and local minimum value = 2.
Therefore, local maximum value (2) is less than local minimum value 2.
Long Answer Type (L.A.)
Example 11 Water is dripping out at a steady rate of 1 cu cm/sec through a tiny hole
at the vertex of the conical vessel, whose axis is vertical. When the slant height of
water in the vessel is 4 cm, find the rate of decrease of slant height, where the vertical
angle of the conical vessel is
Solution Given that
.
6
dv
= 1 cm 3/s, where v is the volume of water in the
dt
conical vessel.
From the Fig.6.2, l = 4cm, h = l cos
Therefore, v =
1 2
l2 3
l
r h =
3
3 4 2
l
3
l and r = l sin = .
=
6
6 2
2
3 3
l .
24
dv
3 2 dl
=
l
dt
8
dt
Therefore, 1 =
125
3
dl
16.
8
dt
l
p/6
dl
1
=
cm/s.
dt 2 3
Therefore, the rate of decrease of slant height =
1
2 3
cm/s.
Fig. 6.2
Example 12 Find the equation of all the tangents to the curve y = cos (x + y),
2 x 2, that are parallel to the line x + 2y = 0.
Solution Given that y = cos (x + y)
dy
= sin (x + y)
dx
dy
1+ dx
sin ( x + y )
dy
=
dx
1+ sin ( x + y )
or
Since tangent is parallel to x + 2y = 0, therefore slope of tangent =
sin ( x + y )
1
Therefore, 1+ sin x + y = sin (x + y) = 1
(
)
2
Since
...(i)
1
2
.... (ii)
cos (x + y) = y and sin (x + y) = 1 cos2 (x + y) + sin2 (x + y) = y2 + 1
1 = y2 + 1 or y = 0.
Therefore, cosx = 0.
Therefore, x = (2n + 1)
, n = 0, 1, 2...
2
126
MATHEMATICS
Thus, x =
3
, , but x = , x =
satisfy equation (ii)
2
2
2
2
3
,0 .
Hence, the points are , 0 ,
2 2

1
Therefore, equation of tangent at , 0 is y = x or 2x + 4y = 0, and
2
2
2
3
3
1
,0 is y = x +
equation of tangent at
2
2
2
or 2x + 4y + 3 = 0.
Example 13 Find the angle of intersection of the curves y2 = 4ax and x2 = 4by.
Solution Given that y2 = 4ax...(i) and x2 = 4by... (ii). Solving (i) and (ii), we get
2
x2
= 4ax x4 = 64 ab2 x
4b
1
x (x 64 ab ) = 0 x = 0, x = 4a 3 b 3
or
2 1
1 2
Therefore, the points of intersection are (0, 0) and 4a 3 b 3 , 4a 3 b 3 .
Again, y2 = 4ax
dy 4a 2a
= =
and x2 = 4by
dx 2 y y
dy 2 x x
= =
dx 4b 2b
Therefore, at (0, 0) the tangent to the curve y2 = 4ax is parallel to y-axis and tangent
to the curve x2 = 4by is parallel to x-axis.
Angle between curves =
2
1
2 1
1 2
a 3
3 b 3 , 4a 3 b 3
4
a
, m1 (slope of the tangent to the curve (i)) = 2
At
2a
2
4a 3 b 3
1 a 3
4a 3 b 3
a 3
= , m2 (slope of the tangent to the curve (ii)) =
=2
2 b
2b
b
m2 m1
Therefore, tan = 1+ m m =
1 2
127
a 3 1 a 3
2
b 2 b
1
3
1
3
a 1a
1+ 2
b 2 b
1
1
3
3a . b 3
2
2
2 a 3 + b3
1
1
3a 3 . b 3
Hence, = tan1
2
2
3
3
+
2
a
b

Example 14 Show that the equation of normal at any point on the curve
x = 3cos cos3, y = 3sin sin3 is 4 (y cos3 x sin3) = 3 sin 4.
Solution We have x = 3cos cos3
Therefore,
dx
= 3sin + 3cos2 sin = 3sin (1 cos2) = 3sin3 .
d
dy
= 3cos 3sin2 cos = 3cos (1 sin2) = 3cos3
d
dy
cos3
sin 3
=
+
.
Therefore,
slope
of
normal
=
dx
sin 3
cos3
Hence the equation of normal is
y (3sin sin3) =
sin 3
[x (3cos cos3)]
cos3
y cos3 3sin cos3 + sin3 cos3 = xsin3 3sin3 cos + sin3 cos3
y cos3 xsin3 = 3sin cos (cos2 sin2)
128
MATHEMATICS
or
3
sin2 . cos2
2
3
sin4
4
4 (ycos3 xsin3 ) = 3 sin4.
Example 15 Find the maximum and minimum values of

f (x) = secx + log cos2x, 0 < x < 2
Solution f (x) = secx + 2 log cosx
Therefore, f (x) = secx tanx 2 tanx = tanx (secx 2)
f (x) = 0 tanx = 0 or secx = 2 or cosx =
1
2
Therefore, possible values of x are x = 0,

x=
Again,
or
x=
or
x = and
5
3
f (x) = sec2x (secx 2) + tanx (secx tanx)
= sec3x + secx tan2x 2sec2x

= secx (sec2x + tan2x 2secx). We note that
f (0) = 1 (1 + 0 2) = 1 < 0. Therefore, x = 0 is a point of maxima.
f () = 1 (1 + 0 + 2) = 3 < 0. Therefore, x = is a point of maxima.
is a point of minima.
f = 2 (4 + 3 4) = 6 > 0. Therefore, x =
3
3

5
5
is a point of minima.
f = 2 (4 + 3 4) = 6 > 0. Therefore, x =
3
3

Maximum Value of y at x = 0 is
1+0=1
Maximum Value of y at x = is
1 + 0 = 1
Minimum Value of y at x =
is
3
2 + 2 log
1
= 2 (1 log2)
2
Minimum Value of y at x =
5
is
3
2 + 2 log
1
= 2 (1 log2)
2
129
Example 16 Find the area of greatest rectangle that can be inscribed in an ellipse
x2 y 2
+
= 1.
a 2 b2
Solution Let ABCD be the rectangle of maximum area with sides AB = 2x and
BC = 2y, where C (x, y) is a point on the ellipse
x2 y 2
+
= 1 as shown in the Fig.6.3.
a 2 b2
The area A of the rectangle is 4xy i.e. A = 4xy which gives A2 = 16x2y2 = s (say)
x2 2
16b 2
Therefore, s = 16x 1 2 . b =
(a2x2 x4)
a2
a
2
(0, b)
ds 16b 2
= 2 . [2a2x 4x3].
dx
a
y
(0, 0)
(a, 0)
A
Again,
a
b
ds
and y =
=0 x=
2
2
dx
Now,
d 2 s 16b 2
= 2 [2a2 12x2]
dx 2
a
At
x=
a
d 2 s 16b 2
16b 2
2
2
,
=
[2
a
6
a
]
=
( 4a 2 ) < 0
2
2
2
a
a
2 dx
(0, b)
Fig. 6.3
(a, 0)
B
130
MATHEMATICS
Thus at x =
a
2
,y=
b
2
, s is maximum and hence the area A is maximum.
Maximum area = 4.x.y = 4 .
a b
.
= 2ab sq units.
2 2
Example 17 Find the difference between the greatest and least values of the

function f (x) = sin2x x, on , .
2 2
Solution f (x) = sin2x x
f (x) = 2 cos2 x 1
Therefore, f (x) = 0 cos2x =
1
2x is
2
or

f = sin ( ) + =
2 2
2
2

f = sin + = 3 +
6 6
6
2
6
2
f = sin = 3
6 6
6
2
6
f = sin ( ) =
2
2
2
Clearly,
is the greatest value and is the least.

2
2
Therefore, difference =
+ =
2
2
3x=
or
6 6
131
Example 18 An isosceles triangle of vertical angle 2 is inscribed in a circle of radius

a. Show that the area of triangle is maximum when =
.
6
Solution Let ABC be an isosceles triangle inscribed in the circle with radius a such
that AB = AC.
AD = AO + OD = a + a cos2 and BC = 2BD = 2a sin2 (see fig. 16.4)
Therefore, area of the triangle ABC i.e. =
1
BC . AD
2
1
2a sin2 . (a + a cos2)
2
= a2sin2 (1 + cos2)
= a2sin2 +
Therefore,
1 2
a sin4
2
d
= 2a2cos2 + 2a2cos4
d
= 2a2(cos2 + cos4)
d
= 0 cos2 = cos4 = cos ( 4)
d
Therefore, 2 = 4 =
d 2
2
).
2 = 2a (2sin2 4sin4) < 0 (at =
6
d
Therefore, Area of triangle is maximum when =
.
6
132
MATHEMATICS

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the following Examples
19 to 23.
Example 19 The abscissa of the point on the curve 3y = 6x 5x3, the normal at which
passes through origin is:
(A) 1
(B)
1
3
(C) 2
(D)
1
2
Solution Let (x1, y1) be the point on the given curve 3y = 6x 5x3 at which the normal
dy
= 2 5 x12 . Again the equation of
passes through the origin. Then we have
dx
( x1 , y1 )
the normal at (x 1, y1) passing through the origin gives 2 5 x12 =
x1
3
=
.
y1 6 5 x12
Since x1 = 1 satisfies the equation, therefore, Correct answer is (A).

Example 20 The two curves x3 3xy2 + 2 = 0 and 3x2y y3 = 2
(A) touch each other
(C) cut at an angle
(B) cut at right angle
(D) cut at an angle
Solution From first equation of the curve, we have 3x2 3y2 6xy
x2 y 2
dy
=
= (m1) say and second equation of the curve gives
2 xy
dx
6xy + 3x2
dy
dy
3y2
=0
dx
dx
2 xy
dy
= 2
= (m2) say
x y2
dx
Since m1 . m2 = 1. Therefore, correct answer is (B).
dy
=0
dx
Example 21 The tangent to the curve given by x = et . cost, y = et . sint at t =
133
makes
4
with x-axis an angle:

(A) 0
Solution
(B)
(C)
(D)
dx
dy
= et . sint + etcost,
= etcost + etsint
dt
dt
dy
cos t + sin t
2
=
and hence the correct answer is (D).
Therefore, dx t = =
cos t sint
4
0
Example 22 The equation of the normal to the curve y = sinx at (0, 0) is:
(A) x = 0
Solution
(B) y = 0
(C) x + y = 0
(D) x y = 0
1
dy
= cosx. Therefore, slope of normal = cos x = 1. Hence the equation
x =0
dx
of normal is y 0 = 1(x 0) or x + y = 0
Therefore, correct answer is (C).
Example 23 The point on the curve y2 = x, where the tangent makes an angle of
with x-axis is
4
1 1
(A) ,
2 4
Solution
1 1
(B) ,
4 2
(C) (4, 2)
dy 1
1
1
=
= tan = 1 y =
x=
dx 2 y
2
4
4
Therefore, correct answer is B.
(D) (1, 1)
134
MATHEMATICS
Fill in the blanks in each of the following Examples 24 to 29.

Example 24 The values of a for which y = x2 + ax + 25 touches the axis of x
are______.
dy
= 0 2x + a = 0
dx
Solution
a2
a
+ a + 25 = 0
4
2
Therefore,
i.e.
a
x= ,
2
a = 10
Hence, the values of a are 10.

Example 25 If f (x) =
1
, then its maximum value is _______.
4 x + 2 x +1
2
Solution For f to be maximum, 4x2 + 2x + 1 should be minimum i.e.

4x2 + 2x + 1 = 4 (x +
1 2
) +
4
1
3
1 giving the minimum value of 4x2 + 2x + 1 = .
4
4
Hence maximum value of f =
4
.
3
Example 26 Let f have second deriative at c such that f (c) = 0 and

f (c) > 0, then c is a point of ______.
Solution Local minima.

Example 27 Minimum value of f if f (x) = sinx in , is _____.
2 2
Solution 1
Example 28 The maximum value of sinx + cosx is _____.
Solution
2.
135
Example 29 The rate of change of volume of a sphere with respect to its surface
area, when the radius is 2 cm, is______.
Solution 1 cm3/cm2
v=
ds
4 3 dv
dv r
= = 1 at r = 2.
r = 4r 2 , s = 4r 2
= 8r
dr
3
ds 2
dr
6.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
1.
A spherical ball of salt is dissolving in water in such a manner that the rate of
decrease of the volume at any instant is propotional to the surface. Prove that
the radius is decreasing at a constant rate.
2.
If the area of a circle increases at a uniform rate, then prove that perimeter
varies inversely as the radius.
3.
A kite is moving horizontally at a height of 151.5 meters. If the speed of kite is

10 m/s, how fast is the string being let out; when the kite is 250 m away from
the boy who is flying the kite? The height of boy is 1.5 m.
4.
Two men A and B start with velocities v at the same time from the junction of
two roads inclined at 45 to each other. If they travel by different roads, find
the rate at which they are being seperated..
5.
Find an angle , 0 < <
6.
Find the approximate value of (1.999)5.
7.
Find the approximate volume of metal in a hollow spherical shell whose internal
and external radii are 3 cm and 3.0005 cm, respectively.
8.
2
A man, 2m tall, walks at the rate of 1 m/s towards a street light which is
3
, which increases twice as fast as its sine.
1
5 m above the ground. At what rate is the tip of his shadow moving? At what
3
136
MATHEMATICS
1
rate is the length of the shadow changing when he is 3 m from the base of
3
the light?
9.
A swimming pool is to be drained for cleaning. If L represents the number of

litres of water in the pool t seconds after the pool has been plugged off to drain
and L = 200 (10 t)2. How fast is the water running out at the end of 5
seconds? What is the average rate at which the water flows out during the
first 5 seconds?
10.
The volume of a cube increases at a constant rate. Prove that the increase in
its surface area varies inversely as the length of the side.
11.
x and y are the sides of two squares such that y = x x2 . Find the rate of
change of the area of second square with respect to the area of first square.
12.
Find the condition that the curves 2x = y2 and 2xy = k intersect orthogonally.
13.
Prove that the curves xy = 4 and x2 + y2 = 8 touch each other.
14.
Find the co-ordinates of the point on the curve
y = 4 at which tangent
is equally inclined to the axes.

15.
Find the angle of intersection of the curves y = 4 x2 and y = x2.
16.
Prove that the curves y2 = 4x and x2 + y2 6x + 1 = 0 touch each other at the

point (1, 2).
17.
Find the equation of the normal lines to the curve 3x2 y2 = 8 which are
parallel to the line x + 3y = 4.
18.
At what points on the curve x2 + y2 2x 4y + 1 = 0, the tangents are parallel

to the y-axis?
19.
Show that the line
20.
Show that f (x) = 2x + cot1x + log
x
x y
= 1, touches the curve y = b . e a at the point where
a b
the curve intersects the axis of y.
1+ x 2 x is increasing in R.
1, f (x) =
137
21.
Show that for a
3 sinx cosx 2ax + b is decreasing in R.
22.
Show that f (x) = tan1(sinx + cosx) is an increasing function in 0,
23.
At what point, the slope of the curve y = x3 + 3x2 + 9x 27 is maximum?

Also find the maximum slope.
24.
Prove that f (x) = sinx +
3 cosx has maximum value at x = 6 .
Long Answer (L.A.)

25.
If the sum of the lengths of the hypotenuse and a side of a right angled triangle
is given, show that the area of the triangle is maximum when the angle between
them is
26.
Find the points of local maxima, local minima and the points of inflection of the
function f (x) = x5 5x4 + 5x3 1. Also find the corresponding local maximum
and local minimum values.
27.
A telephone company in a town has 500 subscribers on its list and collects
fixed charges of Rs 300/- per subscriber per year. The company proposes to
increase the annual subscription and it is believed that for every increase of
Re 1/- one subscriber will discontinue the service. Find what increase will
bring maximum profit?
28.
29.
x2
If the straight line x cos + y sin = p touches the curve 2
a
prove that a2 cos2 + b2 sin2 = p2.
An open box with square base is to be made of a given quantity of card board
of area c2. Show that the maximum volume of the box is
30.
y2
= 1, then
b2
c3
6 3
cubic units.
Find the dimensions of the rectangle of perimeter 36 cm which will sweep out
a volume as large as possible, when revolved about one of its sides. Also find
the maximum volume.
138
MATHEMATICS
31.
If the sum of the surface areas of cube and a sphere is constant, what is the
ratio of an edge of the cube to the diameter of the sphere, when the sum of
their volumes is minimum?
32.
AB is a diameter of a circle and C is any point on the circle. Show that the
area of ABC is maximum, when it is isosceles.
33.
A metal box with a square base and vertical sides is to contain 1024 cm3. The
material for the top and bottom costs Rs 5/cm2 and the material for the sides
costs Rs 2.50/cm2 . Find the least cost of the box.
34.
The sum of the surface areas of a rectangular parallelopiped with sides x, 2x
x
and a sphere is given to be constant. Prove that the sum of their volumes
3
is minimum, if x is equal to three times the radius of the sphere. Also find the
minimum value of the sum of their volumes.
and

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the following questions
35 to 39:
35.
The sides of an equilateral triangle are increasing at the rate of 2 cm/sec. The
rate at which the area increases, when side is 10 cm is:
(A) 10 cm2/s
36.
(B)
3 cm2/s
(D)
10 2
cm /s
3
A ladder, 5 meter long, standing on a horizontal floor, leans against a vertical

wall. If the top of the ladder slides downwards at the rate of 10 cm/sec, then
the rate at which the angle between the floor and the ladder is decreasing
when lower end of ladder is 2 metres from the wall is:
1
radian/sec
10
(D) 10 radian/sec
(A)
(B)
1
radian/sec
20
37.
(C) 10 3 cm2/s
The curve y = x 5 has at (0, 0)
(C) 20 radian/sec
139
(A) a vertical tangent (parallel to y-axis)

(B) a horizontal tangent (parallel to x-axis)
(C) an oblique tangent
(D) no tangent
38.
The equation of normal to the curve 3x2 y2 = 8 which is parallel to the line
x + 3y = 8 is
(A) 3x y = 8
(C) x + 3y
39.
8=0
42.
43.
(C) 6
(D) .6
(B) .032
(C) 5.68
(D) 5.968
The equation of tangent to the curve y (1 + x2) = 2 x, where it crosses x-axis

is:
(A) x + 5y = 2
(B) x 5y = 2
(C) 5x y = 2
(D) 5x + y = 2
The points at which the tangents to the curve y = x3 12x + 18 are parallel to
x-axis are:
(A) (2, 2), (2, 34)
(B) (2, 34), (2, 0)
(C) (0, 34), (2, 0)
(D) (2, 2), (2, 34)
The tangent to the curve y = e2x at the point (0, 1) meets x-axis at:
(A) (0, 1)
44.
(B) 0
If y = x4 10 and if x changes from 2 to 1.99, what is the change in y

(A) .32
41.
(D) x + 3y = 0
If the curve ay + x2 = 7 and x3 = y, cut orthogonally at (1, 1), then the value of
a is:
(A) 1
40.
(B) 3x + y + 8 = 0
(B)
1
,0
2
(C) (2, 0)
(D) (0, 2)
The slope of tangent to the curve x = t2 + 3t 8, y = 2t2 2t 5 at the point

(2, 1) is:
140
MATHEMATICS
(A)
45.
48.
(B)
(C)
(B) [2, 1]
(D)
(C)
, 2]
(D) [1, 1]
(B) has a maximum, at x = 0
(C) is a decreasing function
(D) is an increasing function
y = x (x 3)2 decreases for the values of x given by :

(B) x < 0
(C) x > 0
(D) 0 < x <
3
2
The function f (x) = 4 sin3x 6 sin2x + 12 sinx + 100 is strictly
(C) decreasing in
,
2 2

(B) decreasing in ,
2
(D) decreasing in 0,
Which of the following functions is decreasing on 0,

(A) sin2x
51.
(D) 6
(A) has a minimum at x =
3
(A) increasing in ,
50.
6
7
Let the f : R R be defined by f (x) = 2x + cosx, then f :
(A) 1 < x < 3

49.
(C)
The interval on which the function f (x) = 2x3 + 9x2 + 12x 1 is decreasing is:
(A) [1,
47.
6
7
(B)
The two curves x3 3xy2 + 2 = 0 and 3x2y y3 2 = 0 intersect at an angle of

(A)
46.
22
7
(B) tanx
(C) cosx
(D) cos 3x
The function f (x) = tanx x

(A) always increases
(B) always decreases
(C) never increases
(D) sometimes increases and sometimes

decreases.
52.
If x is real, the minimum value of x2 8x + 17 is

(A) 1
53.
(B) 0
55.
57.
(C)
135
(D) 160
(B) two points of local minimum
(C) one maxima and one minima
(D) no maxima or minima
The maximum value of sin x . cos x is
1
4
At x =
(B)
1
2
(C)
(D) 2 2
5
, f (x) = 2 sin3x + 3 cos3x is:
6
(A) maximum
(B) minimum
(C) zero
(D) neither maximum nor minimum.
Maximum slope of the curve y = x3 + 3x2 + 9x 27 is:

(B) 12
(C) 16
(D) 32
f (x) = xx has a stationary point at

(A) x = e
59.
(B) 0
(A) two points of local maximum
(A) 0
58.
(D) 2
The function f (x) = 2x3 3x2 12x + 4, has
(A)
56.
(C) 1
The smallest value of the polynomial x3 18x2 + 96x in [0, 9] is

(A) 126
54.
141
(B) x =
1
e
1
The maximum value of
x
(A) e
(B) e
(C) x = 1
(D) x =
is:
(C) e
1
e
(D)
1
e
1
e
142
MATHEMATICS
Fill in the blanks in each of the following Exercises 60 to 64:

60.
The curves y = 4x2 + 2x 8 and y = x3 x + 13 touch each other at the

point_____.
61.
The equation of normal to the curve y = tanx at (0, 0) is ________.
62.
The values of a for which the function f (x) = sinx ax + b increases on R are
______.
63.
The function f (x) =
64.
The least value of the function f (x) = ax +
2 x 2 1
, x > 0, decreases in the interval _______.
x4
b
(a > 0, b > 0, x > 0) is ______.
x
Chapter
INTEGRALS
7.1 Overview
d
F (x) = f (x). Then, we write f ( x ) dx = F (x) + C. These integrals are
dx
called indefinite integrals or general integrals, C is called a constant of integration. All
these integrals differ by a constant.
7.1.1
Let
7.1.2
If two functions differ by a constant, they have the same derivative.
7.1.3
Geometrically, the statement
f ( x ) dx = F (x) + C = y (say) represents a
family of curves. The different values of C correspond to different members of this

family and these members can be obtained by shifting any one of the curves parallel to
itself. Further, the tangents to the curves at the points of intersection of a line x = a with
the curves are parallel.
7.1.4
(i)
Some properties of indefinite integrals

The process of differentiation and integration are inverse of each other,
d
f ( x ) dx = f ( x ) and
dx
arbitrary constant.
i.e.,
(ii)
f ' ( x ) dx = f ( x ) + C ,
Two indefinite integrals with the same derivative lead to the same family of
curves and so they are equivalent. So if f and g are two functions such that
d
d
f ( x ) dx =
g ( x) dx , then
dx
dx
(iii)
where C is any
f ( x ) dx
and
g ( x ) dx are equivalent.
The integral of the sum of two functions equals the sum of the integrals of
the functions i.e.,
( f ( x ) + g ( x ) ) dx = f ( x ) dx + g ( x ) dx .
144
MATHEMATICS
(iv)
A constant factor may be written either before or after the integral sign, i.e.,
a f ( x ) dx = a f ( x ) dx , where a is a constant.
(v)
(k
Properties (iii) and (iv) can be generalised to a finite number of functions

f1, f2, ..., fn and the real numbers, k1, k2, ..., kn giving
f ( x ) + k2 f 2 ( x ) + ...+, kn f n ( x ) ) dx = k1 f1 ( x ) dx + k2 f 2 ( x ) dx + ... + kn f n ( x ) dx
1 1
7.1.5
Methods of integration
There are some methods or techniques for finding the integral where we can not
directly select the antiderivative of function f by reducing them into standard forms.
Some of these methods are based on
1.
Integration by substitution
2.
Integration using partial fractions
3.
Integration by parts.
7.1.6
Definite integral
b
The definite integral is denoted by
f ( x ) dx , where a is the lower limit of the integral

a
and b is the upper limit of the integral. The definite integral is evaluated in the following
two ways:
(i)
The definite integral as the limit of the sum

b
(ii)
f ( x ) dx = F(b) F(a), if F is an antiderivative of f (x).

a
7.1.7
The definite integral as the limit of the sum

b
The definite integral
f ( x ) dx is the area bounded by the curve y = f (x), the ordia
nates x = a, x = b and the x-axis and given by

b
f ( x ) dx = (b a)
a
1
lim f (a) + f ( a + h ) + ... f ( a + ( n 1) h )
n n
INTEGRALS
145
or
b
f ( x ) dx = lim h f (a) + f ( a + h ) + ... + f ( a + ( n 1) h ) ,

h 0
where h =
7.1.8
(i)
ba
0 as n .
n
Fundamental Theorem of Calculus

Area function : The function A (x) denotes the area function and is given
x
by A (x) =
f ( x ) dx .
a
(ii)
First Fundamental Theorem of integral Calculus

Let f be a continuous function on the closed interval [a, b] and let A (x) be
the area function . Then A (x) = f (x) for all x [a, b] .
(iii)
Second Fundamental Theorem of Integral Calculus

Let f be continuous function defined on the closed interval [a, b] and F be
an antiderivative of f.
b
f ( x ) dx = [ F ( x )]
b
a
7.1.9
= F(b) F(a).
Some properties of Definite Integrals

b
P0 :
P1 :
P2 :
f ( x ) dx =
f ( t ) dt
a
f ( x ) dx = f ( x ) dx , in particular,
b
f ( x ) dx = f ( x ) dx + f ( x ) dx
f ( x ) dx = 0
a
146
MATHEMATICS
P3 :
f ( x ) dx =
f ( x ) dx =
f ( x ) dx =
f ( x ) dx
0
P7 : (i)
(ii)
f ( a x ) dx
a
f ( x ) dx +
2a
P6 :
2a
P5 :
f ( a + b x ) dx
a
P4 :
f ( 2a x ) dx
0
a
= 2 f ( x ) dx,if f (2a x) = f ( x) ,
0
0, if f (2a x) = f ( x).
f ( x ) dx = 2 f ( x ) dx , if f is an even function i.e., f (x) = f (x)
f ( x ) dx = 0, if f is an odd function i.e., f (x) = f (x)
7.2
Solved Examples
Short Answer (S.A.)

2a b
2 + 3c 3 x 2 w.r.t. x
Example 1 Integrate
x x
Solution
2a b
2 + 3c 3 x 2 dx
x
x
= 2a ( x ) 2 dx bx 2 dx + 3c x 3 dx
5
3
= 4a x + b + 9 cx + C .
x
5
INTEGRALS
147
3ax
dx
b c2 x2
Example 2 Evaluate
Solution Let v = b2 + c2x2 , then dv = 2c2 xdx

Therefore,
3ax
b2 + c2 x2 dx
3a dv
2c 2 v
3a
log b 2
2c 2
c2 x2
C.
Example 3 Verify the following using the concept of integration as an antiderivative.

x 3 dx
x 1
d
x2
x
Solution
dx
2
=1
x2
2
x3
log x 1
3
3x 2
1
3
x 1
2x
2
=1x+x
Thus
x3
log x 1
3
x3
=
.
x 1
1
x 2 x3
x3
+
log x + 1 + C =
dx
x
2
3
x +1
Example 4 Evaluate
Solution Let I =
1 x
dx , x 1.
1 x
1+ x
dx =
1 x
1
1 x
dx +
x dx
1 x2
= sin 1 x + I1 ,
148
MATHEMATICS
x dx
where I1 =
1 x2
Put 1 x2 = t2 2x dx = 2t dt. Therefore

I1 = dt = t + C = 1 x 2
Hence
I = sin1x 1 x 2
C.
dx
Example 5 Evaluate
( x )( x ) , >
Solution Put x = t2. Then
t2
x =
and dx = 2tdt. Now
I =
2t dt
t2 ( t2 )
dt
2
k t2
Solution I =
tan
2 dt
( t )
, where k 2
1 t
1
= 2sin k + C = 2sin
Example 6 Evaluate
tan
x
+ C.

x sec 4 x dx
x sec 4 x dx
8
2
2
tan x ( sec x ) sec x dx
8
2
2
tan x ( tan x + 1) sec x dx
t2
= t2
INTEGRALS
tan
tan11 x tan 9 x
+
+C.
11
9
10
Example 7 Find
x sec 2 x dx + tan 8 x sec 2 x dx
x3
x4 + 3x2 + 2 dx
Solution Put x2 = t. Then 2x dx = dt.

Now
x3 dx
1
t dt
= 2
I= 4
2
x + 3x + 2 2 t + 3t + 2
Consider
t
A
B
=
+
t + 3t + 2 t + 1 t + 2
2
Comparing coefficient, we get A = 1, B = 2.

Then
I=
1
dt
dt
2
2 t+2
t + 1
1
2log t + 2 log t +1
2
= log
Example 8 Find
x2 + 2
+C
x2 + 1
dx
2sin 2 x + 5cos2 x
Solution Dividing numerator and denominator by cos2x, we have

I=
sec 2 x dx
2tan 2 x 5
149
150
MATHEMATICS
Put tanx = t so that sec2x dx = dt. Then

I=
dt
2t 2 + 5 = 2
dt
5
t +
2t
1 2
tan 1
+ C
2 5
5
2 tan x
tan 1
+ C.
10
5
7 x 5 dx as a limit of sums.
Example 9 Evaluate
1
Solution Here a = 1 , b = 2, and h =
2 +1
, i.e, nh = 3 and f (x) = 7x 5.
n
Now, we have
2
( 7 x 5) dx = lim h f ( 1) + f (1 + h) + f ( 1 + 2h ) + ... + f ( 1 + ( n 1) h )
h0
Note that
f (1) = 7 5 = 12
f (1 + h) = 7 + 7h 5 = 12 + 7h
f (1 + (n 1) h) = 7 (n 1) h 12.
Therefore,
2
( 7x 5) dx = lim h ( 12) + (7h 12) + (14h 12) + ... + (7 ( n 1 ) h 12) .
h0
h 7 h 1 + 2 + ... + ( n 1) 12n
= lim
h0
INTEGRALS
151
( n 1) n
h 7h
.12n = lim ( nh )( nh h ) 12nh
= lim
h0
h0 2
2
7
3 3 0 12
2
3 =
79
9
36 =
.
2
2
Example 10 Evaluate
tan 7 x
cot 7 x + tan 7 x dx
0
Solution We have
I=
tan 7 x
cot 7 x + tan 7 x dx
0
...(1)
tan 7 x
2
dx
=
7
7
0 cot
x + tan x
2
cot
0
cot 7 ( x ) dx
7
...(2)
x dx + tan 7 x
Adding (1) and (2), we get
tan 7 x + cot 7 x
2I =
dx
tan 7 x + cot 7 x
0
= dx which gives I
0
by (P4)
.
4
152
MATHEMATICS
Example 11 Find
10 x
x + 10 x
dx
Solution We have
8
10 x
I=
x + 10 x
...(1)
10 (10 x)
10 x
dx
10 10 x
I=
10 x + x
dx
dx
(2)
Adding (1) and (2), we get

8
2I
1dx
82 6
Hence
I=3
Example 12 Find
1+ sin 2x dx
Solution We have
I=
1+ sin 2 x dx =
( sin x + cos x ) dx
0
by (P3)
2
( sin x + cos x ) dx
0
INTEGRALS
153
( cos x + sin x )04
I = 1.
x 2 tan 1 x dx .
Example 13 Find
2
1
Solution I = x tan x dx
= tan 1 x x 2 dx
1
x3
.
1 + x 2 3 dx
x3
x
1
1
= 3 tan x 3 x 1 + x 2 dx
x3
x2 1
1
tan
x
+ log 1 + x 2 + C .
=
3
6 6
Example 14 Find
10 4 x + 4 x 2 dx
Solution We have
10 4 x 4 x 2 dx
I=
2x 1
dx
Put t = 2x 1, then dt = 2dx.

Therefore,
I=
1
2
t 2 + ( 3) dt
2
t2 9
2
1
t
2
1
( 2 x 1)
4
9
log t
4
( 2 x 1)
t2
+9 +
9
log ( 2 x 1) +
4
( 2 x 1) 2 + 9
+ C.
154
MATHEMATICS
Long Answer (L.A.)

x 2 dx
.
Example 15 Evaluate 4 2
x + x 2
Solution Let x2 = t. Then

x2
t
t
A
B
= 2
=
=
+
4
2
(
t
+
2)
(
t
1)
t
+
2
t
1
x + x 2 t +t 2
So
t = A (t 1) + B (t + 2)
Comparing coefficients, we get A =
2
1
, B= .
3
3
x2
2 1
1 1
=
+
4
2
2
3
x + x 2
x + 2 3 x 2 1
So
Therefore,
x2
2
x 4 + x 2 2 dx = 3
dx
x 2 + 2 dx + 3 x 2 1
2 1
x
1
x 1
tan 1
+ log
+C
= 3
x +1
2
2 6
Example16 Evaluate
x3 x
dx
x4 9
Solution We have
I=
x3 x
dx =
x4 9
x3
dx
x4 9
x dx
= I1+ I2 .
x4 9
INTEGRALS
x3
x 9
Now
I1 =
Put
t = x4 9 so that 4x3 dx = dt. Therefore
I1 =
1 dt
1
= log t
4 t
4
C1 =
1
log x 4 9 + C1
4
x dx
x4 9 .
Again,
I2 =
Put
x2 = u so that 2x dx = du. Then

1
du
I2 = 2 u 2 3
=
Thus
1
2
log
u 3
u 3
C2
1
x2 3
log 2
+ C2 .
12
x +3
I = I1 + I2
1
1
x2 3
log x 4 9 + log 2
+ C.
4
12
x +3
sin 2 x
1
0 sin x + cos x = 2 log ( 2 + 1)
2
Example 17 Show that

Solution We have
sin 2 x
0 sin x + cos x dx
2
I=
155
156
MATHEMATICS
sin 2 x
2
dx
= 0
sin x + cos x
2
Thus, we get
(by P4)
cos 2 x
0 sin x + cos x dx
I=
2I =
dx
0 cos x
2
1
log
sec
+
tan
x
sec
dx
=
=
x
4 0
2
20

log sec + tan log sec + tan
4
4
4
4
2
log ( 2 + 1) log ( 2 1)
1
log
2
( 2 + 1)2
1
2
log
log ( 2 + 1)
=
=
2
2
Hence
I=
1
2
Example 18
Find
x ( tan
0
log ( 2 + 1) .
x ) dx
2
2 +1
2 1
INTEGRALS
I=
Solution
x ( tan
x ) dx .
2
Integrating by parts, we have

1
1 2 tan 1 x
x2
2 1
1
(
)
tan x 0 2 x .2 1 + x 2 dx
2
0
I=
2
x2
.tan 1 x dx
=
32 0 1 + x 2
2
=
I1 , where I1 =
32
x2
1
1+ x 2 tan xdx
0
Now
I1 =
x2 + 1 1
0 1 + x 2 tan1x dx
1
tan 1 x dx
2
+
x
1
0
1
= tan x dx
0
= I2
1
1
(
( tan 1 x )2 )0
2
= I2
Here
I2 =
Thus
I1 =
2
32
x
dx
1 + x2
0
1
tan x dx = ( x tan 1 x )0
1
1
log 1 + x 2
4 2
1
2
log 2
4 2
32
1
0
1
log 2 .
4 2
157
158
MATHEMATICS
I =
32 4
Therefore,
1
log 2
2
2
2 1
+ log 2
=
32
16 4 2
2 4
+ log 2 .
16
2
Example 19 Evaluate
f ( x) dx , where f (x) = |x + 1| + |x| + |x 1|.
2 x, if
as f ( x ) = x + 2, if
3x , if
Solution We can redefine f
Therefore,
1 < x 0
0 < x 1
1< x 2
f ( x ) dx = ( 2 x ) dx + ( x + 2 ) dx + 3 x dx
0
(by P2)
5 5 9 19
+ + =
.
2 2 2 2
x2
3x 2
x2
+
2
x
+
2
x
=
2 1 2
0 2 1
1 1
4 1
= 0 2 + + 2 + 3
2 2
2 2

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Examples from
20 to 30.
Example 20
e ( cos x sin x ) dx is equal to

x
(A) e x cos x + C
(B) e x sin x + C
(C) e x cos x + C
(D) e x sin x + C
INTEGRALS
159
x
x
Solution (A) is the correct answer since e f ( x ) + f '( x ) dx = e f ( x ) + C . Here
f (x) = cosx, f (x) = sin x.
sin
Example 21
dx
is equal to
x cos 2 x
(A) tanx + cotx + C
(B) (tanx + cotx)2 + C
(C) tanx cotx + C
(D) (tanx cotx)2 + C
Solution (C) is the correct answer, since
dx
I= 2
=
sin x cos 2 x
( sin 2 x + cos2 x ) dx
sin 2 x cos 2 x
2
2
= sec x dx + cosec x dx = tanx cotx + C
Example 22 If
3ex 5 e x
4 e x + 5 e x dx = ax + b log |4ex + 5ex| + C, then
(A) a =
1
7
, b=
8
8
1
7
(B) a = , b =
8
8
(C) a =
1
7
, b=
8
8
1
7
(D) a = , b =
8
8
Solution (C) is the correct answer, since differentiating both sides, we have
3ex 5 e x
( 4 e x 5 e x ) ,
=
a
+
b
4 ex + 5 e x
4 ex + 5 e x
giving 3ex 5ex = a (4ex + 5ex) + b (4ex 5ex). Comparing coefficients on both
sides, we get 3 = 4a + 4b and 5 = 5a 5b. This verifies a =
1
7
, b= .
8
8
160
MATHEMATICS
b+c
Example 23
f ( x ) dx is equal to
a+c
(A)
f ( x c ) dx
(B)
bc
(C)
f ( x + c ) dx
f ( x ) dx
(D)
f ( x ) dx
a c
Solution (B) is the correct answer, since by putting x = t + c, we get

I=
f ( c + t ) dt = f ( x + c ) dx .
Example 24 If f and g are continuous functions in [0, 1] satisfying f (x) = f (a x)

a
and g (x) + g (a x) = a, then
f ( x ) . g ( x ) dx
is equal to
(A)
a
2
a
(C)
(B)
a
2
f ( x ) dx
0
(D) a f ( x ) dx
f ( x ) dx
Solution B is the correct answer. Since I =
f ( x ) . g ( x ) dx
0
f ( a x ) g ( a x ) dx =
f ( x ) ( a g ( x ) ) dx
0
= a f ( x ) dx f ( x ) . g ( x ) dx = a f ( x ) dx I
INTEGRALS
161
or
a
f ( x ) dx .
2 0
Example 25 If x =
(A) 3
dt
1 + 9t 2
and
d2y
= ay, then a is equal to
dx 2
(B) 6
(C) 9
y
Solution (C) is the correct answer, since x =
dt
1 + 9t 2
(D) 1
dx
1
=
dy
1 + 9 y2
18 y
dy
d2y
=
= 9y.
2 .
2
2
1
+
9
y
dx
dx
which gives
x3 + x +1
x 2 + 2 x +1 dx is equal to
1
Example 26
(A) log 2
(B) 2 log 2
(C)
1
log 2
2
(D) 4 log 2
x3 + x +1
dx
Solution (B) is the correct answer, since I = 2
x + 2 x +1
1
1
x3
x +1
+ 2
dx = 0 + 2
= 2
x + 2 x + 1 1 x + 2 x + 1
1
x +1
( x +1)
dx
[odd function + even function]

1
=2
( x +1)
0
x +1
dx = 2
0
1
dx
x +1
= 2 log x + 1 0 = 2 log 2.
162
MATHEMATICS
If
Example 27
(A) a 1 +
et
0 1 + t dt = a, then
e
2
et
(1 + t )
dt is equal to
e
2
(B) a + 1
(C) a 1
e
2
(D) a + 1 +
et
dt
Solution (B) is the correct answer, since I =
1+ t
0
1
e
1 t
dt = a (given)
e +
=
2
1 + t 0 0 (1 + t )
1
Therefore,
et
(1 + t )
=a
e
+ 1.
2
Example 28
x cos x dx is equal to
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Solution (A) is the correct answer, since I =
x cos x dx = 2
3
12
2
2
= 2 x cos x dx + x cos x dx + x cos x dx =

1
3
0
2
2

Example 29
sin 6 x
cos8 x dx = _______.
x cos x dx
0
8
.
e
2
INTEGRALS
tan 7 x
+C
7
Solution
a
Example 30
f ( x ) dx = 0 if f is an _______ function.
Solution Odd.
2a
Example 31
f ( x ) dx = 2 f ( x ) dx , if f (2a x) = _______.
0
Solution f (x).
Example 32
Solution
sin n x dx
0 sin n x + cosn x = _______.
.
4
7.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
Verify the following :
2x 1
1.
2 x + 3 dx = x log |(2x + 3) | + C
2.
2x + 3
dx = log |x2 + 3x| + C
2
+ 3x
Evaluate the following:
3.
( x 2 + 2 ) dx
x +1
4.
e6 log x e5log x
e4log x e3log x dx
163
164
MATHEMATICS
(1 + cos x )
dx
x + sin x
5.
7.
tan
9.
1 + sin xdx
10.
x
dx
x +1
12.
x2
14.
16.
18.
x
x4 1 dx
20.
x sec 4 x dx
(Hint : Put
x = z)
dx
6.
1 + cos x
8.
11.
a+x
ax
13.
1 + x2
dx
x4
15.
17.
19.
x2
1 x 4 dx put x2 = t
sin x + cos x
1 + sin 2 x
dx
22.
1+ x
3
4
dx
(Hint : Put x = z4)
dx
16 9 x
3x 1
x2 + 9
dx
2ax x dx
( cos5 x + cos 4 x ) dx
1 2cos3 x
21.
23.
dt
3t 2t 2
5 2x + x 2 dx
sin 1 x
3
(1 x 2 ) 2
dx
sin 6 x + cos 6 x
sin 2 x cos2 x dx
INTEGRALS
24.
26.
x
3
a x
dx
dx
25.
165
cos x cos 2 x
dx
1 cos x
(Hint : Put x2 = sec )
x4 1
Evaluate the following as limit of sums:

2
27.
( x 2 + 3) dx
28.
dx
Evaluate the following:
29.
dx
0 e x + e x
2
31.
30.
tan x dx
2
tan 2 x
1+ m
0
dx
( x 1) (2 x)
1
32.
xdx
1+ x 2
1
2
33.
x sin x cos
xdx
34.
(1+ x
0
dx
2
) 1 x 2
(Hint: let x = sin)

Long Answer (L.A.)
35.
x 2 dx
x 4 x 2 12
37.
1 + sin x
0
36.
( x2
x 2 dx
a 2 )( x 2 b 2 )
2x 1
38.
( x 1)( x + 2 )( x 3) dx
166
39.
MATHEMATICS
tan
e
1+ x + x 2
dx
2
1+ x
40.
sin
x
dx
a+x
(Hint: Put x = a tan2)
41.
1 + cos x
5
(1 cos x) 2
43.
3 x
cos3 x dx
tan x dx (Hint: Put tanx = t2)
44.
42.
dx
(a 2 cos2 x + b2 sin 2 x)2

0
(Hint: Divide Numerator and Denominator by cos4x)
45.
x log (1+ 2 x) dx
0
46.
x log sin x dx
0
47.
log (sin x + cos x)dx

Choose the correct option from given four options in each of the Exercises from 48 to 63.
48.
cos2 x cos 2 is equal to

dx
cos x cos
(A) 2(sinx + xcos) + C
(B) 2(sinx xcos) + C
(C) 2(sinx + 2xcos) + C
(D) 2(sinx 2x cos) + C
INTEGRALS
49.
dx
is equal to
sin x a sin x b
(A) sin (b a) log
sin( x b)
+C
sin( x a)
(C) cosec (b a) log
50.
tan
sin( x b)
+C
sin( x a)
x x tan 1 x + C
(C)
(B) cosec (b a) log
(D) sin (b a) log
sin( x a)
+C
sin( x b)
sin( x a)
+C
sin( x b)
x dx is equal to
(A) (x + 1) tan 1 x x + C
(B) x tan 1 x x + C
(D)
x ( x + 1) tan 1 x + C
51.
x 1 x
e 1 + x 2 dx is equal to
ex
+C
(B)
1 + x2
ex
+C
(A)
1 + x2
(C)
52.
167
ex
(1 + x 2 )2
( 4x
x9
2
+ 1)
+C
(1 + x 2 )2
+C
dx is equal to
1
1
(A)
4+ 2 + C
5x
x
(C)
(D)
ex
1
(1 + 4 ) 5 + C
10x
1
1
(B) 4 + 2 + C
5
x
5
(D)
1 1
2 + 4 + C
10 x
168
53.
54.
55.
MATHEMATICS
If
dx
( x + 2) ( x
+ 1)
= a log |1 + x2| + b tan1x +
(A) a =
1
2
,b=
10
5
(B) a =
1
2
,b=
10
5
(C) a =
1
2
,b=
10
5
(D) a =
1
2
,b=
10
5
x3
x + 1 is equal to
(A) x +
x 2 x3
+ log 1 x + C
2
3
(B) x +
x 2 x3
log 1 x + C
2
3
(C) x
x 2 x3
log 1 + x + C
2
3
(D) x
x 2 x3
+ log 1 + x + C
2
3
x + sin x
1 + cos x dx is equal to
(A) log 1 + cos x + C
(C) x tan
56.
1
log |x + 2| + C, then
5
If
x
+C
2
(D) x .tan
x
+C
2
x3 dx
1 x
(B) log x + sin x + C
a (1 x 2 ) 2
b 1 x2
C, then
(A) a =
1
,
3
b=1
(B) a =
1
,
3
b=1
(C) a =
1
,
3
b = 1
(D) a =
1
,
3
b = 1
INTEGRALS
57.
dx
1 + cos2x
169
is equal to
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
(C) 2
(D) 2 ( 2 1)
58.
1 sin 2xdx is equal to
(B) 2
(A) 2 2
59.
cos x e
sin x
2 +1)
dx is equal to _______.
x+3
60.
( x + 4)
e x dx = ________.
Fill in the blanks in each of the following Exercise 60 to 63.

a
61.
If
1 + 4x
dx =
sin x
62.
3 + 4cos2 x dx
, then a = ________.
8
= ________.
63.
The value of
sin3x cos2x dx is _______.
Chapter
APPLICATION OF INTEGRALS
8.1 Overview
This chapter deals with a specific application of integrals to find the area under simple
curves, area between lines and arcs of circles, parabolas and ellipses, and finding the
area bounded by the above said curves.
8.1.1 The area of the region bounded by the curve y = f (x), x-axis and the lines
x = a and x = b (b > a) is given by the formula:
b
f ( x) dx
ydx =
Area =
a
8.1.2 The area of the region bounded by the curve x = (y), y-axis and the lines
y = c, y = d is given by the formula:
d
Area
( y ) dy
xdy
=
c
8.1.3 The area of the region enclosed between two curves y = f (x), y = g (x) and the
lines x = a, x = b is given by the formula.
b
f ( x) g ( x) dx , where f (x)
Area =
g (x) in [a, b]
8.1.4 If f (x)
g (x) in [a, c] and f (x)
f ( x) g ( x) dx
Area =
g (x) in [c, b], a < c < b, then
g ( x) f ( x) dx
c
8.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer (S.A.)
Example 1 Find the area of the curve
y = sin x between 0 and .
Solution We have
Area OAB = ydx = sin x dx = cos x 0
= cos0 cos = 2 sq units.
APPLICATION OF INTEGRALS 171
Example 2 Find the area of the region bounded by the curve ay2 = x3, the y-axis and
the lines y = a and y = 2a.
Solution We have
2a
2a
a 3 y 3 dy
xdy
Area BMNC =
a
3a 3 53
y
=
5
2a
3a 3
2a
=
5
1
5
3
5
3
5
3 3 3
3 1
a
a
2
(
)
=
5
2
3 2
3
a
2.2
1 sq units.
=
5
Example 3 Find the area of the region

bounded by the parabola y2 = 2x and the
straight line x y = 4.
Solution The intersecting points of the given
curves are obtained by solving the equations
x y = 4 and y2 = 2x for x and y.
We have y2 = 8 + 2y i.e., (y 4) (y + 2) = 0
which gives y = 4, 2 and
x = 8, 2.
Thus, the points of intersection are (8,
4), (2, 2). Hence
4
Area =
4 + y 2 y
y2 1 3
4
y
+
y
=
2
6
dy
= 18 sq units.
2
Example 4 Find the area of the region

bounded by the parabolas y2 = 6x and
x2 = 6y.
172 MATHEMATICS
Solution The intersecting points of the given parabolas are obtained by solving these
equations for x and y, which are 0(0, 0) and (6, 6). Hence
6
3
2
6x
Area OABC =
0
6
3
x
x
x
dx = 2 6
3 18
6
0
3
3
2
= 2 6 (6) (6) = 12 sq units.
3
18
Example 5 Find the area enclosed by the curve x = 3 cost, y = 2 sint.
Solution Eliminating t as follows:
x = 3 cost, y = 2 sint
x
= cos t ,
3
y
sin t , we obtain
2
x2 y 2
= 1,
9 4
which is the equation of an ellipse.
From Fig. 8.5, we get

3
the required area = 4
8 x
9 x2
=
3 2
2
9 x 2 dx
3
0
9 1 x
sin
2
3
= 6 sq units.
Long Answer (L.A.)

Example 6 Find the area of the region included between the parabola y =
3x 2
and the
4
line 3x 2y + 12 = 0.
Solution Solving the equations of the given curves y =
we get
3x2 6x 24 = 0
(x 4) (x + 2) = 0
3x 2
and 3x 2y + 12 = 0,
4
x = 4, x = 2 which give
y = 12, y = 3
From Fig.8.6, the required area = area
of ABC
4
=
2
3x 2
dx
4
2
12 3 x
dx
2
4
3x 2
3x3
6
x
+

=
= 27 sq units.
4 2 12 2
Example 7 Find the area of the

region bounded by the curves x = at2
and y = 2at between the ordinate
coresponding to t = 1 and t = 2.
Solution Given that x = at2 ...(i),
y
putting the
2a
value of t in (i), we get y2 = 4ax
Putting t = 1 and t = 2 in (i), we get
x = a, and x = 4a
Required area = 2 area of ABCD =
y = 2at ...(ii) t =
4a
4a
2 ydx = 2 2 ax dx
3 4a
=8 a
( x)2
56 2
a sq units.
3
Example 8 Find the area of the region above the x-axis, included between the parabola
y2 = ax and the circle x2 + y2 = 2ax.
Solution Solving the given equations of curves, we have
x2 + ax = 2ax
or x = 0, x = a, which give
y = 0.
y=a
174 MATHEMATICS
From Fig. 8.8

area ODAB =
2ax x 2
ax dx
Let x = 2a sin2. Then dx = 4a

sin cos d and
x = 0, = 0, x = a =
Again,
2ax x 2 dx
= ( 2a sin cos ) ( 4 a sin cos ) d

0
sin 4 4
2
= a2 (1 cos 4 ) d = a
= 4a .
4
0
0
4
Further more,
a
ax dx =
2 3
2
a x 2 = a2
3 0 3
2
2 2 2
a a = a2
sq units.
4 3
4
3
Example 9 Find the area of a minor segment of the circle x2 + y2 = a2 cut off by the
Thus the required area =
line x =
a
.
2
Solution Solving the equation x2 + y2 = a2 and x =

intersection which are
a
a
, 3
and
2
2
a
3a
,
2
2 .
a
, we obtain their points of
2
Hence, from Fig. 8.9, we get

a
Required Area = 2 Area of OAB = 2
a 2 x 2 dx
a
2
x
= 2 2
a2 x2 +
a2
x
sin 1
2
a a
a2 a
3 a2
.
.
.
a
=2 2 2 4
2
2 6
`=
=
a2
6 3 3 2
12
a2
4 3 3 sq units.
12

Example 10 The area enclosed by the circle x2 + y2 = 2 is equal to
(B) 2 2 sq units
(D) 2 sq units
(A) 4 sq units
(C) 42 sq units
2 x2
Solution Correct answer is (D); since Area = 4

0
=4
x
2
2x
sin
x
2
= 2 sq. units.
0
x2 y 2
+
= 1 is equal to
a2 b2
(C) a2b
(D) ab2
Example 11 The area enclosed by the ellipse

(A) 2ab
(B) ab
b 2
a x 2 dx
a
0
Solution Correct answer is (B); since Area = 4
176 MATHEMATICS
4b x 2
a2
2
1 x
a x + sin
= ab.
=
a 2
2
a 0
Example 12 The area of the region bounded by the curve y = x2 and the line y = 16
(A)
32
`
3
(B)
256
3
(C)
64
3
(D)
128
3
16
Solution Correct answer is (B); since Area = 2 ydy

0
Fill in the blanks in each of the Examples 13 and 14.

Example 13 The area of the region bounded by the curve x = y2, y-axis and the line
y = 3 and y = 4 is _______.
37
sq. units
3
Example 14 The area of the region bounded by the curve y = x2 + x, x-axis and the
line x = 2 and x = 5 is equal to ________.
Solution
297
sq. units
6
8.3 EXERCISES
Short Answer (S.A.)
1. Find the area of the region bounded by the curves y2 = 9x, y = 3x.
2. Find the area of the region bounded by the parabola y2 = 2px, x2 = 2py.
3. Find the area of the region bounded by the curve y = x3 and y = x + 6 and x = 0.
4. Find the area of the region bounded by the curve y2 = 4x, x2 = 4y.
5. Find the area of the region included between y2 = 9x and y = x
6. Find the area of the region enclosed by the parabola x2 = y and the line y = x + 2
7. Find the area of region bounded by the line x = 2 and the parabola y2 = 8x
Solution
8. Sketch the region {(x, 0) : y =
4 x 2 } and x-axis. Find the area of the region
using integration.
9. Calcualte the area under the curve y = 2 x included between the lines x = 0
and x = 1.
10. Using integration, find the area of the region bounded by the line 2y = 5x + 7, xaxis and the lines x = 2 and x = 8.
11. Draw a rough sketch of the curve y = x 1 in the interval [1, 5]. Find the
area under the curve and between the lines x = 1 and x = 5.
12. Determine the area under the curve y =
a 2 x 2 included between the lines x
= 0 and x = a.
13. Find the area of the region bounded by y = x and y = x.
14. Find the area enclosed by the curve y = x2 and the straight lilne x + y + 2 = 0.
15. Find the area bounded by the curve y = x , x = 2y + 3 in the first quadrant
and x-axis.
Long Answer (L.A.)
16. Find the area of the region bounded by the curve y2 = 2x and x2 + y2 = 4x.
17. Find the area bounded by the curve y = sinx between x = 0 and x = 2.
18. Find the area of region bounded by the triangle whose vertices are (1, 1), (0,
5) and (3, 2), using integration.
19. Draw a rough sketch of the region {(x, y) : y2 6ax and x2 + y2 16a2}. Also find
the area of the region sketched using method of integration.
20. Compute the area bounded by the lines x + 2y = 2, y x = 1 and 2x + y = 7.
21. Find the area bounded by the lines y = 4x + 5, y = 5 x and 4y = x + 5.
22. Find the area bounded by the curve y = 2cosx and the x-axis from
x = 0 to x = 2.
23. Draw a rough sketch of the given curve y = 1 + |x +1|, x = 3, x = 3, y = 0 and
find the area of the region bounded by them, using integration.
Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Exercises
24 to 34.
24. The area of the region bounded by the y-axis, y = cosx and y = sinx, 0 x
(A)
2 sq units
is
2
(B) ( 2 + 1 ) sq units
(D) ( 2 2 1 ) sq units
(C) ( 2 1 ) sq units
25. The area of the region bounded by the curve x2 = 4y and the straight line
x = 4y 2 is
(A)
3
sq units
8
(B)
5
7
9
sq units (C) sq units (D)
sq units
8
8
8
26. The area of the region bounded by the curve y = 16 x 2 and x-axis is
(A) 8 sq units
(B) 20sq units (C) 16 sq units
(D) 256 sq units
178 MATHEMATICS
27. Area of the region in the first quadrant enclosed by the x-axis, the line y = x
and the circle x2 + y2 = 32 is
(A) 16 sq units (B) 4 sq units (C) 32 sq units (D) 24 sq units
28. Area of the region bounded by the curve y = cosx between x = 0 and x = is
(A) 2 sq units
(B) 4 sq units (C) 3 sq units (D) 1 sq units
29. The area of the region bounded by parabola y2 = x and the straight line 2y = x is
4
2
1
sq units
(B) 1 sq units (C) sq units (D) sq units
3
3
3
30. The area of the region bounded by the curve y = sinx between the ordinates
(A)
and the x-axis is

2
(A) 2 sq units
(B) 4 sq units
x = 0, x =
(C) 3 sq units
31. The area of the region bounded by the ellipse
(D) 1 sq units
x2 y 2
+
= 1 is
25 16
(A) 20 sq units (B) 202 sq units

(C) 162 sq units (D) 25 sq units
32. The area of the region bounded by the circle x2 + y2 = 1 is
(A) 2 sq units
(B) sq units (C) 3 sq units (D) 4 sq units
33. The area of the region bounded by the curve y = x + 1 and the lines x = 2 and x = 3 is
(A)
7
sq units
2
(B)
9
11
13
sq units (C)
sq units (D)
sq units
2
2
2
34. The area of the region bounded by the curve x = 2y + 3 and the y lines.
y = 1 and y = 1 is
(A) 4 sq units
(B)
3
sq units (C) 6 sq units
2
(D) 8 sq units
Chapter
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
9.1 Overview
(i)
An equation involving derivative (derivatives) of the dependent variable with

respect to independent variable (variables) is called a differential equation.
(ii)
A differential equation involving derivatives of the dependent variable with

respect to only one independent variable is called an ordinary differential
equation and a differential equation involving derivatives with respect to more
than one independent variables is called a partial differential equation.
(iii)
Order of a differential equation is the order of the highest order derivative

occurring in the differential equation.
(iv)
Degree of a differential equation is defined if it is a polynomial equation in its

derivatives.
(v)
Degree (when defined) of a differential equation is the highest power (positive

integer only) of the highest order derivative in it.
(vi)
A relation between involved variables, which satisfy the given differential

equation is called its solution. The solution which contains as many arbitrary
constants as the order of the differential equation is called the general solution
and the solution free from arbitrary constants is called particular solution.
(vii)
To form a differential equation from a given function, we differentiate the

function successively as many times as the number of arbitrary constants in the
given function and then eliminate the arbitrary constants.
(viii) The order of a differential equation representing a family of curves is same as

the number of arbitrary constants present in the equation corresponding to the
family of curves.
(ix) Variable separable method is used to solve such an equation in which variables
can be separated completely, i.e., terms containing x should remain with dx and
terms containing y should remain with dy.
180 MATHEMATICS
(x)
A function F (x, y) is said to be a homogeneous function of degree n if

F (x, y )= n F (x, y) for some non-zero constant .
(xi)
A differential equation which can be expressed in the form
dy
= F (x, y) or
dx
dx
= G (x, y), where F (x, y) and G (x, y) are homogeneous functions of degree
dy
zero, is called a homogeneous differential equation.
dy
= F (x, y), we make
dx
substitution y = vx and to solve a homogeneous differential equation of the type
(xii) To solve a homogeneous differential equation of the type
dx
= G (x, y), we make substitution x = vy.
dy
dy
+ Py = Q, where P and Q are constants or
dx
functions of x only is known as a first order linear differential equation. Solution
(xiii) A differential equation of the form
of such a differential equation is given by y (I.F.) =
( Q I.F.) dx + C, where
Pdx
I.F. (Integrating Factor) = e .
(xiv) Another form of first order linear differential equation is
dx
+ P1x = Q1, where
dy
P1 and Q1 are constants or functions of y only. Solution of such a differential

equation is given by x (I.F.) =
( Q1 I.F.) dy + C, where I.F. = e P dy .

1
9.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer (S.A.)
Example 1 Find the differential equation of the family of curves y = Ae2x + B.e2x.
Solution y = Ae2x + B.e2x
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 181
dy
= 2Ae2x 2 B.e2x and
dx
d2y
= 4Ae2x + 4Be2x
dx 2
d2y
d2y
=
4y
i.e.,
4y = 0.
dx 2
dx 2
Thus
Example 2 Find the general solution of the differential equation
dy y
=
dx x
Solution
dy
dx
=
y
x
dy
=
y
dy y
= .
dx x
dx
x
logy = logx + logc y = cx

Example 3 Given that
Solution
dy
= yex
dx
dy
= yex and x = 0, y = e. Find the value of y when x = 1.
dx
dy
y
e x dx
logy = ex + c
Substituting x = 0 and y = e,we get loge = e0 + c, i.e., c = 0 ( loge = 1)

Therefore, log y = ex.
Now, substituting x = 1 in the above, we get log y = e y = ee.
Example 4 Solve the differential equation
Solution The equation is of the type
dy
y
+ = x2.
dx
x
dy
+ Py = Q , which is a linear differential
dx
equation.
1
Now I.F. =
x dx = e
logx
= x.
Therefore, solution of the given differential equation is
182 MATHEMATICS
x x 2 dx , i.e. yx =
y.x =
x3
4
Hence y =
x4
4
c
.
x
Example 5 Find the differential equation of the family of lines through the origin.
Solution Let y = mx be the family of lines through origin. Therefore,
dy
=m
dx
dy
dy
. x or x
y = 0.
dx
dx
Example 6 Find the differential equation of all non-horizontal lines in a plane.
Solution The general equation of all non-horizontal lines in a plane is
ax + by = c, where a 0.
Eliminating m, we get y =
Therefore, a
dx
b = 0.
dy
Again, differentiating both sides w.r.t. y, we get

a
d2x
d 2x
=
0
= 0.
dy 2
dy 2
Example 7 Find the equation of a curve whose tangent at any point on it, different
from origin, has slope y
Solution Given
dy
y
dy
dx
1
y
.
x
y
x
= y 1
1
x
1
dx
x
Integrating both sides, we get

logy = x + logx + c
log
y
=x+c
x
y
= ex + c = ex.ec
x
y
= k . ex
x
y = kx . ex.
Long Answer (L.A.)
Example 8 Find the equation of a curve passing through the point (1, 1) if the
perpendicular distance of the origin from the normal at any point P(x, y) of the curve
is equal to the distance of P from the x axis.
dx
Solution Let the equation of normal at P(x, y) be Y y = dy ( X x ) ,i.e.,
Y+ X
dx
dy
dx
dy
=0
...(1)
Therefore, the length of perpendicular from origin to (1) is

y x
1
dx
dy
dx
dy
...(2)
Also distance between P and x-axis is |y|. Thus, we get

y x
dx
dy
dx
dy
= |y|
dx
2
y+x = y 1
dy
or
dx
dy
2 xy
dx
= 2 2
y x
dy
dx dx 2
x y2
dy dy
2 xy
dx
0
dy
184 MATHEMATICS
dx
= 0 dx = 0
dy
Case I:
Integrating both sides, we get x = k, Substituting x = 1, we get k = 1.

Therefore, x = 1 is the equation of curve (not possible, so rejected).
2x y
dx
= 2 2
y x
dy
Case II:
v x
y 2 x2
. Substituting y = vx, we get
2 xy
dy
dx
dv v 2 x 2 x 2
dx
2vx 2
(1 + v 2 )
2v
x.
dv v 2 1
v
2v
dx
2v
dv
1 v2
dx
x

log (1 + v2) = logx + logc
log (1 + v2) (x) = log c (1 + v2) x = c
x2 + y2 = cx. Substituting x = 1,
Therefore,
y = 1,
we get c = 2.
x2 + y2 2x = 0 is the required equation.
Example 9 Find the equation of a curve passing through 1,
tangent to the curve at any point P (x, y) is
if the slope of the
y
y
cos 2 .
x
x
Solution According to the given condition
dy y
y
= cos 2
dx x
x
... (i)
This is a homogeneous differential equation. Substituting y = vx, we get

v+x
dv
= v cos2v
dx
dv
= cos2v
dx
sec2v dv =
tan
dx
x
tan v = logx + c
y
+ log x = c
x
Substituting x = 1, y =
y
x
tan
...(ii)
, we get. c = 1. Thus, we get
+ log x = 1, which is the required equation.
2
Example 10 Solve x
dy
y
xy = 1 + cos , x 0 and x = 1, y =
dx
2
x
Solution Given equation can be written as
x2
dy
y
xy = 2cos2 , x 0.
dx
2x
dy
xy
dx
y
2cos 2
2x
x2
y
2x
sec 2
2
x2
dy
xy
dx
Dividing both sides by x3 , we get
y
sec 2 x dy y
1
2 x dx
= 3
2
2
x
x
tan
y
2x
1
2 x2
k.
d
y
tan
dx
2x
1
x3
186 MATHEMATICS
Substituting x = 1, y =
k=
, we get
y
3
, therefore, tan
2x
2
1
2 x2
3
is the required solution.
2
Example 11 State the type of the differential equation for the equation.
xdy ydx =
x2
y 2 dx and solve it.
x2
Solution Given equation can be written as xdy =
x2
dy
dx
y2
x
y2
y dx , i.e.,
... (1)
Clearly RHS of (1) is a homogeneous function of degree zero. Therefore, the given
equation is a homogeneous differential equation. Substituting y = vx, we get from (1)
v x
dv
dx
dv
dx
x2 v2 x2
x
1 v2
vx
dv
1 v
i.e. v x
dv
dx
1 v2 v
dx
x
... (2)
Integrating both sides of (2), we get

log (v + 1 v 2 ) = logx + logc v + 1 v 2 = cx
y
y2
+ 1 2 = cx
x
x
y+
x2
y 2 = cx2

2
3
dy d 2 y
Example 12 The degree of the differential equation 1 +

is
=
dx dx 2
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
Solution The correct answer is (B).

Example 13 The degree of the differential equation
2
d2y
d2y
dy
2
+
3
=
x
log
2 is

dx 2
dx
dx
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) not defined
Solution Correct answer is (D). The given differential equation is not a polynomial
equation in terms of its derivatives, so its degree is not defined.
2
dy 2 d 2 y
Example 14 The order and degree of the differential equation 1+ = 2
dx dx
respectively, are
(A) 1, 2
(B) 2, 2
(C) 2, 1
(D) 4, 2
Solution Correct answer is (C).

Example 15 The order of the differential equation of all circles of given radius a is:
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
Solution Correct answer is (B). Let the equation of given family be

(x h)2 + (y k)2 = a2 . It has two orbitrary constants h and k. Threrefore, the order of
the given differential equation will be 2.
Example 16 The solution of the differential equation 2 x .
(A) straight lines (B) circles
dy
y = 3 represents a family of
dx
(C) parabolas
(D) ellipses
188 MATHEMATICS
Solution Correct answer is (C). Given equation can be written as
2dy dx
y 3 x 2log (y + 3) = logx + logc
(y + 3)2 = cx which represents the family of parabolas
Example 17 The integrating factor of the differential equation
dy
(x log x) + y = 2logx is
dx
(A) ex
(B) log x
(C) log (log x)
(D) x
dy
Solution Correct answer is (B). Given equation can be written as dx
y
2
x log x x .
Therefore,
dx
I.F. = x log x
= elog (logx)
e
= log x.
Example 18 A solution of the differential equation

(A) y = 2
(B) y = 2x
dy
dx
dy
dx
0 is
(D) y = 2x2 4
(C) y = 2x 4
Solution Correct answer is (C).

Example 19 Which of the following is not a homogeneous function of x and y.
(A) x2 + 2xy
(B) 2x y
2
(C) cos
y
x
y
x
(D) sinx cosy
Solution Correct answer is (D).
dx dy
Example 20 Solution of the differential equation x + y = 0 is
1 1
(A) x + y = c
(B) logx . logy = c
(C) xy = c
(D) x + y = c
Solution Correct answer is (C). From the given equation, we get logx + logy = logc
giving xy = c.
Example 21 The solution of the differential equation x
(A) y =
x2 + c
4 x2
(B) y =
Solution Correct answer is (D). I.F. = e

is y . x2 =
2
x .xdx =
2
dx
x
x2
+c
4
dy
2 y x 2 is
dx
(C) y =
e2log x elog x
x4 + c
x4 + c
y
=
(D)
x2
4 x2
x 2 . Therefore, the solution
x4 c
x4
+ k , i.e., y =
.
4 x2
4
Example 22 Fill in the blanks of the following:

(i)
Order of the differential equation representing the family of parabolas

y2 = 4ax is __________ .
2
(ii)
3
2
dy d y
+
The degree of the differential equation 2 = 0 is ________ .
dx dx
(iii)
The number of arbitrary constants in a particular solution of the differential

equation tan x dx + tan y dy = 0 is __________ .
(iv)
F (x, y) =
(v)
x2 + y 2 + y
is a homogeneous function of degree__________ .
x
An appropriate substitution to solve the differential equation
x 2 log
dx
=
dy
x
y
xy log
x2
x
y
is__________ .
dy
y = sinx is __________ .
dx
(vi)
Integrating factor of the differential equation x
(vii)
The general solution of the differential equation
dy
= e x y is __________ .
dx
190 MATHEMATICS
(viii)
(ix)
dy y
+ =1 is __________ .
dx x
The differential equation representing the family of curves y = A sinx + B
cosx is __________ .
2 x
(x)
y dx
1( x 0) when written in the form dy + Py = Q , then
x dy
dx
P = __________ .
Solution
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
One; a is the only arbitrary constant.

Two; since the degree of the highest order derivative is two.
Zero; any particular solution of a differential equation has no arbitrary constant.
Zero.
x = vy.
(vi)
1
dy y sin x
=
; given differential equation can be written as
and therefore
dx x
x
x
(vii)
1
.
x
ey = ex + c from given equation, we have eydy = exdx.
(viii)
xy =
(ix)
d2y
+ y = 0; Differentiating the given function w.r.t. x successively, we get
dx 2
I.F. = e
x2
2
1
dx
x
= elogx =
c ; I.F. =
dy
= Acosx Bsinx
dx
= elogx = x and the solution is y . x = x .1 dx =
and
d2y
= Asinx Bcosx
dx 2
d2y
+ y = 0 is the differential equation.
dx 2
(x)
1
dx
x
1
x
; the given equation can be written as
x2
+C.
2
dy
e 2 x
=
dx
x
y
x
i.e.
y
dy
e 2 x
+
=
x
dx
x
dy
+ Py = Q.
dx
Example 23 State whether the following statements are True or False.
(i)
Order of the differential equation representing the family of ellipses having
centre at origin and foci on x-axis is two.
This is a differential equation of the type
(ii)
(iii)
Degree of the differential equation 1+
dy
d2y
is not defined.
2 =x+
dx
dx
dy
dy
y 5 is a differential equation of the type
+ Py = Q but it can be solved
dx
dx
using variable separable method also.
y cos
y
+ x
x
y is not a homogeneous function.
x cos
x
(iv)
F(x, y) =
(v)
x2 y 2
F(x, y) =
is a homogeneous function of degree 1.
x y
dy
dx
y cos x is ex.
(vi)
Integrating factor of the differential equation
(vii)
The general solution of the differential equation x(1 + y2)dx + y (1 + x2)dy = 0

is (1 + x2) (1 + y2) = k.
(viii)
dy
+ y sec x = tanx is
dx
y (secx tanx) = secx tanx + x + k.

(ix)
x + y = tan1y is a solution of the differential equation y2
dy
y2 1 0
dx
192 MATHEMATICS
(x)
y = x is a particular solution of the differential equation
d 2 y 2 dy
x
dx
dx 2
xy x .
Solution
(i)
True, since the equation representing the given family is
x2
a2
y2
1 , which
b2
has two arbitrary constants.

(ii)
True, because it is not a polynomial equation in its derivatives.
(iii)
True
(iv)
True, because f ( x, y) = f (x, y).
(v)
True, because f ( x, y) = 1 f (x, y).
(vi)
False, because I.F = e
(vii)
True, because given equation can be written as
1dx
e x .
2x
2y
dx
dy
2
1 x
1 y2
(viii)
log (1 + x2) = log (1 + y2) + log k
(1 + x2) (1 + y2) = k
False, since I.F. = e
sec xdx
elog(sec x
tan x )
y (secx + tanx) = (sec x tan x) tan xdx =
= secx + tanx, the solution is,
( sec x tan x + sec x 1) dx

2
secx + tanx x +k
(ix)
True, x + y = tan1y 1
dy
dx
1 dy
dy
dx 1 y 2 dx
dy
1 =1 , i.e.,
2
dx
1+ y
(1 y 2 )
which satisfies the given equation.
y2
(x)
False, because y = x does not satisfy the given differential equation.
9.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
1.
2.
3.
dy
2y x .
dx
Find the differential equation of all non vertical lines in a plane.
Find the solution of
dy
e 2 y and y = 0 when x = 5.
dx
Find the value of x when y = 3.
Given that
4.
Solve the differential equation (x2 1)
5.
Solve the differential equation
6.
Find the general solution of
7.
8.
Solve: ydx xdy = x2ydx.
9.
dy
2 xy y
dx
dy
ay emx
dx
dy
1 ex
dx
of y
dy
= y.
dx
2 sin x dy
= cosx and y (0) = 1, then find the value
1 y
dx
12. If y(t) is a solution of (1 + t)

y (1) =
dy
= 1 + x + y2 + xy2, when y = 0, x = 0.
dx
10. Find the general solution of (x + 2y3)
11. If y(x) is a solution of
1
dy
+ 2xy = 2
.
x 1
dx
1
.
2
dy
ty = 1 and y (0) = 1, then show that
dt
194 MATHEMATICS
13. Form the differential equation having y = (sin1x)2 + Acos1x + B, where A and B
are arbitrary constants, as its general solution.
14. Form the differential equation of all circles which pass through origin and whose
centres lie on y-axis.
15. Find the equation of a curve passing through origin and satisfying the differential
2
equation (1 x )
16. Solve : x2
dy
2 xy 4 x 2 .
dx
dy
= x2 + xy + y2.
dx
17. Find the general solution of the differential equation (1 + y2) + (x etan1y)
dy
= 0.
dx
18. Find the general solution of y2dx + (x2 xy + y2) dy = 0.

19. Solve : (x + y) (dx dy) = dx + dy.[Hint: Substitute x + y = z after seperating dx
and dy]
dy
= 0, given that y (1) = 2.
dx
21. Solve the differential equation dy = cosx (2 y cosecx) dx given that y = 2 when
20. Solve : 2 (y + 3) xy
.
2
22. Form the differential equation by eliminating A and B in Ax2 + By2 = 1.
23. Solve the differential equation (1 + y2) tan1x dx + 2y (1 + x2) dy = 0.
24. Find the differential equation of system of concentric circles with centre (1, 2).
x=
Long Answer (L.A.)
d
( xy ) = x (sinx + logx)
dx
26. Find the general solution of (1 + tany) (dx dy) + 2xdy = 0.
25. Solve : y +
27. Solve :
dy
= cos(x + y) + sin (x + y).[Hint: Substitute x + y = z]
dx
dy
3 y sin 2 x .
dx
29. Find the equation of a curve passing through (2, 1) if the slope of the tangent to
28. Find the general solution of
x2 y2
the curve at any point (x, y) is
.
2 xy
30. Find the equation of the curve through the point (1, 0) if the slope of the tangent
to the curve at any point (x, y) is
y 1
.
x2 x
31. Find the equation of a curve passing through origin if the slope of the tangent to
the curve at any point (x, y) is equal to the square of the difference of the abcissa
and ordinate of the point.
32. Find the equation of a curve passing through the point (1, 1). If the tangent
drawn at any point P (x, y) on the curve meets the co-ordinate axes at A and B
such that P is the mid-point of AB.
dy
y (log y log x + 1)
dx
Objective Type
Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Exercises from
34 to 75 (M.C.Q)
33. Solve : x
d2y
dx 2
34. The degree of the differential equation

(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
35. The degree of the differential equation 1
(A) 4
(B)
3
2
dy
dx
x sin
(D) not defined

dy
dx
3
2 2
d2y
is
dx 2
(C) not defined
d2y
36. The order and degree of the differential equation
dx 2
respectively, are
(A) 2 and not defined
(B) 2 and 2
(C) 2 and 3
37. If y = ex (Acosx + Bsinx), then y is a solution of
d2y
dy
2
0
(A)
2
dx
dx
(C)
d2y
dy
2
2y 0
2
dx
dx
dy
is:
dx
d2y
dy
2 + 2y = 0
(B)
2
dx
dx
(D)
d2y
+ 2y =0
dx 2
(D) 2
dy
dx
1
4
+ x5
(D) 3 and 3
0,
196 MATHEMATICS
38. The differential equation for y = Acos x + Bsin x, where A and B are arbitrary
constants is
d2y
(A)
dx 2
d2y
(B)
dx 2
y 0
y 0
d2y
d2y
y
0
y 0
(C)
(D)
dx 2
dx 2
39. Solution of differential equation xdy ydx = 0 represents :
(A) a rectangular hyperbola
(B) parabola whose vertex is at origin
(C) straight line passing through origin
(D) a circle whose centre is at origin
40. Integrating factor of the differential equation cosx
(A) cosx
(B) tanx
(C) secx
dy
+ ysinx = 1 is :
dx
(D) sinx
41. Solution of the differential equation tany sec2x dx + tanx sec2ydy = 0 is :

(A) tanx + tany = k
(B) tanx tany = k
tan x
k
tan y
(D) tanx . tany = k
(C)
42. Family y = Ax + A3 of curves is represented by the differential equation of degree

:
(A) 1
(B) 2
43. Integrating factor of

(A) x
44. Solution of
(A) xy
(C) 3
(D) 4
xdy
y = x4 3x is :
dx
(B) logx
(C)
1
x
dy
y 1 , y (0) = 1 is given by
dx
= ex
(B) xy = ex (C) xy
(D) x
= 1 (D) y = 2 ex 1
dy y +1
45. The number of solutions of dx = x 1 when y (1) = 2 is :
(A) none
(B) one
(C) two
(D) infinite
46. Which of the following is a second order differential equation?

(A) (y)2 + x = y2
(B) yy + y = sinx
(C) y + (y)2 + y = 0
(D) y = y2
47. Integrating factor of the differential equation (1 x2)
x
1 x2
dy
xy =1 is
dx
1
log (1 x2)
2
48. tan1 x + tan1 y = c is the general solution of the differential equation:
(A) x
(B)
(C) 1 x 2
(D)
dy 1 + y 2
=
(A)
dx 1 + x 2
dy 1 + x 2
=
(B)
dx 1 + y 2
(C) (1 + x2) dy + (1 + y2) dx = 0
(D) (1 + x2) dx + (1 + y2) dy = 0
dy
+ x = c represents :
dx
(A) Family of hyperbolas
(B) Family of parabolas
(C) Family of ellipses
(D) Family of circles
50. The general solution of ex cosy dx ex siny dy = 0 is :
(A) ex cosy = k
(B) ex siny = k
49. The differential equation y
(C) ex = k cosy
(D) ex = k siny
3
d 2 y dy
+ + 6 y 5 = 0 is :
51. The degree of the differential equation
2
dx
dx
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 5
dy
+ y = e x , y (0) = 0 is :
dx
(A) y = ex (x 1)
(B) y = xex
x
(C) y = xe + 1
(D) y = (x + 1)ex
52. The solution of
198 MATHEMATICS
dy
y tan x sec x 0 is:
dx
(B) secx
(D) esecx
53. Integrating factor of the differential equation

(A) cosx
(C) ecosx
54. The solution of the differential equation
(A) y = tan1x
(C) x = tan1y
dy 1 y 2
is:
dx 1 x 2
(B) y x = k (1 + xy)
(D) tan (xy) = k
55. The integrating factor of the differential equation
(A)
x
ex
(B)
dy
1+ y
+y =
is:
dx
x
ex
x
(C) xex
(D) ex
56. y = aemx + bemx satisfies which of the following differential equation?
(A)
dy
my 0
dx
(B)
dy
my 0
dx
(C)
d2y
m2 y 0
dx 2
(D)
d2y
m2 y 0
dx 2
57. The solution of the differential equation cosx siny dx + sinx cosy dy = 0 is :
(A)
sin x
c
sin y
(B) sinx siny = c
(C) sinx + siny = c

58. The solution of x
ex
(A) y =
x
x
k
x
(C) y = xe + k
(D) cosx cosy = c
dy
+ y = ex is:
dx
(B) y = xex + cx
ey
(D) x =
y
k
y
59. The differential equation of the family of curves x2 + y2 2ay = 0, where a is

arbitrary constant, is:
(A) (x2 y2)
dy
= 2xy
dx
(C) 2 (x2 y2)
(B) 2 (x2 + y2)
dy
= xy
dx
(D) (x2 + y2)
dy
= xy
dx
dy
= 2xy
dx
60. Family y = Ax + A3 of curves will correspond to a differential equation of order

(A) 3
(B) 2
61. The general solution of

(A) e x
(C) 1
(D) not defined
dy
2
= 2x e x y is :
dx
2
(B) ey + e x = c
=c
2
(C) ey = e x + c
(D) e x
+y
=c
62. The curve for which the slope of the tangent at any point is equal to the ratio of
the abcissa to the ordinate of the point is :
(A) an ellipse
(B) parabola
(C) circle
(D) rectangular hyperbola

x2
dy
63. The general solution of the differential equation
e 2 + xy is :
dx
(A) y ce
x2
2
x2
(B) y ce 2
x2
x2
(C) y = ( x + c) e 2
(D) y (c x)e 2
64. The solution of the equation (2y 1) dx (2x + 3)dy = 0 is :
2x 1
(A) 2 y 3 k
2 y +1
(B) 2 x 3 = k
2x 3
(C) 2 y 1 k
2x 1
(D) 2 y 1 k
200 MATHEMATICS
65. The differential equation for which y = acosx + bsinx is a solution, is :
d2y
(A)
+y=0
dx 2
d2y
(B)
y=0
dx 2
d2y
+ (a + b) y = 0
(C)
dx 2
d2y
(D)
+ (a b) y = 0
dx 2
dy
+ y = ex, y (0) = 0 is :
dx
(B) y = xex
(A) y = ex (x 1)
66. The solution of
(C) y = xex + 1
(D) y = xex
67. The order and degree of the differential equation
d3y
dx3
d2y
dy
3 2 2
dx
dx
(A) 1, 4
(B) 3, 4
y 4 are :
(C) 2, 4
(D) 3, 2
dy 2 d 2 y
68. The order and degree of the differential equation 1 + dx = dx 2 are :

3
(B) 2, 3
(C) 2, 1
(D) 3, 4
2
69. The differential equation of the family of curves y2 = 4a (x + a) is :
(A) 2,
2
(A) y = 4
d2y
(C) y 2
dx
dy
dy
x+
dx
dx
dy
dx
(B) 2 y
dy
4a
dx
2
dy
dy
+ y y
(D) 2 x
dx
dx
70. Which of the following is the general solution of

(A) y = (Ax + B)ex
(C) y = Aex + Bex
d2y
dy
2
+ y = 0?
2
dx
dx
(B) y = (Ax + B)ex

(D) y = Acosx + Bsinx
dy
+ y tan x = sec x is :
dx
(A) y secx = tanx + c
(B) y tanx = secx + c
71. General solution of
(C) tanx = y tanx + c
(D) x secx = tany + c
dy y
sin x is :
dx x
(B) x (y cosx) = sinx + c
(D) x (y + cosx) = cosx + c
72. Solution of the differential equation

(A) x (y + cosx) = sinx + c
(C) xy cosx = sinx + c
73. The general solution of the differential equation (ex + 1) ydy = (y + 1) exdx is:
(A) (y + 1) = k (ex + 1)
(B) y + 1 = ex + 1 + k
ex 1
y
log
(D)
y 1
(C) y = log {k (y + 1) (e + 1)}
74. The solution of the differential equation
dy
= exy + x2 ey is :
dx
(A) y = exy x2 ey + c
(C) ex + ey =
x3
+c
3
(B) ey ex =
x3
+c
3
(D) ex ey =
x3
+c
3
dy 2 xy
75. The solution of the differential equation dx
1 x2
1
is :
(1 x 2 )2
y
= c + tan1x
1 x2
(A) y (1 + x2) = c + tan1x
(B)
(C) y log (1 + x2) = c + tan1x
(D) y (1 + x2) = c + sin1x
76. Fill in the blanks of the following (i to xi)

dy
(i)
d 2 y dx
0 is _________.
e
The degree of the differential equation
dx 2
(ii)
The degree of the differential equation 1
dy
dx
x is _________.
202 MATHEMATICS
(iii)
The number of arbitrary constants in the general solution of a differential

equation of order three is _________.
(iv)
dy
dx
y
x log x
1
is an equation of the type _________.
x
(v)
dx
General solution of the differential equation of the type dy + P1 x = Q1
is given by _________.
77.
xdy
2 y x 2 is _________.
dx
(vi)
The solution of the differential equation
(vii)
The solution of (1 + x2)
(viii)
The solution of the differential equation ydx + (x + xy)dy = 0 is ______.
(ix)
General solution of
(x)
The solution of differential equation coty dx = xdy is _________.
(xi)
The integrating factor of
dy
+2xy 4x2 = 0 is _________.
dx
dy
dx
y = sinx is _________.
dy
1 y
y
is _________.
dx
x
State True or False for the following:

(i)
dx
Integrating factor of the differential of the form dy + p1 x = Q1 is given
by e p1dy .
(ii)
dx
Solution of the differential equation of the type dy + p1 x = Q1 is given
by x.I.F. = (I.F) Q1dy .
(iii)
Correct substitution for the solution of the differential equation of the
dy
f ( x, y ) , where f (x, y) is a homogeneous function of zero
dx
degree is y = vx.
type
(iv)
Correct substitution for the solution of the differential equation of the

type
dx
g ( x, y ) where g (x, y) is a homogeneous function of the
dy
degree zero is x = vy.

(v)
Number of arbitrary constants in the particular solution of a differential

equation of order two is two.
(vi)
The differential equation representing the family of circles

x2 + (y a)2 = a2 will be of order two.
y
x
1
3
(vii)
dy
The solution of
dx
(viii)
Differential equation representing the family of curves

y = ex (Acosx + Bsinx) is
is y 3 x 3 = c.
d2y
dy
2
2y 0
2
dx
dx
dy x + 2 y
=
is x + y = kx2.
dx
x
(ix)
The solution of the differential equation
(x)
Solution of
(xi)
The differential equation of all non horizontal lines in a plane is

d2x
=0 .
dy 2
xdy
dx
y x tan
y
y
is sin
x
x
cx
Chapter
10
VECTOR ALGEBRA
10.1 Overview
10.1.1 A quantity that has magnitude as well as direction is called a vector.
a
10.1.2 The unit vector in the direction of a is given by | a | and is represented by a .
10.1.3 Position vector of a point P (x, y, z) is given as OP = x i + y j+ z k and its

magnitude as | OP | = x 2 + y 2 + z 2 , where O is the origin.
10.1.4 The scalar components of a vector are its direction ratios, and represent its
projections along the respective axes.
10.1.5 The magnitude r, direction ratios (a, b, c) and direction cosines (l, m, n) of any
vector are related as:
a
b
c
l = , m = , n= .
r
r
r
10.1.6 The sum of the vectors representing the three sides of a triangle taken in order is 0
10.1.7 The triangle law of vector addition states that If two vectors are represented
by two sides of a triangle taken in order, then their sum or resultant is given by the third
side taken in opposite order.
10.1.8 Scalar multiplication
If a is a given vector and a scalar, then a is a vector whose magnitude is | a | = ||
| a |. The direction of a is same as that of a if is positive and, opposite to that of a if
is negative.
VECTOR ALGEBRA
205
10.1.9 Vector joining two points

If P1 (x1, y1,z1) and P2 (x2, y2,z2) are any two points, then
P1P2 = ( x2 x1 ) i + ( y2 y1 ) j + ( z2 z1 ) k
| P1P2 | = ( x2 x1 ) 2 + ( y2 y1 ) 2 + ( z2 z1 ) 2
10.1.10 Section formula

The position vector of a point R dividing the line segment joining the points P and Q
whose position vectors are a and b
(i)
in the ratio m : n internally, is given by
na mb
m n
(ii)
in the ratio m : n externally, is given by
mb na
mn
a. b
10.1.11 Projection of a along b is
and the Projection vector of a along b
|b|
a. b
is
|b |
b .
10.1.12 Scalar or dot product

The scalar or dot product of two given vectors a and b having an angle between
them is defined as
a . b = | a | | b | cos
10.1.13 Vector or cross product

The cross product of two vectors a and b having angle between them is given as
a b = | a | | b | sin n ,
206
MATHEMATICS
where n is a unit vector perpendicular to the plane containing a and b and a , b , n

form a right handed system.
10.1.14 If a = a1 i + a2 j + a3 k and b = b1 i + b2 j + b3 k are two vectors and is
any scalar, then
a + b = (a1 + b1 ) i + (a2 + b2 ) j + (a3 + b3 ) k
a = ( a1 ) i + ( a2 ) j + ( a3 ) k
a . b = a1 b1+ a2 b2 + a3 b3
i
a
a b = 1
a2
j
b1
b2
k
c1
= (b1c2 b2c1) i + (a2c1 c1c2) j + (a1bb a2b1) k
c2
Angle between two vectors a and b is given by
a1 b1 + a2 b2 + a3b3
a. b
cos = | | | | = 2
a1 + a22 + a32 b12 + b22 + b32
a b
10.2 Solved Examples

Short Answer (S.A.)
Example 1 Find the unit vector in the direction of the sum of the vectors
a = 2 i j + 2 k and b = i + j + 3 k .
Solution Let c denote the sum of a and b . We have
c = (2 i j + 2 k) + (i + j + 3 k) = i + 5 k
Now | c | = 12 + 52 = 26 .
VECTOR ALGEBRA
Thus, the required unit vector is c =
c
c
( i + 5k ) =
26
1
26
i+
5
26
207
k.
Example 2 Find a vector of magnitude 11 in the direction opposite to that of PQ ,

where P and Q are the points (1, 3, 2) and (1, 0, 8), respetively.
Solution The vector with initial point P (1, 3, 2) and terminal point Q (1, 0, 8) is given by
PQ = ( 1 1) i + (0 3) j + (8 2) k = 2 i 3 j + 6 k
Thus
Q P = P Q = 2 i + 3 j 6 k
| QP | = 22 + 32 + (6) 2 = 4 + 9 + 36 = 49 = 7
Therefore, unit vector in the direction of Q P is given by
QP
Q P
|Q P|
2 i
6 k
3 j
7
Hence, the required vector of magnitude 11 in direction of Q P is

11 QP = 11
2 i 3 j 6 k
7
22 33 66
i+
j k .
7
7
7
Example 3 Find the position vector of a point R which divides the line joining the two
points P and Q with position vectors O P 2 a
in the ratio 1:2, (i) internally and (ii) externally.
b and O Q
a 2 b , respectively,
Solution (i) The position vector of the point R dividing the join of P and Q internally in
the ratio 1:2 is given by
OR
2( 2 a
b ) 1( a 2 b )
1 2
5a
.
3
208
(ii)
MATHEMATICS
The position vector of the point R dividing the join of P and Q in the ratio
1 : 2 externally is given by
O R =
2(2a + b ) 1( a 2 b)
= 3a + 4 b .
2 1
Example 4 If the points (1, 1, 2), (2, m, 5) and (3,11, 6) are collinear, find the value of m.
Solution Let the given points be A (1, 1, 2), B (2, m, 5) and C (3, 11, 6). Then
A B = (2 + 1) i + (m + 1) j + (5 2) k = 3 i + (m + 1) j + 3k
A C = (3 + 1) i + (11 + 1) j + (6 2) k
and
= 4 i + 12 j + 4k .
Since A, B, C, are collinear, we have A B = A C , i.e.,

( 3 i (m 1) j 3k) (4i +12 j + 4k)
Therefore
3 = 4 and m + 1 = 12
m = 8.
Example 5 Find a vector r of magnitude 3 2 units which makes an angle of and

4
with y and z - axes, respectively.

2
1
Solution Here m = cos =
4
2
Therefore,
l2 + m2 + n2 = 1
l2 +
1
+0 =1
2
l =
1
2
and n = cos
= 0.
2
gives
VECTOR ALGEBRA
209
Hence, the required vector r = 3 2 (l i + m j + n k) is given by

r =3 2 (
1
i
2
1
j 0 k ) = r = 3 i + 3 j .
2
Example 6 If a = 2 i j + k, b = i + j 2k and c = i + 3j k , find such that

a is perpendicular to
Solution
b c.
We have
b + c = ( i + j 2 k ) + ( i + 3 j k )
= ( + 1) i + ( + 3 ) j (2 + 1) k
Since a ( b + c ), a .( b + c ) = 0
(2 i j + k ) . [( + 1) i + ( + 3) j (2 + 1) k ] = 0
2 ( + 1) ( + 3) (2 + 1) = 0
= 2.
Example 7 Find all vectors of magnitude 10 3 that are perpendicular to the plane
of i 2 j k and i 3 j 4k .
Solution Let a = i 2 j k and b =
a b
i 3 j 4k . Then
i j k
1 2 1 i(8 3) j (4 1) k (3 2)
= 5 i 5 j + 5 k
1 3 4
a b
(5)2 ( 5)2 (5)2
3(5) 2
5 3.
210
MATHEMATICS
Therefore, unit vector perpendicular to the plane of a and b is given by

a b
a b
5i 5 j 5k
5 3
Hence, vectors of magnitude of 10 3 that are perpendicular to plane of a and b

are
10 3
5i 5 j 5k
, i.e.,
5 3
10(i j k) .
Long Answer (L.A.)

Example 8 Using vectors, prove that cos (A B) = cosA cosB + sinA sinB.
Solution Let OP and OQ be unit vectors making angles A and B, respectively, with
positive direction of x-axis. Then QOP = A B [Fig. 10.1]
We know OP = OM + MP i cos A + j sin A and OQ = ON + NQ i cos B + j sin B.
By definition OP. OQ
OP OQ cos A-B
= cos (A B)
... (1)
In terms of components, we have

OP. OQ = (i cos A
j sin A).(i cos B j sin B)
= cosA cosB + sinA sinB

From (1) and (2), we get
cos (A B) = cosA cosB + sinA sinB.
... (2)
OP 1 OQ
VECTOR ALGEBRA
211
sin A sin B sin C

, where a, b, c represent the
a
b
c
magnitudes of the sides opposite to vertices A, B, C, respectively.
Example 9 Prove that in a ABC,
Solution Let the three sides of the triangle BC, CA and AB be represented by
a , b and c , respectively [Fig. 10.2].
We have
a b c 0 . i.e., a b
which pre cross multiplying by a , and

post cross multiplying by b , gives
a b = c a
and
a b b c
respectively. Therefore,
a b b c c a
a b
a b sin ( C) b c sin ( A) c a sin ( B)
b c
c a
ab sin C = bc sinA = ca sinB
Dividing by abc, we get
sin C sin A sin B

sin A sin B sin C
i.e.
c
a
b
a
b
c

Example 10 The magnitude of the vector 6i 2 j 3k is
212
(A)
MATHEMATICS
(B)
(C)
12
(D)

Example 11 The position vector of the point which divides the join of points with
position vectors a b and 2a b in the ratio 1 : 2 is
(A)
3a 2b
3
(B)
(C)
5a b
4a b
(D)
3
3
Solution (D) is the correct answer. Applying section formula the position vector of
the required point is
2(a b ) 1(2a b ) 4a b
2 1
3
Example 12 The vector with initial point P (2, 3, 5) and terminal point Q(3, 4, 7) is
(A)
(C)
i j 2k
i j 2k
(B)
5i 7 j 12k
(D)
None of these

Example 13 The angle between the vectors i j and j k is
(A)
(B)
2
3
(C)
(D)
5
6
a .b
Solution (B) is the correct answer. Apply the formula cos = a . b .
Example 14 The value of for which the two vectors 2i j 2k and 3i
are perpendicular is
(A)
2
(B)
4
(C)
6
(D)
8
j k
VECTOR ALGEBRA
213
Example 15 The area of the parallelogram whose adjacent sides are i k and
2i j k is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Solution (B) is the correct answer. Area of the parallelogram whose adjacent sides
are a and b is a b .
Example 16 If a = 8, b
(A)
(B)
6 3
3 and a b
8 3
12 , then value of a . b is
(C)
12 3
(D)
Solution (C) is the correct answer. Using the formula a b
None of these
a . b |sin|, we get
.
6
Therefore, a .b = a . b cos
=83
3
= 12 3 .
2
Example 17 The 2 vectors j + k and 3i j + 4k represents the two sides AB and

AC, respectively of a ABC. The length of the median through A is
(A)
34
2
(B)
48
2
(C)
18
(D)
None of these
Solution (A) is the correct answer. Median AD is given by

AD =
1
34
3i + j + 5k =
2
2
Example 18 The projection of vector a 2i
j k along b i 2 j 2k is
214
MATHEMATICS
2
3
(A)
(B)
1
3
(C)
(D)
Solution (A) is the correct answer. Projection of a vector a on b is
a .b
b
j k).(i 2 j 2k)
2
= .
1 4 4
3
(2i
Example 19 If a and b are unit vectors, then what is the angle between a and b for
3a b to be a unit vector?
(A)
30
(B)
45
(C)
60
(D)
90
Solution (A) is the correct answer. We have

( 3a b )2 3a 2 b 2 2 3 a.b
a .b =
3
3
cos =
2
2
= 30.
Example 20 The unit vector perpendicular to the vectors i j and i j forming a

right handed system is
(A)
(B)
(C)
i j
2
(D)
i j
Solution (A) is the correct answer. Required unit vector is i j

Example 21 If a
(A)
[0, 6]
i j
2
i j
2k
i j = 2 k .
3 and 1 k 2 , then ka lies in the interval

(B)
[ 3, 6]
(C)
[ 3, 6] (D)
[1, 2]
VECTOR ALGEBRA
215
Solution (A) is the correct answer. The smallest value of ka will exist at numerically
smallest value of k, i.e., at k = 0, which gives ka
k a
The numerically greatest value of k is 2 at which ka
0 3 0
6.
10.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
1.
Find the unit vector in the direction of sum of vectors a 2i j k and b 2 j k .
2.
If a i j 2k and b 2i
(i) 6 b
3.
(ii)
j 2k , find the unit vector in the direction of

2a b
Find a unit vector in the direction of PQ , where P and Q have co-ordinates

(5, 0, 8) and (3, 3, 2), respectively.
4.
If a and b are the position vectors of A and B, respectively, find the position
vector of a point C in BA produced such that BC = 1.5 BA.
5.
Using vectors, find the value of k such that the points (k, 10, 3), (1, 1, 3) and
(3, 5, 3) are collinear.
6.
A vector r is inclined at equal angles to the three axes. If the magnitude of r is

2 3 units, find r .
7.
A vector r has magnitude 14 and direction ratios 2, 3, 6. Find the direction

cosines and components of r , given that r makes an acute angle with x-axis.
8.
Find a vector of magnitude 6, which is perpendicular to both the vectors 2i j 2k

and 4i j 3k .
9.
Find the angle between the vectors 2i
j k and 3i 4 j k .
10. If a b c 0 , show that a b b c c a . Interpret the result geometrically?

11. Find the sine of the angle between the vectors a 3i
b 2i 2 j 4k .
j 2k and
216
MATHEMATICS
12. If A, B, C, D are the points with position vectors i j k , 2i

2i 3k, 3i 2 j k , respectively, find the projection of AB along CD .
j 3k ,
13. Using vectors, find the area of the triangle ABC with vertices A(1, 2, 3),
B(2, 1, 4) and C(4, 5, 1).
14. Using vectors, prove that the parallelogram on the same base and between the
same parallels are equal in area.
Long Answer (L.A.)
b2 c 2 a 2
, where a, b, c are the
2bc
magnitudes of the sides opposite to the vertices A, B, C, respectively.
15. Prove that in any triangle ABC, cos A
16. If
a, b , c
determine
the
vertices
of
triangle,
show
that
1
b c c a a b gives the vector area of the triangle. Hence deduce the
2
condition that the three points a , b , c are collinear. Also find the unit vector normal
to the plane of the triangle.
17. Show that area of the parallelogram whose diagonals are given by a and b is
a b
2
. Also find the area of the parallelogram whose diagonals are 2i j k
and i 3 j k .
18. If a = i j k and b
j k , find a vector c such that a c b and a . c 3 .

19 to 33 (M.C.Q)
19. The vector in the direction of the vector i 2 j 2k that has magnitude 9 is
(A)
i 2 j 2k
(B)
i 2 j 2k
3
(C)
3(i 2 j 2k)
(D)
9(i 2 j 2k)
VECTOR ALGEBRA
217
20. The position vector of the point which divides the join of points 2a 3b and a b
in the ratio 3 : 1 is
(A)
3a 2b
2
(B)
7 a 8b
4
(C)
3a
4
5a
4
(D)
21. The vector having initial and terminal points as (2, 5, 0) and (3, 7, 4), respectively
is
(A)
i 12 j 4k
(B)
5i 2 j 4k
(C)
5i 2 j 4k
(D)
i j k
22. The angle between two vectors a and b with magnitudes 3 and 4, respectively,
and a . b 2 3 is
(A)
(B)
(C)
23. Find the value of such that the vectors a 2i

orthogonal
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
j k and b i 2 j 3k are
3
2
(D)
24. The value of for which the vectors 3i 6 j k and 2i 4 j

(A)
2
3
(B)
3
2
(C)
5
2
5
2
5
2
k are parallel is
(D)
2
5
25. The
vectors from origin to the points A and B are

a 2i 3 j 2k and b 2i 3 j k ,respectively, then the area of triangle OAB is
(A)
340
(B)
25
(C)
229 (D)
1
229
2
218
MATHEMATICS
j ) 2 (a k) 2 is equal to
26. For any vector a , the value of (a i) 2 (a

(A)
(B)
a2
4 a2
(C)
3a 2
(D)
2 a2
(D)
16
27. If a = 10, b = 2 and a . b 12 , then value of a b is

(A)
(B)
28. The vectors i j 2k , i

(A)
= 2
10
j k and 2i j
(B)
(B)
14
k are coplanar if
= 0 (C)
29. If a , b , c are unit vectors such that a b

(A)
(C)
= 1 (D)
=1
c 0 , then the value of a.b b.c c.a is
3
2
(C)
(C)
a.b
a
(D) None of these
30. Projection vector of a on b is

a .b
(A)
a .b
(B)
31. If a , b , c are three vectors such that a b
c 0 and a
(D)
2, b
a .b
b
2
a
3, c
5,
then value of a .b b.c c.a is

(A)
32. If a
(A)
0
4 and 3
[0, 8]
(B)
2 , then the range of
(B)
(C)
19
(D)
38
a is
[ 12, 8] (C)
[0, 12] (D)
[8, 12]
33. The number of vectors of unit length perpendicular to the vectors a = 2i + j + 2k

and b = j + k is
(A)
one
(B)
two
(C)
three
Fill in the blanks in each of the Exercises from 34 to 40.
(D)
infinite
34. The vector a + b bisects the angle between the non-collinear vectors a and
b if ________
VECTOR ALGEBRA
219
35. If r . a 0, r . b 0, and r . c 0 for some non-zero vector r , then the value of

a .(b c ) is
________
a 3i 2 j 2k and b i 2k are the adjacent sides of a

parallelogram. The acute angle between its diagonals is ________.
36. The vectors
37. The values of k for which ka
a and ka
1
a is parallel to a holds true
2
are _______.
2
38. The value of the expression a b + (a . b ) 2 is _______.

39. If a b
a .b = 144 and a
4 , then b is equal to _______.
40. If a is any non-zero vector, then (a .i) i
a . j j
a . k k equals _______.
State True or False in each of the following Exercises.

41. If a
b , then necessarily it implies a
b.
42. Position vector of a point P is a vector whose initial point is origin.

43. If a b
b , then the vectors a and b are orthogonal.
44. The formula (a b ) 2 a 2 b 2 2a b is valid for non-zero vectors a and b .

45. If a and b are adjacent sides of a rhombus, then a . b = 0.
Chapter
11
THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY

11.1 Overview
11.1.1 Direction cosines of a line are the cosines of the angles made by the line with
positive directions of the co-ordinate axes.
11.1.2 If l, m, n are the direction cosines of a line, then l2 + m2 + n2 = 1
11.1.3 Direction cosines of a line joining two points P (x1, y1 , z1) and Q (x2, y2, z2) are
x2 x1 y2 y1 z2 z1
,
,
,
PQ
PQ
PQ
where PQ = (x2 x1 ) 2 + ( y2 y1 ) 2 + ( z2 z1 ) 2
11.1.4 Direction ratios of a line are the numbers which are proportional to the direction
cosines of the line.
11.1.5 If l, m, n are the direction cosines and a, b, c are the direction ratios of a line,
then l
;m
a
;n
a
b2 c 2
11.1.6 Skew lines are lines in the space which are neither parallel nor interesecting.
They lie in the different planes.
11.1.7 Angle between skew lines is the angle between two intersecting lines drawn
from any point (preferably through the origin) parallel to each of the skew lines.
11.1.8 If l1, m1, n1 and l2, m2, n2 are the direction cosines of two lines and is the
acute angle between the two lines, then
cos = l1l2 + m1m2 + n1n2
11.1.9 If a1, b1, c1 and a2, b2, c2 are the directions ratios of two lines and is the
acute angle between the two lines, then
cos =
221
a1a2 + b1b2 + c1c2

a12 + a22 + a32 . b12 + b22 + b32
11.1.10 Vector equation of a line that passes through the given point whose position
G
G G G
G
vector is a and parallel to a given vector b is r = a + b .
11.1.11 Equation of a line through a point (x1, y1, z1) and having directions cosines
l, m, n (or, direction ratios a, b and c) is
x x1 y y1 z z1
x x1 y y1 z z1
=
=
=
=
or
.
b
c
l
m
n
a
11.1.12 The vector equation of a line that passes through two points whose positions
G G
G G G
G
vectors are a and b is r = a + (b a ) .
11.1.13 Cartesian equation of a line that passes through two points (x1, y1, z1) and
(x2, y2, z2) is
x x1 y y1 z z1
=
=
x2 x1 y2 y1 z2 z1 .
G
G
G G
G G
11.1.14 If is the acute angle between the lines r = a1 + b1 and r = a2 + b2 , then
G G
G G
b1 . b2
b
1 . b2
is given by cos = G G or = cos 1 G G .
b1 b2
b1 b2
11.1.15 If
x x1 y y1 z z1
x x2 y y2 z z2
=
=
=
=
and
l1
m1
n1
l1
m2
n2 are equations of two
lines, then the acute angle between the two lines is given by
cos = l1 l2 + m1 m2 + n1 n2 .
11.1.16 The shortest distance between two skew lines is the length of the line segment
perpendicular to both the lines.
G
G
G G
G G
11.1.17 The shortest distance between the lines r = a1 + b1 and r = a2 + b2 is
222
MATHEMATICS
G G
b1 b2 .
G
b1
G G
a2 a1
G
b2
11.1.18 Shortest distance between the lines:
x x1 y y1 z z1
=
=
and
a1
b1
c1
x x2 y y2 z z2
=
=
a2
b2
c2 is
x2 x1
a1
a2
y2 y1
b1
b2
z2 z1
c1
c2
(b1c2 b2 c1 ) 2 + (c1a2 c2 a1 ) 2 + (a1b2 a2b1 ) 2

G G
11.1.19 Distance between parallel lines r a1
G
b
G
G
G G
b and r = a2 + b is
G G
a2 a1
G
.
b
11.1.20 The vector equation of a plane which is at a distance p from the origin, where
G
n is the unit vector normal to the plane, is r . n = p .
11.1.21 Equation of a plane which is at a distance p from the origin with direction
cosines of the normal to the plane as l, m, n is lx + my + nz = p.
G
11.1.22 The equation of a plane through a point whose position vector is a and
G G G
G G
G G
perpendicular to the vector nG is (r a ). n = 0 or r . n = d , where d = a . n.
11.1.23 Equation of a plane perpendicular to a given line with direction ratios a, b, c

and passing through a given point (x1, y1, z1) is a (x x1) + b (y y1) + c (z z1) = 0.
11.1.24 Equation of a plane passing through three non-collinear points (x1, y1, z1),
(x2, y2, z2) and (x3, y3, z3) is
x x1
x2 x1
x3 x1
y y1
y2 y1
y3 y1
223
z z1
z2 z1 = 0
.
z3 z1
11.1.25Vector equation of a plane that contains three non-collinear points having position
G G
G G
G G
G
vectors aG , b , cG is ( r a ). (b a ) (c a ) = 0
11.1.26Equation of a plane that cuts the co-ordinates axes at (a, 0, 0), (0, b, 0) and
(0, 0, c ) is
x y z
+ + =1 .
a b c
11.1.27Vector equation of any plane that passes through the intersection of planes
G G
G G
G G
G G
r . n1 = d1 and r . n2 = d 2 is ( r . n1 d1 ) + ( r . n2 d 2 ) = 0 , where is any non-zero
constant.
11.1.28Cartesian equation of any plane that passes through the intersection of two
given planes A 1 x + B 1y + C 1z + D 1 = 0 and A 2 x + B 2y + C 2 z + D 2 = 0 is
(A1x + B1y + C1z + D1) + ( A2x + B2y + C2z + D2) = 0.
G
11.1.29Two lines r
11.1.30Two lines
G
a1
x x1
a1
x2 x1
a1
a2
G
G
G G
G G
G G
b1 and r = a2 + b2 are coplanar if (a2 a1 ) . (b1 b2 ) = 0
y y1
b1
y2 y1
b1
b2
z z1
x x2
and
c1
a2
y y2
b2
z z2
are coplanar if
c2
z2 z1
c1 = 0
,
c2
G G
11.1.31In vector form, if is the acute angle between the two planes, r . n1 = d1 and
G G
G G
1 n1 . n2
r . n2 = d 2 , then = cos G G
n1 . n2
G
11.1.32The acute angle between the line r
G
a
G
G G
b and plane r . n = d is given by
224
MATHEMATICS
G G
b. n
sin = G G .
b.n

Short Answer (S.A.)
Example 1 If the direction ratios of a line are 1, 1, 2, find the direction cosines
of the line.
Solution The direction cosines are given by
l=
a
a 2 + b2 + c2
,m=
b
a 2 + b2 + c2
, n=
a 2 + b2 + c2
Here a, b, c are 1, 1, 2, respectively.

Therefore, l =
i.e., l =
1
12 +12 + 22
,m=
1
12 +12 + 22
, n=
2
12 +12 + 22
1 1 2
1
1
2
,
,
, m=
, n=
i.e.
are D.Cs of the line.
6
6
6
6 6 6
Example 2 Find the direction cosines of the line passing through the points
P (2, 3, 5) and Q (1, 2, 4).
Solution The direction cosines of a line passing through the points P (x1, y1, z1) and
Q (x2, y2, z2) are
x2 x1 y2 y1 z2 z1
,
,
.
PQ
PQ
PQ
Here PQ = ( x2 x1 ) 2 + ( y2 y1 ) 2 + ( z2 z1 ) 2
=
(1 2) 2 + (2 3) 2 + (4 5) 2
Hence D.C.s are
9 +1+1
11
225
3 1
1
1
1
3
,
,
,
,
or
.
11 11
11
11 11 11
Example 3 If a line makes an angle of 30, 60, 90 with the positive direction of
x, y, z-axes, respectively, then find its direction cosines.
Solution The direction cosines of a line which makes an angle of , , with the axes,
are cos, cos, cos
3 1
Therefore, D.C.s of the line are cos30, cos60, cos90 i.e., 2 , 2 , 0
Example 4 The x-coordinate of a point on the line joining the points Q (2, 2, 1) and
R (5, 1, 2) is 4. Find its z-coordinate.
Solution Let the point P divide QR in the ratio : 1, then the co-ordinate of P are
5 + 2 + 2 2 +1
,
,
+1 +1 +1
But x coordinate of P is 4. Therefore,
5 + 2
= 4 = 2
+1
Hence, the z-coordinate of P is
2 +1
= 1 .
+1
Example 5 Find the distance of the point whose position vector is (2i + j k) from
the plane rG . ( i 2 j + 4 k ) = 9
G
G
Solution Here a = 2i + j k , n i 2 j 4k and d = 9
So, the required distance is
( 2i + j k ).( i 2 j + 4k ) 9
1+ 4 + 16
226
MATHEMATICS
2 2 49
21
13
.
21
Example 6 Find the distance of the point ( 2, 4, 5) from the line

Solution
x +3 y 4 z +8
=
=
3
5
6
Here P (2, 4, 5) is the given point.
Any point Q on the line is given by (3 3, 5 + 4, (6 8 ),

JJJG
PQ = (3 1) i + 5 j + (6 3) k .
Since
JJJG
PQ 3i + 5 j + 6k , we have
3 (3 1) + 5( 5) + 6 (6 3 ) = 0
9 + 25 + 36 = 21, i.e. =
Thus
1 15 12
JJJG
PQ = 10 i + 10 j 10 k
Hence
JJJG 1
37
PQ =
1+ 225 +144 =
.
10
10
3
10
Example 7 Find the coordinates of the point where the line through (3, 4, 5) and
(2, 3, 1) crosses the plane passing through three points (2, 2, 1), (3, 0, 1) and (4, 1, 0)
Solution Equation of plane through three points (2, 2, 1), (3, 0, 1) and (4, 1, 0) is
(rG (2i + 2 j + k) . (i 2 j ) (i j k ) = 0
i.e.
G
r .(2i + j + k) = 7 or 2x + y + z 7 = 0 ... (1)
Equation of line through (3, 4, 5) and (2, 3, 1) is
x 3 y + 4 z +5
=
=
1
6
1
... (2)
227
Any point on line (2) is ( + 3, 4, 6 5). This point lies on plane (1). Therefore,
2 ( + 3) + ( 4) + (6 5) 7 = 0, i.e., = z
Hence the required point is (1, 2, 7).
Long Answer (L.A.)
Example 8 Find the distance of the point (1, 5, 10) from the point of intersection
G
G
of the line r = 2 i j + 2k + (3 i + 4 j + 2k) and the plane r . ( i j + k ) = 5 .
Solution We have
G
G
r = 2 i j + 2k + (3 i + 4 j + 2k) and r . ( i j + k ) = 5
Solving these two equations, we get [(2 i j + 2k) + (3 i + 4 j + 2k)].(i j + k) = 5

which gives = 0.
Therefore, the point of intersection of line and the plane is (2,
1, 2) and the other
given point is ( 1, 5, 10). Hence the distance between these two points is
2 ( 1)
[ 1 5]2 [2 ( 10)]2 , i.e. 13
Example 9
A plane meets the co-ordinates axis in A, B, C such that the centroid
of the ABC is the point (, , ). Show that the equation of the plane is
y
z
x
+
+
=3

Solution Let the equation of the plane be
x
y
z
+
+
=1
b
c
a
Then the co-ordinate of A, B, C are (a, 0, 0), (0,b,0) and (0, 0, c) respectively. Centroid
of the ABC is
x1 x2
3
x3 y1
,
y2
3
y3 z1 z2
,
3
z3
i.e.
a b c
, ,
3 3 3
But co-ordinates of the centroid of the ABC are (, , ) (given).
228
MATHEMATICS
Therefore,
a
b
c
, = , = , i.e. a = 3, b = 3, c = 3
3
3
3
Thus, the equation of plane is
x y z
+ + =3

Example 10 Find the angle between the lines whose direction cosines are given by
the equations: 3l + m + 5n = 0 and 6mn 2nl + 5lm = 0.
Solution Eliminating m from the given two equations, we get
2n2 + 3 ln + l2 = 0
(n + l) (2n + l) = 0
either n = l or l = 2n
Now if
l = n, then m = 2n
and if
l = 2n, then m = n.
Thus the direction ratios of two lines are proportional to n, 2n, n and 2n, n, n,
i.e.
1, 2, 1 and 2, 1, 1.
So, vectors parallel to these lines are
G
a = i + 2 j k
and
G
b = 2 i + j + k , respectively.
If is the angle between the lines, then
G G
a .b
G G
cos = a b
Hence
(i + 2 j k ) ( 2i + j + k )
1 + 2 + (1)
2
= cos1
1
.
6
(2) + 1 + 1
2
1
6
229
Example 11 Find the co-ordinates of the foot of perpendicular drawn from the point A
(1, 8, 4) to the line joining the points B (0, 1, 3) and C (2, 3, 1).
Solution Let L be the foot of perpendicular drawn from the points A (1, 8, 4) to the line
passing through B and C as shown in the Fig. 11.2. The equation of line BC by using
G G
G G
formula r = a + ( b a ), the equation of the line BC is
) (
G
r = j + 3k + 2i 2 j 4k
xi yi zk = 2 i 2
1 i
3 4
k
Comparing both sides, we get

x = 2, y = (2 + 1), z = 3 4
(1)
Thus, the co-ordinate of L are (2, (2 + 1), (3 4),

so that the direction ratios of the line AL are (1 2), 8 + (2 + 1), 4 (3 4), i.e.
1 2, 2 + 9, 1 + 4
Since AL is perpendicular to BC, we have,
(1 2) (2 0) + (2 + 9) (3 + 1) + (4 + 1) (1 3) = 0
5
6
The required point is obtained by substituting the value of , in (1), which is
230
MATHEMATICS
5 2 19
, ,
.
3 3 3
Example 12 Find the image of the point (1, 6, 3) in the line
x
1
y 1 z 2
.
2
3
Solution Let P (1, 6, 3) be the given point and let L be the foot of perpendicular from
P to the given line.
The coordinates of a general point on the given line are
x0
1
y 1 z 2
2
3
, i.e., x = , y = 2 + 1, z = 3 + 2.
If the coordinates of L are (, 2 + 1, 3 + 2), then the direction ratios of PL are

1, 2 5, 3 1.
But the direction ratios of given line which is perpendicular to PL are 1, 2, 3. Therefore,
( 1) 1 + (2 5) 2 + (3 1) 3 = 0, which gives = 1. Hence coordinates of L are
(1, 3, 5).
Let Q (x1, y1, z1) be the image of P (1, 6, 3) in the given line. Then L is the mid-point
of PQ. Therefore,
x1 1
y 6
z 3
1, 1
3 1
5
2
2
2
x1 = 1, y1 = 0, z1 = 7
Hence, the image of (1, 6, 3) in the given line is (1, 0, 7).
231
Example 13 Find the image of the point having position vector i 3 j 4k in the
plane r
2i j k
3 0.
Solution Let the given point be P i 3 lj
r . 2i j k
4k and Q be the image of P in the plane
3 0 as shown in the Fig. 11.4.
Then PQ is the normal to the plane. Since PQ passes through P and is normal to the
given plane, so the equation of PQ is given by
G
r = i 3j 4k
2i j k
Since Q lies on the line PQ, the position vector of Q can be expressed as
i 3 j 4k
2i j k , i.e., (1 + 2 ) i + ( 3 ) j + ( 4 + ) k
Since R is the mid point of PQ, the position vector of R is

(1 + 2 ) i + ( 3 ) j + ( 4 + ) k + i + 3 j + 4k
232
i.e.,
MATHEMATICS

( +1) i + 3 j + 4 + k
2
2
G
Again, since R lies on the plane r 2i j + k + 3 = 0 , we have

l
l
( + 1) i + 3 j + 4 + k (2i j + k ) + 3 = 0
2
2
= 2

Hence, the position vector of Q is i + 3 j + 4k 2 2i j k , i.e. 3i + 5 j + 2k .
Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Examples
14 to 19.
Example 14 The coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular drawn from the point
(2, 5, 7) on the x-axis are given by
(A) (2, 0, 0)
(B) (0, 5, 0)
(C) (0, 0, 7)
(D)
(0, 5, 7)

Example 15 P is a point on the line segment joining the points (3, 2, 1) and
(6, 2, 2). If x co-ordinate of P is 5, then its y co-ordinate is
(A) 2
(B) 1
(C) 1
(D) 2
Solution (A) is the correct answer. Let P divides the line segment in the ratio of : 1,
x - coordinate of the point P may be expressed as x =
6 + 3
6 + 3
giving +1 = 5 so that
+1
2 + 2
= 2. Thus y-coordinate of P is +1 = 2 .
Example 16 If , , are the angles that a line makes with the positive direction of x,
y, z axis, respectively, then the direction cosines of the line are.
(A)
sin , sin , sin
(B)
cos , cos , cos
(C)
tan , tan , tan
(D)
cos2 , cos2 , cos2
233

Example 17 The distance of a point P (a, b, c) from x-axis is
(A)
a2 c2
(B)
a 2 b2
(C)
b2 c2
(D) b2 + c2
Solution (C) is the correct answer. The required distance is the distance of P (a, b, c)
from Q (a, o, o), which is
b2 c2 .
Example 18 The equations of x-axis in space are

(A) x = 0, y = 0
(B)
x = 0, z = 0
(C)
x=0
(D)
y = 0, z = 0
Solution (D) is the correct answer. On x-axis the y- co-ordinate and z- co-ordinates
are zero.
Example 19 A line makes equal angles with co-ordinate axis. Direction cosines of this
line are
(A)
(1, 1, 1)
(B)
1 1 1
,
,
3 3 3
(C)
1 1 1
, ,
3 3 3
(D)
1 1 1
,
,
3
3
3
Solution (B) is the correct answer. Let the line makes angle with each of the axis.
Then, its direction cosines are cos , cos , cos .
Since cos2 + cos2 + cos2 = 1. Therefore, cos =
1
3
Fill in the blanks in each of the Examples from 20 to 22.

Example 20 If a line makes angles
its direction cosines are _______
3
and
with x, y, z axis, respectively, then
2 4
4
,
234
MATHEMATICS
Solution The direction cosines are cos
, cos
1 1
3
, cos , i.e., 0,
.
2 2
4
4
Example 21 If a line makes angles , , with the positive directions of the coordinate
axes, then the value of sin2 + sin2 + sin2 is _______
Solution Note that
sin2 + sin2 + sin2 = (1 cos2) + (1 cos2) + (1 cos2)
= 3 (cos2 + cos2 + cos2) = 2.
Example 22 If a line makes an angle of
4
which it makes with x-axis is _________
with each of y and z axis, then the angle
2
Solution Let it makes angle with x-axis. Then cos2 + cos
which after simplification gives =
2
+ cos
=1
State whether the following statements are True or False in Examples 23 and 24.
Example 23 The points (1, 2, 3), (2, 3, 4) and (7, 0, 1) are collinear.
Solution Let A, B, C be the points (1, 2, 3), (2, 3, 4) and (7, 0, 1), respectively.
Then, the direction ratios of each of the lines AB and BC are proportional to 3, 1, 1.
Therefore, the statement is true.
Example 24 The vector equation of the line passing through the points (3,5,4) and
(5,8,11) is
r
r
3i 5 j
4k
( 2i 3 j
7k )
Solution The position vector of the points (3,5,4) and (5,8,11) are
r
r
a 3i 5 j 4k,b 5i 8 j 11k ,
and therefore, the required equation of the line is given by
r
r 3i 5 j 4k
Hence, the statement is true.
( 2i 3 j
7k )
235
11.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
1.
JJJG
Find the position vector of a point A in space such that OA is inclined at 60 to
JJJG
OX and at 45 to OY and OA = 10 units.
2.
Find the vector equation of the line which is parallel to the vector 3i 2 j 6k
and which passes through the point (1,2,3).
3.
Show that the lines
x 1
2
and
y 2
3
z 3
4
x 4 y 1
=
= z intersect.
5
2
Also, find their point of intersection.

4.
Find the angle between the lines

r
r
r = 3i 2 j + 6k + (2i + j + 2k) and r = (2 j 5k) + (6i + 3 j + 2k)
5.
Prove that the line through A (0, 1, 1) and B (4, 5, 1) intersects the line
through C (3, 9, 4) and D ( 4, 4, 4).
6.
Prove that the lines x = py + q, z = ry + s and x = py + q, z = ry + s are

perpendicular if pp + rr + 1 = 0.
7.
Find the equation of a plane which bisects perpendicularly the line joining the
points A (2, 3, 4) and B (4, 5, 8) at right angles.
8.
Find the equation of a plane which is at a distance 3 3 units from origin and
the normal to which is equally inclined to coordinate axis.
9.
If the line drawn from the point (2, 1, 3) meets a plane at right angle at the
point (1, 3, 3), find the equation of the plane.
10.
Find the equation of the plane through the points (2, 1, 0), (3, 2, 2) and
(3, 1, 7).
236
11.
MATHEMATICS
Find the equations of the two lines through the origin which intersect the line
x 3 y 3 z
=
= at angles of each.
2
1
1
3
12.
Find the angle between the lines whose direction cosines are given by the
equations l + m + n = 0, l2 + m2 n2 = 0.
13.
If a variable line in two adjacent positions has direction cosines l, m, n and

l + l, m + m, n + n, show that the small angle between the two positions
is given by
2 = l2 + m2 + n2
14.
O is the origin and A is (a, b, c).Find the direction cosines of the line OA and
the equation of plane through A at right angle to OA.
15.
Two systems of rectangular axis have the same origin. If a plane cuts them at
distances a, b, c and a, b, c, respectively, from the origin, prove that
1 1 1
1
1
1
+ 2+ 2= 2+ 2+ 2 .
2
a b c a b c
Long Answer (L.A.)

16.
Find the foot of perpendicular from the point (2,3,8) to the line
4 x y 1 z
. Also, find the perpendicular distance from the given point
2
6
3
to the line.
17.
Find the distance of a point (2,4,1) from the line
x 5
1
y 3
4
z 6
9
18.
3
Find the length and the foot of perpendicular from the point 1, , 2 to the
2
plane 2x 2y + 4z + 5 = 0.
19.
Find the equations of the line passing through the point (3,0,1) and parallel to
the planes x + 2y = 0 and 3y z = 0.
20.
21.
237
Find the equation of the plane through the points (2,1,1) and (1,3,4), and
perpendicular to the plane x 2y + 4z = 10.
G
Find the shortest distance between the lines given by r = (8 + 3i (9 + 16 ) j +
G
(10 + 7 )k and r =15 i + 29 j + 5 k + (3i + 8 j 5k) .
22.
Find the equation of the plane which is perpendicular to the plane

5x + 3y + 6z + 8 = 0 and which contains the line of intersection of the planes
x + 2y + 3z 4 = 0 and 2x + y z + 5 = 0.
23.
The plane ax + by = 0 is rotated about its line of intersection with the plane
z = 0 through an angle . Prove that the equation of the plane in its new
position is ax + by ( a 2 + b 2 tan ) z = 0.
24.
Find the equation of the plane through the intersection of the planes
G
G
r . ( i + 3 j ) 6 = 0 and r . (3 i j 4 k ) = 0, whose perpendicular
distance from origin is unity.
25.
Show that the points (i j + 3k) and 3(i + j + k) are equidistant from the plane
G
r .(5i + 2 j 7 k) + 9 = 0 and lies on opposite side of it.
26.
JJJG
JJJG
AB = 3i j + k and CD = 3i + 2 j + 4k are two vectors. The position vectors
of the points A and C are 6i + 7 j + 4k and 9 j + 2k , respectively. Find the
position vector of a point P on the line AB and a point Q on the line CD such
JJJG
JJJG
JJJG
that PQ is perpendicular to AB and CD both.
27.
Show that the straight lines whose direction cosines are given by
2l + 2m n = 0 and mn + nl + lm = 0 are at right angles.
28.
If l1, m1, n1; l2, m2, n2; l3, m3, n3 are the direction cosines of three mutually
perpendicular lines, prove that the line whose direction cosines are proportional
to l1 + l2 + l3, m1 + m2 + m3, n1 + n2 + n3 makes equal angles with them.

29 to 36.
29.
Distance of the point (,,) from y-axis is
238
MATHEMATICS
30.
(B) 0<k<1
1
1
or
3
3
(D) k
(C) k=1
r 2
3
6
The distance of the plane r . i + j k = 1 from the origin is
7
7
7
(A) 1
32.
2 + 2
(D)
If the directions cosines of a line are k,k,k, then

(A) k>0
31.
(C) +
(B)
(A)
(B) 7
(C)
1
7
(D) None of these
The sine of the angle between the straight line
x 2
3
y 3
4
z 4
and the
5
plane 2x 2y + z = 5 is
(A)
33.
10
6 5
4
5 2
(C)
2 3
5
(D)
2
10
The reflection of the point (,,) in the xy plane is

(A) (,,0)
34.
(B)
(B) (0,0,)
(C) (,,)
(D) (,,)
The area of the quadrilateral ABCD, where A(0,4,1), B (2, 3, 1), C(4, 5, 0)
and D (2, 6, 2), is equal to
(A) 9 sq. units (B) 18 sq. units (C) 27 sq. units (D) 81 sq. units
35.
36.
The locus represented by xy + yz = 0 is

(A) A pair of perpendicular lines
(B) A pair of parallel lines
(C) A pair of parallel planes
(D) A pair of perpendicular planes
The plane 2x 3y + 6z 11 = 0 makes an angle sin1() with x-axis. The value

of is equal to
(A)
3
2
(B)
2
3
(C)
2
7
(D)
3
7
239

37.
A plane passes through the points (2,0,0) (0,3,0) and (0,0,4). The equation of
plane is __________.
38.
The direction cosines of the vector (2i 2 j k) are __________.
39.
The vector equation of the line
40.
The vector equation of the line through the points (3,4,7) and (1,1,6) is
__________.
41.
r
The cartesian equation of the plane r .(i
x5
3
y 4
7
z6
is __________.
2
j k)
2 is __________.
42.
The unit vector normal to the plane x + 2y +3z 6 = 0

1
i
14
43.
3
k.
14
The intercepts made by the plane 2x 3y + 5z +4 = 0 on the co-ordinate axis

are 2,
44.
2
j
14
4 4
, .
3 5
G
The angle between the line r
1
G
r .(3i 4 j k) 5 0 is sin
45.
is
(5i j 4k)
(2i j k) and the plane
5
.
2 91
G
The angle between the planes r .(2i 3 j k) 1 and r.(i j )
cos 1
4 is
5
.
58
46.
G
The line r
47.
The vector equation of the line
2i 3 j k
G
(i j 2k) lies in the plane r .(3i
x5
3
y 4
7
z6
is
2
j k) 2 0 .
240
MATHEMATICS
G
r
48.
(3i 7 j 2k) .
The equation of a line, which is parallel to 2i

the point (5,2,4), is
49.
5i 4 j 6k
x5
2
y 2
1
j 3k and which passes through
z4
.
3
If the foot of perpendicular drawn from the origin to a plane is (5, 3, 2),
G
then the equation of plane is r .(5i 3 j 2k) = 38 .
Chapter
12
LINEAR PROGRAMMING
12.1 Overview
12.1.1 An Optimisation Problem A problem which seeks to maximise or minimise a
function is called an optimisation problem. An optimisation problem may
involve maximisation of profit, production etc or minimisation of cost, from available
resources etc.
12.1.2 A Linnear Programming Problem (LPP)
A linear programming problem deals with the optimisation (maximisation/
minimisation) of a linear function of two variables (say x and y) known as objective
function subject to the conditions that the variables are non-negative and satisfy a set
of linear inequalities (called linear constraints). A linear programming problem is a
special type of optimisation problem.
12.1.3 Objective Function Linear function Z = ax + by, where a and b are constants,
which has to be maximised or minimised is called a linear objective function.
12.1.4 Decision Variables In the objective function Z = ax + by, x and y are called
decision variables.
12.1.5 Constraints The linear inequalities or restrictions on the variables of an LPP
are called constraints. The conditions x 0, y 0 are called non-negative constraints.
12.1.6 Feasible Region The common region determined by all the constraints including
non-negative constraints x 0, y 0 of an LPP is called the feasible region for the
problem.
12.1.7 Feasible Solutions Points within and on the boundary of the feasible region
for an LPP represent feasible solutions.
12.1.8 Infeasible Solutions Any Point outside feasible region is called an infeasible
solution.
12.1.9 Optimal (feasible) Solution Any point in the feasible region that gives the
optimal value (maximum or minimum) of the objective function is called an optimal
solution.
Following theorems are fundamental in solving LPPs.
242 MATHEMATICS
LINEAR INEQUALITIES 242
12.1.10 Theorem 1 Let R be the feasible region (convex polygon) for an LPP and let
Z = ax + by be the objective function. When Z has an optimal value (maximum or
minimum), where x and y are subject to constraints described by linear inequalities,
this optimal value must occur at a corner point (vertex) of the feasible region.
Theorem 2 Let R be the feasible region for a LPP and let Z = ax + by be the objective
function. If R is bounded, then the objective function Z has both a maximum and a
minimum value on R and each of these occur at a corner point of R.
If the feasible region R is unbounded, then a maximum or a minimum value
of the objective function may or may not exist. However, if it exits, it must occur at a
corner point of R.
12.1.11 Corner point method for solving a LPP
The method comprises of the following steps :
(1) Find the feasible region of the LPP and determine its corner points (vertices)
either by inspection or by solving the two equations of the lines intersecting at
that point.
(2) Evaluate the objective function Z = ax + by at each corner point.
Let M and m, respectively denote the largest and the smallest values of Z.
(3) (i) When the feasible region is bounded, M and m are, respectively, the
maximum and minimum values of Z.
(ii) In case, the feasible region is unbounded.
(a) M is the maximum value of Z, if the open half plane determined by
ax + by > M has no point in common with the feasible region. Otherwise, Z has
no maximum value.
(b) Similarly, m is the minimum of Z, if the open half plane determined by
ax + by < m has no point in common with the feasible region. Otherwise, Z has
no minimum value.
12.1.12 Multiple optimal points If two corner points of the feasible region are optimal
solutions of the same type, i.e., both produce the same maximum or minimum, then
any point on the line segment joining these two points is also an optimal solution of
the same type.

Short Answer (S.A.)
Example 1 Determine the maximum value of Z = 4x + 3y if the feasible region for an
LPP is shown in Fig. 12.1.
LINEAR PROGRAMMING 243
Solution The feasible region is bounded. Therefore, maximum of Z must occur at the
corner point of the feasible region (Fig. 12.1).
Corner Point
Value of Z
O, (0, 0)
A (25, 0)
B (16, 16)
C (0, 24)
4 (0) + 3 (0) = 0
4 (25) + 3 (0) = 100
4 (16) + 3 (16) = 112 (Maximum)
4 (0) + 3 (24) = 72
Hence, the maximum value of Z is 112.
Fig.12.1
Example 2 Determine the minimum value of Z = 3x + 2y (if any), if the feasible

region for an LPP is shown in Fig.12.2.
Solution The feasible region (R) is unbounded. Therefore minimum of Z may or may
not exist. If it exists, it will be at the corner point (Fig.12.2).
Corner Point
A, (12, 0)
Value of Z
3 (12) + 2 (0) = 36
B (4, 2)
3 (4) + 2 (2) = 16
C (1, 5)
3 (1) + 2 (5) = 13
D (0, 10)
3 (0) + 2 (10) = 20
(smallest)
244 MATHEMATICS
Let us graph 3x + 2y < 13. We see that the open half plane determined by 3x + 2y < 13
and R do not have a common point. So, the smallest value 13 is the minimum value
of Z.
Example 3 Solve the following LPP graphically:
Maximise Z = 2x + 3y,
subject to x + y 4, x 0, y 0
Solution The shaded region (OAB) in the Fig. 12.3 is the feasible region determined
by the system of constraints x 0, y 0 and x + y 4.
The feasible region OAB is bounded, so, maximum value will occur at a corner point
of the feasible region.
Corner Points are O(0, 0), A (4, 0) and B (0, 4).
Evaluate Z at each of these corner point.
Corner Point
Value of Z
0, (0, 0)
A (4, 0)
2 (0) + 3 (0) = 0
2 (4) + 3 (0) = 8
B (0, 4)
2 (0) + 3 (4) = 12
Maximum
Hence, the maximum value of Z is 12 at the point (0, 4)

Example 4 A manufacturing company makes two types of television sets; one is
black and white and the other is colour. The company has resources to make at most
300 sets a week. It takes Rs 1800 to make a black and white set and Rs 2700 to make
a coloured set. The company can spend not more than Rs 648000 a week to make
television sets. If it makes a profit of Rs 510 per black and white set and Rs 675 per
coloured set, how many sets of each type should be produced so that the company has
maximum profit? Formulate this problem as a LPP given that the objective is to
maximise the profit.
Solution Let x and y denote, respectively, the number of black and white sets and
coloured sets made each week. Thus
x 0, y 0
Since the company can make at most 300 sets a week, therefore,
x + y 300
Weekly cost (in Rs) of manufacturing the set is
1800x + 2700y
and the company can spend upto Rs. 648000. Therefore,
1800x + 2700y 648000, i.e., or 2x + 3y 720
The total profit on x black and white sets and y colour sets is Rs (510x + 675y). Let
Z = 510x + 675y . This is the objective function.
246 MATHEMATICS
Thus, the mathematical formulation of the problem is

Maximise
subject to the constraints :
Z = 510x + 675y
x y 300
2x 3 y 720
x 0, y 0
Long Answer (L.A.)

Example 5 Refer to Example 4. Solve the LPP.
Solution The problem is :
Maximise Z = 510x + 675y
subject to the constraints :
x y 300
2x 3 y 720
x 0, y 0
The feasible region OABC is shown in the Fig. 12.4.

Since the feasible region is bounded, therefore maximum of Z must occur at the corner
point of OBC.
Corner Point
Value of Z
O (0, 0)
A (300, 0)
B (180, 120)
C (0, 240)
510 (0) + 675 (0) = 0

510 (300) + 675 (0) = 153000
510 (180) + 675 (120) = 172800
Maximum
510 (0) + 675 (240) = 162000
Thus, maximum Z is 172800 at the point (180, 120), i.e., the company should produce
180 black and white television sets and 120 coloured television sets to get maximum
profit.
Example 6 Minimise Z = 3x + 5y subject to the constraints :
x + 2 y 10
x+ y 6
3x + y 8
x, y 0
Solution We first draw the graphs of x + 2y = 10, x + y = 6, 3x + y = 8. The shaded
region ABCD is the feasible region (R) determined by the above constraints. The
feasible region is unbounded. Therefore, minimum of Z may or may not occur. If it
occurs, it will be on the corner point.
Corner Point
Value of Z
A (0, 8)
40
B (1, 5)
28
C (2, 4)
26
D (10, 0)
30
smallest
248 MATHEMATICS
Let us draw the graph of 3x + 5y < 26 as shown in Fig. 12.5 by dotted line.
We see that the open half plane determined by 3x + 5y < 26 and R do not have a point
in common. Thus, 26 is the minimum value of Z.

Example 7 The corner points of the feasible region determined by the system of
linear constraints are (0, 10), (5, 5), (15, 15), (0, 20).Let Z = px + qy, where p, q > 0.
Condition on p and q so that the maximum of Z occurs at both the points (15, 15) and
(0, 20) is
(A) p = q
(B) p = 2q
(C) q = 2p
(D) q = 3p
Solution The correct answer is (D). Since Z occurs maximum at (15, 15) and (0, 20),
therefore, 15p + 15q = 0.p + 20q q = 3p.
Example 8 Feasible region (shaded) for a LPP is shown in
the Fig. 14.6. Minimum of Z = 4x + 3y occurs at the point
(A) (0, 8)
(B) (2, 5)
(C) (4, 3)
(D) (9, 0)

Fill in the blanks in each of the Examples 9 and 10:
Example 9 In a LPP, the linear function which has to be maximised or minimised is
called a linear __________ function.
Solution Objective.
Example 10 The common region determined by all the linear constraints of a LPP is
called the _______ region.
Solution Feasible.
State whether the statements in Examples 11 and 12 are True or False.
Example 11 If the feasible region for a linear programming problem is bounded, then
the objective function Z = ax + by has both a maximum and a minimum value on R.
Solution True
Example 12 The minimum value of the objective function Z = ax + by in a linear
programming problem always occurs at only one corner point of the feasible region.
Solution False
The minimum value can also occur at more than one corner points of the feasible
region.
250 MATHEMATICS
12.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
1. Determine the maximum value of Z = 11x + 7y subject to the constraints :
2x + y 6, x 2, x 0, y 0.
2. Maximise Z = 3x + 4y, subject to the constraints: x + y 1, x 0, y 0.
3. Maximise the function Z = 11x + 7y, subject to the constraints: x 3, y 2,
x 0, y 0.
4. Minimise Z = 13x 15y subject to the constraints : x + y 7, 2x 3y + 6
0, x 0, y 0.
5. Determine the maximum value of Z = 3x + 4y if the feasible region (shaded)
for a LPP is shown in Fig.12.7.
6.
Feasible region (shaded) for a LPP is shown in Fig. 12.8.

Maximise Z = 5x + 7y.
7.
The feasible region for a LPP is shown in Fig. 12.9. Find the minimum value of
Z = 11x + 7y.
8.
Refer to Exercise 7 above. Find the maximum value of Z.
9.
The feasible region for a LPP is shown in Fig. 12.10. Evaluate Z = 4x + y at

each of the corner points of this region. Find the minimum value of Z, if it
exists.
252 MATHEMATICS
10.
In Fig. 12.11, the feasible region (shaded) for a LPP is shown. Determine the
maximum and minimum value of Z = x + 2y
11.
A manufacturer of electronic circuits has a stock of 200 resistors, 120 transistors

and 150 capacitors and is required to produce two types of circuits A and B.
Type A requires 20 resistors, 10 transistors and 10 capacitors. Type B requires
10 resistors, 20 transistors and 30 capacitors. If the profit on type A circuit is
Rs 50 and that on type B circuit is Rs 60, formulate this problem as a LPP so
that the manufacturer can maximise his profit.
12.
A firm has to transport 1200 packages using large vans which can carry 200
packages each and small vans which can take 80 packages each. The cost for
engaging each large van is Rs 400 and each small van is Rs 200. Not more
than Rs 3000 is to be spent on the job and the number of large vans can not
exceed the number of small vans. Formulate this problem as a LPP given that
the objective is to minimise cost.
13.
A company manufactures two types of screws A and B. All the screws have to
pass through a threading machine and a slotting machine. A box of Type A
screws requires 2 minutes on the threading machine and 3 minutes on the
slotting machine. A box of type B screws requires 8 minutes of threading on
the threading machine and 2 minutes on the slotting machine. In a week, each
machine is available for 60 hours.
On selling these screws, the company gets a profit of Rs 100 per box on type
A screws and Rs 170 per box on type B screws.
Formulate this problem as a LPP given that the objective is to maximise profit.
14.
A company manufactures two types of sweaters : type A and type B. It costs

Rs 360 to make a type A sweater and Rs 120 to make a type B sweater. The
company can make at most 300 sweaters and spend at most Rs 72000 a day.
The number of sweaters of type B cannot exceed the number of sweaters of
type A by more than 100. The company makes a profit of Rs 200 for each
sweater of type A and Rs 120 for every sweater of type B.
Formulate this problem as a LPP to maximise the profit to the company.
15.
A man rides his motorcycle at the speed of 50 km/hour. He has to spend Rs 2

per km on petrol. If he rides it at a faster speed of 80 km/hour, the petrol cost
increases to Rs 3 per km. He has atmost Rs 120 to spend on petrol and one
hours time. He wishes to find the maximum distance that he can travel.
Express this problem as a linear programming problem.
Long Answer (L.A.)

16.
Refer to Exercise 11. How many of circuits of Type A and of Type B, should
be produced by the manufacturer so as to maximise his profit? Determine the
maximum profit.
17.
Refer to Exercise 12. What will be the minimum cost?
18.
Refer to Exercise 13. Solve the linear programming problem and determine
the maximum profit to the manufacturer.
19.
Refer to Exercise 14. How many sweaters of each type should the company
make in a day to get a maximum profit? What is the maximum profit.
20.
Refer to Exercise 15. Determine the maximum distance that the man can travel.
21.
Maximise Z = x + y subject to x + 4y 8, 2x + 3y 12, 3x + y 9, x 0, y 0.
22.
A manufacturer produces two Models of bikes - Model X and Model Y. Model

X takes a 6 man-hours to make per unit, while Model Y takes 10 man-hours
per unit. There is a total of 450 man-hour available per week. Handling and
Marketing costs are Rs 2000 and Rs 1000 per unit for Models X and Y
respectively. The total funds available for these purposes are Rs 80,000 per
week. Profits per unit for Models X and Y are Rs 1000 and Rs 500, respectively.
How many bikes of each model should the manufacturer produce so as to
yield a maximum profit? Find the maximum profit.
254 MATHEMATICS
23.
In order to supplement daily diet, a person wishes to take some X and some
wishes Y tablets. The contents of iron, calcium and vitamins in X and Y (in
milligrams per tablet) are given as below:
Tablets
Iron
Calcium
Vitamin
The person needs at least 18 milligrams of iron, 21 milligrams of calcium and

16 milligram of vitamins. The price of each tablet of X and Y is Rs 2 and
Re 1 respectively. How many tablets of each should the person take inorder to
satisfy the above requirement at the minimum cost?
24.
A company makes 3 model of calculators: A, B and C at factory I and factory

II. The company has orders for at least 6400 calculators of model A, 4000
calculator of model B and 4800 calculator of model C. At factory I, 50
calculators of model A, 50 of model B and 30 of model C are made every day;
at factory II, 40 calculators of model A, 20 of model B and 40 of model C are
made everyday. It costs Rs 12000 and Rs 15000 each day to operate factory I
and II, respectively. Find the number of days each factory should operate to
minimise the operating costs and still meet the demand.
25.
Maximise and Minimise Z = 3x 4y

subject to
x 2y 0
3x + y 4
xy 6
x, y 0

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Exercises 26 to 34.
26. The corner points of the feasible region determined by the system of linear
constraints are (0, 0), (0, 40), (20, 40), (60, 20), (60, 0). The objective function
is Z = 4x + 3y.
Compare the quantity in Column A and Column B
Column A
Maximum of Z
(A) The quantity in column A is greater
(B) The quantity in column B is greater
Column B
325
(C) The two quantities are equal

(D) The relationship can not be determined on the basis of the information
supplied
27.
The feasible solution for a LPP is shown in Fig. 12.12. Let Z = 3x 4y be the
objective function. Minimum of Z occurs at

(A) (0, 0)
(B) (0, 8)
(C) (5, 0)
(D) (4, 10)
28.
Refer to Exercise 27. Maximum of Z occurs at

(A) (5, 0)
(B) (6, 5)
(C) (6, 8)
(D) (4, 10)
29.
Refer to Exercise 27. (Maximum value of Z + Minimum value of Z) is

equal to
(A) 13
(B) 1
(C) 13
(D) 17
30.
The feasible region for an LPP is shown in the Fig. 12.13. Let F = 3x 4y be
the objective function. Maximum value of F is.
256 MATHEMATICS
(12, 6)
(0, 4)
(6, 0)
Fig. 12.13
(A) 0
31.
(C) 12
(D) 18
Refer to Exercise 30. Minimum value of F is

(A) 0
32.
(B) 8
(B) 16
(C) 12
(D) does not exist
Corner points of the feasible region for an LPP are (0, 2), (3, 0), (6, 0), (6, 8)
and (0, 5).
Let F = 4x + 6y be the objective function.
The Minimum value of F occurs at
(A) (0, 2) only
(B) (3, 0) only
(C) the mid point of the line sgment joining the points (0, 2) and (3, 0) only
(D) any point on the line segment joining the points (0, 2) and (3, 0).
33.
Refer to Exercise 32, Maximum of F Minimum of F =

(A) 60
34.
(B) 48
(C) 42
(D) 18
Corner points of the feasible region determined by the system of linear

constraints are (0, 3), (1, 1) and (3, 0). Let Z = px+qy, where p, q > 0. Condition
on p and q so that the minimum of Z occurs at (3, 0) and (1, 1) is
q
(C) p = 3q
(D) p = q
(A) p = 2q
(B) p =
2

35.
In a LPP, the linear inequalities or restrictions on the variables are called

_________.
36.
In a LPP, the objective function is always _________
37.
If the feasible region for a LPP is _________, then the optimal value of the
objective function Z = ax + by may or may not exist.
38.
In a LPP if the objective function Z = ax + by has the same maximum value on

two corner points of the feasible region, then every point on the line segment
joining these two points give the same _________ value.
39.
A feasible region of a system of linear inequalities is said to be _________ if it

can be enclosed within a circle.
40.
A corner point of a feasible region is a point in the region which is the _________
of two boundary lines.
41.
The feasible region for an LPP is always a _________ polygon.
State whether the statements in Exercises 42 to 45 are True or False.

42.
If the feasible region for a LPP is unbounded, maximum or minimum of the

objective function Z = ax + by may or may not exist.
43.
Maximum value of the objective function Z = ax + by in a LPP always occurs at

only one corner point of the feasible region.
44.
In a LPP, the minimum value of the objective function Z = ax + by is always 0

if origin is one of the corner point of the feasible region.
45.
In a LPP, the maximum value of the objective function Z = ax + by is always

finite.
Chapter
13
PROBABILITY
13.1
Overview
13.1.1 Conditional Probability

If E and F are two events associated with the same sample space of a random
experiment, then the conditional probability of the event E under the condition that the
event F has occurred, written as P (E | F), is given by
P(E | F) =
P(E F)
P(F)
, P(F) 0
13.1.2 Properties of Conditional Probability

Let E and F be events associated with the sample space S of an experiment. Then:
(i) P (S | F) = P (F | F) = 1
(ii) P [(A B) | F] = P (A | F) + P (B | F) P [(A B | F)],
where A and B are any two events associated with S.
(iii) P (E | F) = 1 P (E | F)
13.1.3 Multiplication Theorem on Probability
Let E and F be two events associated with a sample space of an experiment. Then
P (E F) = P (E) P (F | E), P (E) 0
= P (F) P (E | F), P (F) 0
If E, F and G are three events associated with a sample space, then
P (E F G) = P (E) P (F | E) P (G | E F)
PROBABILITY
259
13.1.4 Independent Events

Let E and F be two events associated with a sample space S. If the probability of
occurrence of one of them is not affected by the occurrence of the other, then we say
that the two events are independent. Thus, two events E and F will be independent, if
(a)
P (F | E) = P (F), provided P (E) 0
(b)
P (E | F) = P (E), provided P (F) 0
Using the multiplication theorem on probability, we have

(c)
P (E F) = P (E) P (F)
Three events A, B and C are said to be mutually independent if all the following
conditions hold:
P (A B) = P (A) P (B)
P (A C) = P (A) P (C)
P (B C) = P (B) P (C)
P (A B C) = P (A) P (B) P (C)
and
13.1.5 Partition of a Sample Space

A set of events E1, E2,...., En is said to represent a partition of a sample space S if
(a)
Ei Ej = , i j; i, j = 1, 2, 3,......, n
(b)
Ei E2 ... En = S, and
(c)
Each Ei , i. e, P (Ei) > 0 for all i = 1, 2, ..., n
13.1.6 Theorem of Total Probability

Let {E1, E, ..., En} be a partition of the sample space S. Let A be any event associated
with S, then
n
P (A) =
P(E
j=1
)P(A | E j )
260
MATHEMATICS
13.1.7 Bayes Theorem

If E1, E2,..., En are mutually exclusive and exhaustive events associated with a sample
space, and A is any event of non zero probability, then
P(E i | A) =
P(E i )P(A | Ei )
n
P(E )P(A | E )
i
i =1
13.1.8 Random Variable and its Probability Distribution

A random variable is a real valued function whose domain is the sample space of a
random experiment.
The probability distribution of a random variable X is the system of numbers
X
x1
x2
...
xn
P (X) :
p1
p2
...
pn
where pi > 0, i =1, 2,..., n,
p
i =1
= 1.
13.1.9 Mean and Variance of a Random Variable

Let X be a random variable assuming values x 1, x 2,...., x n with probabilities
p1, p2, ..., pn, respectively such that pi 0,
p
i =1
= 1 . Mean of X, denoted by [or
expected value of X denoted by E (X)] is defined as

n
= E (X) = xi pi
i =1
and variance, denoted by 2, is defined as

2
=
i 1
( xi ) 2 pi =
n
i 1
xi2 pi
PROBABILITY
261
or equivalently
2 = E (X )2
Standard deviation of the random variable X is defined as
n
= variance (X) =
( xi )2 pi
i 1
13.1.10 Bernoulli Trials

Trials of a random experiment are called Bernoulli trials, if they satisfy the following
conditions:
(i)
There should be a finite number of trials
(ii)
The trials should be independent
(iii)
Each trial has exactly two outcomes: success or failure
(iv)
The probability of success (or failure) remains the same in each trial.
13.1.11 Binomial Distribution

A random variable X taking values 0, 1, 2, ..., n is said to have a binomial distribution
with parameters n and p, if its probability distibution is given by
P (X = r) = ncr pr qnr,
where q = 1 p and r = 0, 1, 2, ..., n.

Short Answer (S. A.)
Example 1 A and B are two candidates seeking admission in a college. The probability
that A is selected is 0.7 and the probability that exactly one of them is selected is 0.6.
Find the probability that B is selected.
Solution Let p be the probability that B gets selected.
P (Exactly one of A, B is selected) = 0.6 (given)
P (A is selected, B is not selected; B is selected, A is not selected) = 0.6
P (AB) + P (AB) = 0.6
262
MATHEMATICS
P (A) P (B) + P (A) P (B) = 0.6

(0.7) (1 p) + (0.3) p = 0.6
p = 0.25
Thus the probability that B gets selected is 0.25.
Example 2 The probability of simultaneous occurrence of at least one of two events
A and B is p. If the probability that exactly one of A, B occurs is q, then prove that
P (A) + P (B) = 2 2p + q.
Solution Since P (exactly one of A, B occurs) = q (given), we get
P (AB) P ( AB) = q
p P (AB) = q
P (AB) = p q
1 P (AB) = p q
P (AB) = 1 p + q
P (A) + P (B) P (AB) = 1 p + q
P (A) + P (B) = (1 p + q) + P (A B)
= (1 p + q) + (1 P (A B))
= (1 p + q) + (1 p)
= 2 2p + q.
Example 3 10% of the bulbs produced in a factory are of red colour and 2% are red
and defective. If one bulb is picked up at random, determine the probability of its being
defective if it is red.
Solution Let A and B be the events that the bulb is red and defective, respectively.
P (A) =
10
1
= ,
100 10
P (A
B) =
2
1
=
100
50
PROBABILITY
P (B | A) =
263
P (A B)
1 10 1
=
=
P (A)
50 1 5
Thus the probability of the picked up bulb of its being defective, if it is red, is
1
.
5
Example 4 Two dice are thrown together. Let A be the event getting 6 on the first
die and B be the event getting 2 on the second die. Are the events A and B
independent?
Solution:
A = {(6, 1), (6, 2), (6, 3), (6, 4), (6, 5), (6, 6)}
B = {(1, 2), (2, 2), (3, 2), (4, 2), (5, 2), (6, 2)}
A B = {(6, 2)}
P(A)
6
36
1
, P(B)
6
1
,
6
P(A
B)
1
36
Events A and B will be independent if

P (A B) = P (A) P (B)
i.e., LHS= P A
1
, RHS = P A P B
36
1 1
6 6
1
36
Hence, A and B are independent.

Example 5 A committee of 4 students is selected at random from a group consisting 8
boys and 4 girls. Given that there is at least one girl on the committee, calculate the
probability that there are exactly 2 girls on the committee.
Solution Let A denote the event that at least one girl will be chosen, and B the event
that exactly 2 girls will be chosen. We require P (B | A).
SinceA denotes the event that at least one girl will be chosen, A denotes that no girl
is chosen, i.e., 4 boys are chosen. Then
P (A) =
C4 70 14
=
=
C 4 495 99
12
264
MATHEMATICS
P (A) 1
14 85
99 99
8
C 2 . 4C 2
Now P (A B) = P (2 boys and 2 girls) = 12
C4
=
Thus P (B | A) =
6 28 56
=
495 165
P (A B) 56 99 168
=
=
P (A)
165 85 425
Example 6 Three machines E1, E2, E3 in a certain factory produce 50%, 25% and
25%, respectively, of the total daily output of electric tubes. It is known that 4% of the
tubes produced one each of machines E1 and E2 are defective, and that 5% of those
produced on E3 are defective. If one tube is picked up at random from a days production,
calculate the probability that it is defective.
Solution: Let D be the event that the picked up tube is defective
Let A1 , A2 and A3 be the events that the tube is produced on machines E1 , E2 and E3,
respectively .
P (D) = P (A1) P (D | A1) + P (A2) P (D | A2) + P (A3) P (D | A3)
P (A1) =
Also
50
1
1
1
= , P (A2) = , P (A3) =
100 2
4
4
P (D | A1) = P (D | A2) =
P (D | A3) =
4
1
=
100 25
5
1
=
.
100 20
Putting these values in (1), we get

P (D) =
=
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
25 4
25 4
20
1
1
1
17
+
+
=
= .0425
50
100
80 400
(1)
PROBABILITY
265
Example 7 Find the probability that in 10 throws of a fair die a score which is a
multiple of 3 will be obtained in at least 8 of the throws.
Solution Here success is a score which is a multiple of 3 i.e., 3 or 6.
Therefore,
p (3 or 6) =
2 1
6 3
The probability of r successes in 10 throws is given by

P (r) = 10Cr
Now
1
3
2
3
10 r
P (at least 8 successes) = P (8) + P (9) + P (10)

8
10
1 2
1 2
1
= C8 + 10 C9 + 10 C10
3 3
3 3
3
10
1
201
.
10 [45 4 + 10 2 + 1] =
310
3
Example 8 A discrete random variable X has the following probability distribution:

X
P (X) C
4 5
2C 2C
3C C2
2C2 7C2 + C
Find the value of C. Also find the mean of the distribution.

Solution
Since pi = 1, we have
C + 2C + 2C + 3C + C2 + 2C2 + 7C2 + C = 1
i.e.,
10C2 + 9C 1 = 0
i.e.
(10C 1) (C + 1) = 0
C=
1
,
10
Therefore, the permissible value of C =
C = 1
1
(Why?)
10
266
MATHEMATICS
xi pi =
Mean =
xi pi
i 1
i 1
2
2
1 2 1
1
1
= 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 2 + 7 7 +
10 10
10
10
10
10
10
10
12
12
49
10 10 10 10 100 100 100 10

= 3.66.
Long Answer (L.A.)
Example 9 Four balls are to be drawn without replacement from a box containing
8 red and 4 white balls. If X denotes the number of red ball drawn, find the probability
distribution of X.
Solution Since 4 balls have to be drawn, therefore, X can take the values 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
P (X = 0) = P (no red ball) = P (4 white balls)
4
12
C4
C4
1
495
P (X = 1) = P (1 red ball and 3 white balls)

8
C1
12
C3
C4
32
495
P (X = 2) = P (2 red balls and 2 white balls)

8
C2
12
C2
C4
168
495
P (X = 3) = P (3 red balls and 1 white ball)

8
C3
12
C4
C1
224
495
PROBABILITY
P (X = 4) = P (4 red balls)
12
C4
C4
267
70
.
495
Thus the following is the required probability distribution of X

X
P (X)
1
495
32
495
168
495
224
495
70
495
Example 10 Determine variance and standard deviation of the number of heads in

three tosses of a coin.
Solution Let X denote the number of heads tossed. So, X can take the values 0, 1, 2,
3. When a coin is tossed three times, we get
Sample space S = {HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH, TTT}
P (X = 0) = P (no head) = P (TTT) =
1
8
P (X = 1) = P (one head) = P (HTT, THT, TTH) =
3
8
P (X = 2) = P (two heads) = P (HHT, HTH, THH) =

P (X = 3) = P (three heads) = P (HHH) =
1
8
Thus the probability distribution of X is:

X
2 3
P (X)
1
8
3
8
3 1
8 8
Variance of X = 2 = x2i pi 2,
where is the mean of X given by
= xi pi = 0
1
3
3
1
1
2
3
8
8
8
8
(1)
3
8
268
MATHEMATICS
3
2
(2)
Now
1 2 3 2 3 2 1
1
2
3
3
8
8
8
8
2
x2i pi = 0
(3)
From (1), (2) and (3), we get
3
= 3
2
3
4
Standard deviation
3
4
3
.
2
Example 11 Refer to Example 6. Calculate the probability that the defective tube was
produced on machine E1.
Solution Now, we have to find P (A1 / D).
P (A1 / D) =
P (A1 D)
P (D)
P (A1 ) P (D / A1 )
P (D)
1 1
2 25 = 8
= 17
17 .
400
Example 12 A car manufacturing factory has two plants, X and Y. Plant X manufactures
70% of cars and plant Y manufactures 30%. 80% of the cars at plant X and 90% of the
cars at plant Y are rated of standard quality. A car is chosen at random and is found to
be of standard quality. What is the probability that it has come from plant X?
Solution Let E be the event that the car is of standard quality. Let B1 and B2 be the
events that the car is manufactured in plants X and Y, respectively. Now
P (B1) =
70 7
30 3
= , P (B2) =
=
100 10
100 10
P (E | B1) = Probability that a standard quality car is manufactured in plant
PROBABILITY
269
80 8
=
100 10
90 9
=
100 10
P (B1 | E) = Probability that a standard quality car has come from plant X
P (E | B2) =
P (B1 ) P (E | B1 )
P (B1 ) . P (E | B1 ) + P (B2 ) . P (E | B2 )
7 8
56
10 10
=
=
7 8 3 9
83
+
10 10 10 10
Hence the required probability is
56
.
83

Example 13 Let A and B be two events. If P (A) = 0.2, P (B) = 0.4, P (AB) = 0.6,
then P (A | B) is equal to
(A) 0.8
(B) 0.5
(C) 0.3
(D) 0
Solution The correct answer is (D). From the given data P (A) + P (B) = P (AB).
This shows that P (AB) = 0. Thus P (A | B) =
P (A B)
= 0.
P (B)
Example 14 Let A and B be two events such that P (A) = 0.6, P (B) = 0.2, and
P (A | B) = 0.5.
Then P (A | B) equals
(A)
1
10
(B)
3
10
(C)
3
8
(D)
6
7
Solution The correct answer is (C). P (AB) = P (A | B) P (B)

= 0.5 0.2 = 0.1
270
MATHEMATICS
P (A | B) =
P (A B) P[(A B)] 1 P ( A B )
=
=
P (B)
P (B)
1 P (B)
1 P (A) P (B) + P (A B)
3
= .
1 0.2
8
Example 15 If A and B are independent events such that 0 < P (A) < 1 and
0 < P (B) < 1, then which of the following is not correct?
(A) A and B are mutually exclusive
(B) A and B are independent
(C) A and B are independent
(D) A and B are independent
Solution The correct answer is (A).

Example 16 Let X be a discrete random variable. The probability distribution of X is
given below:
X
30
10
10
P (X)
1
5
3
10
1
2
Then E (X) is equal to

(A) 6
(B) 4
(C) 3
(D) 5
1
3
1
E (X) = 30 +10 10 = 4 .
5
10
2
Example 17 Let X be a discrete random variable assuming values x1, x2, ..., xn with
probabilities p1, p2, ..., pn, respectively. Then variance of X is given by
(A) E (X2)
(D)
(B) E (X2) + E (X)
(C) E (X2) [E (X)]2
E (X 2 ) [E (X)]2
SolutionThe correct answer is (C).

Fill in the blanks in Examples 18 and 19
Example 18 If A and B are independent events such that P (A) = p, P (B) = 2p and
P (Exactly one of A, B) =
5
, then p = __________
9
PROBABILITY
Solution p =
1 5
,
3 12
271
2 5
(1p )( 2 p ) + p (1 2 p ) = 3 p 4 p = 9
Example 19 If A and B are independent events then P (AB) = 1 ________

Solution P (AB) = 1 P (AB) = 1 P (A) P (B)
(since A and B are independent).
State whether each of the statement in Examples 20 to 22 is True or False
Example 20 Let A and B be two independent events. Then P (AB) = P (A) + P (B)
Solution False, because P (AB) = P (A) . P(B) when events A and B are independent.
Example 21 Three events A, B and C are said to be independent if P (ABC) =
P (A) P (B) P (C).
Solution False. Reason is that A, B, C will be independent if they are pairwise
independent and P (ABC) = P (A) P (B) P (C).
Example 22 One of the condition of Bernoulli trials is that the trials are independent
of each other.
Solution:True.
13.3 EXERCISE
Short Answer (S.A.)
1.
For a loaded die, the probabilities of outcomes are given as under:

P(1) = P(2) = 0.2, P(3) = P(5) = P(6) = 0.1 and P(4) = 0.3.
The die is thrown two times. Let A and B be the events, same number each
time, and a total score is 10 or more, respectively. Determine whether or not
A and B are independent.
2.
Refer to Exercise 1 above. If the die were fair, determine whether or not the
events A and B are independent.
3.
The probability that at least one of the two events A and B occurs is 0.6. If A and
B occur simultaneously with probability 0.3, evaluate P( A ) + P( B ).
4.
A bag contains 5 red marbles and 3 black marbles. Three marbles are drawn one
by one without replacement. What is the probability that at least one of the three
marbles drawn be black, if the first marble is red?
272
MATHEMATICS
5.
Two dice are thrown together and the total score is noted. The events E, F and
G are a total of 4, a total of 9 or more, and a total divisible by 5, respectively.
Calculate P(E), P(F) and P(G) and decide which pairs of events, if any, are
independent.
6.
Explain why the experiment of tossing a coin three times is said to have binomial
distribution.
7.
A and B are two events such that P(A) =

Find :
(i) P(A|B)
8.
(ii) P(B|A)
1
1
1
, P(B) =
and P(A B)= .
2
3
4
(iii) P(A'|B)
Three events A, B and C have probabilities
(iv) P(A'|B')
2 1
1
, and , respectively. Given
5 3
2
9.
1
1
and P(B C) = , find the values of P(C | B) and P(A' C').
4
5
Let E1 and E2 be two independent events such that p(E1) = p1 and P(E2) = p2.
Describe in words of the events whose probabilities are:
(i) p1 p2
(ii) (1p1) p2
(iii) 1(1p1)(1p2) (iv) p1 + p2 2p1p2
10.
A discrete random variable X has the probability distribution given as below:
that P(A C) =
X
P(X)
11.
(i)
(ii)
Prove
(i)
(ii)
0.5
1.5
k2
2k 2
Find the value of k

Determine the mean of the distribution.
that
P(A) = P(A B) + P(A B )
P(A B) = P(A B) + P(A B ) + P( A B)
12. If X is the number of tails in three tosses of a coin, determine the standard
deviation of X.
13. In a dice game, a player pays a stake of Re1 for each throw of a die. She
receives Rs 5 if the die shows a 3, Rs 2 if the die shows a 1 or 6, and nothing
PROBABILITY
273
otherwise. What is the players expected profit per throw over a long series of
throws?
14. Three dice are thrown at the sametime. Find the probability of getting three
twos, if it is known that the sum of the numbers on the dice was six.
15. Suppose 10,000 tickets are sold in a lottery each for Re 1. First prize is of
Rs 3000 and the second prize is of Rs. 2000. There are three third prizes of Rs.
500 each. If you buy one ticket, what is your expectation.
16. A bag contains 4 white and 5 black balls. Another bag contains 9 white and 7
black balls. A ball is transferred from the first bag to the second and then a ball
is drawn at random from the second bag. Find the probability that the ball drawn
is white.
17. Bag I contains 3 black and 2 white balls, Bag II contains 2 black and 4 white
balls. A bag and a ball is selected at random. Determine the probability of selecting
a black ball.
18. A box has 5 blue and 4 red balls. One ball is drawn at random and not replaced.
Its colour is also not noted. Then another ball is drawn at random. What is the
probability of second ball being blue?
19. Four cards are successively drawn without replacement from a deck of 52 playing
cards. What is the probability that all the four cards are kings?
20. A die is thrown 5 times. Find the probability that an odd number will come up
exactly three times.
21. Ten coins are tossed. What is the probability of getting at least 8 heads?
22. The probability of a man hitting a target is 0.25. He shoots 7 times. What is the
probability of his hitting at least twice?
23. A lot of 100 watches is known to have 10 defective watches. If 8 watches are
selected (one by one with replacement) at random, what is the probability that
there will be at least one defective watch?
274
MATHEMATICS
24. Consider the probability distribution of a random variable X:

X
P(X)
0.1
0.25
0.3
0.2
0.15
X
Calculate (i) V (ii) Variance of X.
2
25. The probability distribution of a random variable X is given below:
X
P(X)
k
2
k
4
k
8
(i)
Determine the value of k.
(ii)
Determine P(X 2) and P(X > 2)
(iii)
Find P(X 2) + P (X > 2).
26. For the following probability distribution determine standard deviation of the
random variable X.
X
P(X)
0.2
0.5
0.3
27. A biased die is such that P(4) =
1
and other scores being equally likely. The die
10
is tossed twice. If X is the number of fours seen, find the variance of the
random variable X.
28. A die is thrown three times. Let X be the number of twos seen. Find the
expectation of X.
29. Two biased dice are thrown together. For the first die P(6) =
being equally likely while for the second die, P(1) =
1
, the other scores
2
2
and the other scores are
5
PROBABILITY
275
equally likely. Find the probability distribution of the number of ones seen.
30.
Two probability distributions of the discrete random variable X and Y are given
below.
X
P(X)
1
5
2
5
1
5
1
5
P(Y)
1
5
3
10
2
5
1
10
Prove that E(Y2) = 2 E(X).

31.
A factory produces bulbs. The probability that any one bulb is defective is
1
50
and they are packed in boxes of 10. From a single box, find the probability
that
(i) none of the bulbs is defective
(ii) exactly two bulbs are defective
(iii) more than 8 bulbs work properly
32.
Suppose you have two coins which appear identical in your pocket. You know
that one is fair and one is 2-headed. If you take one out, toss it and get a head,
what is the probability that it was a fair coin?
33.
Suppose that 6% of the people with blood group O are left handed and 10% of
those with other blood groups are left handed 30% of the people have blood
group O. If a left handed person is selected at random, what is the probability
that he/she will have blood group O?
34.
Two natural numbers r, s are drawn one at a time, without replacement from
the set S= 1, 2, 3, ...., n . Find P [ r p|s p ] , where p S.
35.
Find the probability distribution of the maximum of the two scores obtained
when a die is thrown twice. Determine also the mean of the distribution.
36.
The random variable X can take only the values 0, 1, 2. Given that P(X = 0) =
P (X = 1) = p and that E(X2) = E[X], find the value of p.
276
37.
MATHEMATICS
Find the variance of the distribution:

x
P(x)
1
6
5
18
2
9
1
6
1
9
1
18
38.
A and B throw a pair of dice alternately. A wins the game if he gets a total of
6 and B wins if she gets a total of 7. It A starts the game, find the probability of
winning the game by A in third throw of the pair of dice.
39.
Two dice are tossed. Find whether the following two events A and B are
independent:
A = (x, y ) : x +y =11 B = (x, y ) : x
where (x, y) denotes a typical sample point.

40.
An urn contains m white and n black balls. A ball is drawn at random and is put
back into the urn along with k additional balls of the same colour as that of the
ball drawn. A ball is again drawn at random. Show that the probability of
drawing a white ball now does not depend on k.
Long Answer (L.A.)

41.
Three bags contain a number of red and white balls as follows:

Bag 1 : 3 red balls, Bag 2 : 2 red balls and 1 white ball
Bag 3 : 3 white balls.
The probability that bag i will be chosen and a ball is selected from it is
42.
i = 1, 2, 3. What is the probability that

(i) a red ball will be selected? (ii) a white ball is selected?
Refer to Question 41 above. If a white ball is selected, what is the probability
that it came from
(i)
43.
i
,
6
Bag 2
(ii)
Bag 3
A shopkeeper sells three types of flower seeds A1, A2 and A3. They are sold as
a mixture where the proportions are 4:4:2 respectively. The germination rates
of the three types of seeds are 45%, 60% and 35%. Calculate the probability
(i) of a randomly chosen seed to germinate
PROBABILITY
277
(ii) that it will not germinate given that the seed is of type A3,
(iii) that it is of the type A2 given that a randomly chosen seed does not germinate.
44.
A letter is known to have come either from TATA NAGAR or from

CALCUTTA. On the envelope, just two consecutive letter TA are visible. What
is the probability that the letter came from TATA NAGAR.
45.
There are two bags, one of which contains 3 black and 4 white balls while the
other contains 4 black and 3 white balls. A die is thrown. If it shows up 1 or 3,
a ball is taken from the Ist bag; but it shows up any other number, a ball is
chosen from the second bag. Find the probability of choosing a black ball.
46.
There are three urns containing 2 white and 3 black balls, 3 white and 2 black
balls, and 4 white and 1 black balls, respectively. There is an equal probability
of each urn being chosen. A ball is drawn at random from the chosen urn and it
is found to be white. Find the probability that the ball drawn was from the
second urn.
47.
By examining the chest X ray, the probability that TB is detected when a person
is actually suffering is 0.99. The probability of an healthy person diagnosed to
have TB is 0.001. In a certain city, 1 in 1000 people suffers from TB. A person
is selected at random and is diagnosed to have TB. What is the probability that
he actually has TB?
48.
An item is manufactured by three machines A, B and C. Out of the total number

of items manufactured during a specified period, 50% are manufactured on A,
30% on B and 20% on C. 2% of the items produced on A and 2% of items
produced on B are defective, and 3% of these produced on C are defective. All
the items are stored at one godown. One item is drawn at random and is found
to be defective. What is the probability that it was manufactured on
machine A?
49.
Let X be a discrete random variable whose probability distribution is defined as

follows:
k ( x + 1) for x = 1, 2,3, 4
P (X = x) = 2kx
for x = 5,6,7
0
otherwise
278
MATHEMATICS
where k is a constant. Calculate

(i) the value of k
50.
(ii) E (X)
(iii)
Standard deviation of X.
The probability distribution of a discrete random variable X is given as under:

X
2A
3A
5A
P(X)
1
2
1
5
3
25
1
10
1
25
1
25
Calculate :
(i) The value of A if E(X) = 2.94
(ii) Variance of X.
51.
The probability distribution of a random variable x is given as under:
P( X = x )
kx 2 for x = 1, 2,3
2kx for x = 4,5,6

=
0 otherwise
where k is a constant. Calculate

(i) E(X)
52.
(ii) E (3X2)
(iii)
P(X 4)
A bag contains (2n + 1) coins. It is known that n of these coins have a head on
both sides where as the rest of the coins are fair. A coin is picked up at random
from the bag and is tossed. If the probability that the toss results in a head is
31
, determine the value of n.
42
53.
Two cards are drawn successively without replacement from a well shuffled
deck of cards. Find the mean and standard variation of the random variable X
where X is the number of aces.
54.
A die is tossed twice. A success is getting an even number on a toss. Find the
variance of the number of successes.
55.
There are 5 cards numbered 1 to 5, one number on one card. Two cards are
drawn at random without replacement. Let X denote the sum of the numbers on
two cards drawn. Find the mean and variance of X.
PROBABILITY
279

Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the exercises from
56 to 82.
4
7
, and P(A B) =
, then P(B | A) is equal to
5
10
If P(A) =
56.
(A)
1
10
(B)
If P(A B) =
57.
(A)
14
17
(A)
7
8
(D)
17
20
17
20
(C)
7
8
(D)
1
8
3
2
3
, P (B) = and P(AB) = , then P (B | A) + P (A | B) equals
10
5
5
1
4
59. If P(A) =
(C)
17
7
and P(B) =
, then P (A | B) equals
10
20
(B)
If P(A) =
58.
1
8
(B)
1
3
(C)
5
12
(D)
7
2
2
3
1
, P(B) =
and P (A B) = , then P(A | B ).P(B ' | A ') is equal
5
10
5
to
(A)
60.
5
6
(B)
5
7
(C)
25
42
If A and B are two events such that P(A) =
(D)
1
1
1
, P(B) = , P(A/B)= , then
2
3
4
P(A B) equals
(A)
1
12
(B)
3
4
(C)
1
4
(D)
3
16
280
61.
MATHEMATICS
If P(A) = 0.4, P(B) = 0.8 and P(B | A) = 0.6, then P(A B) is equal to
(A) 0.24
62.
63.
(A)
P(A | B) = P(A).P(B)
(B) P(A | B) =
(C)
P(A | B).P(B | A)=1
(D)
, then
P(A B)
P(B)
P(A | B) = P(A) | P(B)
A and B are events such that P(A) = 0.4, P(B) = 0.3 and P(A B) = 0.5.
Then P (B A) equals
2
3
(B)
1
2
(C)
3
10
(D)
1
5
You are given that A and B are two events such that P(B)=
(A)
3
10
3
1
, P(A | B) = and
5
2
4
, then P(A) equals
5
(B)
1
5
(C)
1
2
(D)
3
5
(D)
3
5
In Exercise 64 above, P(B | A ) is equal to

(A)
66.
0.96
, B
P(A B) =
65.
(D)
If A and B are two events and A
(A)
64.
(B) 0.3 (C) 0.48
1
5
If P(B) =
(A)
1
5
(B)
3
10
(C)
1
2
3
4
1
, P(A | B) =
and P(A B) = , then P(A B ) + P( A B) =
2
5
5
(B)
4
5
(C)
1
2
(D) 1
PROBABILITY
67.
Let P(A) =
(A)
68.
69.
6
13
281
7
9
4
, P(B) =
and P(A B) =
. Then P( A | B) is equal to
13
13
13
(B)
4
13
(C)
4
9
(D)
5
9
If A and B are such events that P(A) > 0 and P(B) 1, then P( A | B )
equals.
(A)
1 P(A | B)
(B) 1 P( A | B)
(C)
1P(A B)
P(B')
(D) P( A ) | P( B )
If A and B are two independent events with P(A) =
3
4
and P(B) = , then
5
9
P( A B ) equals
(A)
4
15
(B)
8
45
(C)
1
3
(D)
2
9
70.
If two events are independent, then

(A)
they must be mutually exclusive
(B)
the sum of their probabilities must be equal to 1
(C)
(A) and (B) both are correct
(D)
None of the above is correct
71.
Let A and B be two events such that P(A) =
3
5
3
, P(B) = and P(A B) = .
8
8
4
Then P(A | B).P( A | B) is equal to

(A)
72.
2
5
(B)
3
8
(C)
3
20
(D)
6
25
If the events A and B are independent, then P(A B) is equal to
282
73.
MATHEMATICS
(A)
P (A) + P (B)
(C)
P (A) . P(B)
45
196
1
3
(C)
1
70
(D)
1
7
(B)
135
392
(C)
15
56
(D)
15
29
(B)
4
7
(C)
15
28
(D)
5
28
(B) 0.188
(C) 0.336
(D) 0.452
Assume that in a family, each child is equally likely to be a boy or a girl. A family
with three children is chosen at random. The probability that the eldest child is a
girl given that the family has at least one girl is
(A)
78.
3
35
Three persons, A, B and C, fire at a target in turn, starting with A. Their probability
of hitting the target are 0.4, 0.3 and 0.2 respectively. The probability of two hits
is
(A) 0.024
77.
(B)
Refer to Question 74 above. The probability that exactly two of the three balls
were red, the first ball being red, is
(A)
76.
2
7
A bag contains 5 red and 3 blue balls. If 3 balls are drawn at random without
replacement the probability of getting exactly one red ball is
(A)
75.
(D) P(A) | P(B)
Two events E and F are independent. If P(E) = 0.3, P(E F) = 0.5, then
P(E | F)P(F | E) equals
(A)
74.
(B) P(A) P(B)
1
2
(B)
1
3
(C)
2
3
(D)
4
7
A die is thrown and a card is selected at random from a deck of 52 playing cards.
The probability of getting an even number on the die and a spade card is
(A)
1
2
(B)
1
4
(C)
1
8
(D)
3
4
PROBABILITY
79.
A box contains 3 orange balls, 3 green balls and 2 blue balls. Three balls are
drawn at random from the box without replacement. The probability of drawing
2 green balls and one blue ball is
(A)
80.
2
21
(C)
1
28
(D)
167
168
33
56
(B)
9
64
(C)
1
14
(D)
3
28
1
256
(B)
7
32
(C)
5
32
(D)
3
32
Two dice are thrown. If it is known that the sum of numbers on the dice was less
than 6, the probability of getting a sum 3, is
(A)
83.
(B)
Eight coins are tossed together. The probability of getting exactly 3 heads is
(A)
82.
3
28
A flashlight has 8 batteries out of which 3 are dead. If two batteries are selected
without replacement and tested, the probability that both are dead is
(A)
81.
283
1
18
(B)
5
18
(C)
1
5
(D)
2
5
Which one is not a requirement of a binomial distribution?

(A) There are 2 outcomes for each trial
(B) There is a fixed number of trials
(C) The outcomes must be dependent on each other
(D) The probability of success must be the same for all the trials
84.
Two cards are drawn from a well shuffled deck of 52 playing cards with
replacement. The probability, that both cards are queens, is
(A)
85.
1 1
13 13
(B)
1 1
+
13 13
(C)
1 1
13 17
(D)
1 4
13 51
The probability of guessing correctly at least 8 out of 10 answers on a true-false

type examination is
284
MATHEMATICS
(A)
86.
87.
7
64
(B)
7
128
(C)
45
1024
(D)
7
41
The probability that a person is not a swimmer is 0.3. The probability that out of
5 persons 4 are swimmers is
(A) 5C4 (0.7)4 (0.3)
(B) 5C1 (0.7) (0.3)4
(C) 5C4 (0.7) (0.3)4
(D) (0.7)4 (0.3)
The probability distribution of a discrete random variable X is given below:

X
P(X)
5
k
7
k
9
k
11
k
The value of k is
(A) 8
88.
(B) 16
(C) 32
(D) 48
For the following probability distribution:

X
P(X)
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.2
E(X) is equal to :
(A) 0
89.
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 1.8
For the following probability distribution

X
P (X)
1
10
1
5
3
10
2
5
E(X2) is equal to
(A) 3
90.
(B) 5
(C) 7
(D) 10
Suppose a random variable X follows the binomial distribution with parameters n

and p, where 0 < p < 1. If P(x = r) / P(x = nr) is independent of n and r, then
p equals
PROBABILITY
(A)
91.
(B)
1
3
(C)
1
5
(D)
1
7
In a college, 30% students fail in physics, 25% fail in mathematics and 10% fail
in both. One student is chosen at random. The probability that she fails in physics
if she has failed in mathematics is
(A)
92.
1
2
285
1
10
(B)
2
5
(C)
9
20
(D)
1
3
A and B are two students. Their chances of solving a problem correctly are
1
3
1
1
, respectively. If the probability of their making a common error is,
4
20
and they obtain the same answer, then the probability of their answer to be
correct is
and
(A)
93.
1
12
(B)
1
40
(C)
13
120
(D)
10
13
A box has 100 pens of which 10 are defective. What is the probability that out of
a sample of 5 pens drawn one by one with replacement at most one is defective?
9
(A)
10
1 9
(B)
2 10
1 9
(C)
2 10
9 1 9
(D) +
10 2 10
94.
Let P(A) > 0 and P(B) > 0. Then A and B can be both mutually exclusive and
independent.
95.
If A and B are independent events, then A and B are also independent.
96.
If A and B are mutually exclusive events, then they will be independent also.
97.
Two independent events are always mutually exclusive.
98.
If A and B are two independent events then P(A and B) = P(A).P(B).
286
99.
MATHEMATICS
Another name for the mean of a probability distribution is expected value.
100. If A and B are independent events, then P(A' B) = 1 P (A) P(B')

101. If A and B are independent, then
P (exactly one of A, B occurs) = P (A) P (B ) + P B P A
102. If A and B are two events such that P(A) > 0 and P(A) + P(B) >1, then
P (B)
P(B | A) 1 P(A)
103. If A, B and C are three independent events such that P(A) = P(B) = P(C) =
p, then
P (At least two of A, B, C occur) = 3 p 2 2 p 3
Fill in the blanks in each of the following questions:
104. If A and B are two events such that
P (A | B) = p, P(A) = p, P(B) =
and
P(A B)=
1
3
5
, then p = _____
9
105. If A and B are such that

P(A' B') =
then P(A') + P(B') =
2
5
and P(A B)= ,
3
9
..................
106. If X follows binomial distribution with parameters n = 5, p and

P (X = 2) = 9, P (X = 3), then p = ___________
107. Let X be a random variable taking values x1, x2,..., xn with probabilities
p1, p2, ..., pn, respectively. Then var (X) = ________
108. Let A and B be two events. If P(A | B) = P(A), then A is ___________ of B.
Set-II
DESIGN OF THE QUESTION

PAPER
MATHEMATICS CLASS XII
Time : 3 Hours
Max. Marks : 100
The weightage of marks over different dimensions of the question paper shall
be as follows:
(A)Weightage to different topics/content units
S.No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Topic
Marks
Relations and functions
10
Algebra
13
Calculus
44
Vectors and three-dimensional geometry
17
Linear programming
06
Probability
10
Total
100
(B) Weightage to different forms of questions:
S.No. Form of Questions
Marks for
Total No. of
Total
each Question
Questions
Marks
1. MCQ/Objective type/VSA
01
10
10
2. Short Answer Questions
04
12
48
3. Long Answer Questions
06
07
42
Total
29
100
(C) Scheme of Option
There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice in four questions of
four marks each and two questions of six marks each has been provided.
Blue Print
Units/Type of Question
MCQ/VSA
S.A.
L.A.
Total
2(2)
8 (2)
10 (4)
Algebra
3 (3)
4 (1)
6 (1)
13 (5)
Calculus
2 (2)
24(6)
18(3)
44 (11)
Vectors and 3-dimensional
geometry
3 (3)
8 (2)
6 (1)
17 (6)
Linear programming
6 (1)
6 (1)
Probability
4 (1)
6 (1)
10 (2)
Total
10 (10)
48 (12)
42 (7)
100 (29)
DESIGN OF THE QUESTION PAPER SET-II
337
SectionA
Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Questions 1 to 3.
1.
If is a binary operation given by : R R R, a b = a + b2, then 25 is

(A) 52
2.
23
(C)
64
(D)
13
3
1
If sin1 : [1, 1] , is a function, then value of sin1 is
2 2
2
(A)
3.
(B)
(B)
5
6
(C)
(D)
7
6
9 6 2 3 3 0
Given that
=
. Applying elementary row transformation

3 0 1 0 1 2
R1 R12 R2 on both sides, we get
3 6 2 3 1 4
(A)
=

3 0 1 0 1 2
3 6 0 3 3 0
(B)
=

3 0 1 0 1 2
3 6 2 3 3 0
(C)
=

3 0 1 0 3 2
3 6 4 3 3 0
(D)
=

3 0 1 0 1 2
4.
If A is a square matrix of order 3 and |A| = 5, then what is the value of |Adj. A|?
5.
If A and B are square matrices of order 3 such that |A| = 1 and |B| = 4, then
what is the value of |3(AB)|?
6.
d y 3 d 2 y 2
The degree of the differential equation 1 + d x = 2 is_______.

d x
Fill in the blanks in each of the Questions 7 and 8:

7.
dy
The integrating factor for solving the linear differential equation x d x y = x2
is_______.
338
MATHEMATICS
8.
The value of i j is_______.
9.
What is the distance between the planes 3x + 4y 7 = 0 and 6x + 8y + 6 = 0?
10.
G G G G
If aG is a unit vector and (x a) . (x + a) = 99, then what is the value of | xG |?
SectionB
11.
Let n be a fixed positive integer and R be the relation in Z defined as a R b if

and only if a b is divisible by n, a, b Z. Show that R is an equivalence
relation.
12.
Prove that cot17 + cot18 + cot118 = cot13.

OR
1
1
1 2
, 3 > x> 3.
Solve the equation tan (2 + x) + tan (2 x) = tan
3
x+2 x+6
13.
x 1
Solve for x, x + 6 x 1 x + 2 = 0
x 1 x + 2 x + 6
OR
1 2
If A =
and B =
3 4
14.
1 1
3 2
2
, verify that (AB) = B A .
3
Determine the value of k so that the function:

k .cos 2 x
4 x ,
f (x) =
5,
is continuous at x =
.
4
if x =
4
if x
339
d2 y
x dy a 2 y = 0 .
d2 x
dx
15.
If y = e a cos x , show that (1 x2)
16.
Find the equation of the tangent to the curve x = sin3t , y = cos2t at t =
.
4
Find the intervals in which the function f (x) = sin4 x + cos4 x, 0 < x <
, is
2
strictly increasing or strictly decreasing.

17.
Evaluate
sin 4 x cos3 x dx
18.
Evaluate
2x
3x + 1
dx
2x + 3
OR
Evaluate
x.(log x)
dx
19.
Find a particular solution of the differential equation
20.
y
2y e dx + (y 2 x e y ) dy = 0, given that x = 0 when y =1.
G
G
G
If a = 2 i 2 j + k, b = i + 2 j 3 k and c = 2 i j + 4 k, then find the projection
G G
G
of b + c along a .
21.
Determine the vector equation of a line passing through (1, 2, 4) and

G
perpendicular to the two lines r = (8 i 16 j + 10 k) + (3 i 16 j + 7 k) and
(15 i + 29 j + 5 k) + (3 i + 8 j 5k) .
22.
There are three coins. One is a biased coin that comes up with tail 60% of the
times, the second is also a biased coin that comes up heads 75% of the times
and the third is an unbiased coin. One of the three coins is chosen at random and
tossed, it showed heads. What is the probability that it was the unbiased coin?
340
MATHEMATICS
SECTIONC
23.
4 1
2 1
Find A1, where A =
3 1
1
. Hence solve the following system of
2
equations 4 x + 2 y + 3 z = 2, x + y + z = 1, 3 x + y 2 z = 5,
OR
Using elementary transformations, find A1, where
1 2 2
A = 1 3 0
0 2 1
24.
Show that the semi-vertical angle of the cone of maximum volume and of given
slant height is tan 1 2 .
(3 x 2 + 2 x + 5) dx by the method of limit of sum.
25.
Evaluate
26.
Find the area of the triangle formed by positive x-axis, and the normal and
tangent to the circle x2 + y2 = 4 at (1,

27.
3 ), using integration.
Find the equation of the plane through the intersection of the planes
x + 3 y + 6 = 0 and 3 x y 4z = 0 and whose perpendicular distance from origin
is unity.
OR
Find the distance of the point (3, 4, 5) from the plane x + y + z = 2 measured
parallel to the line 2 x = y = z.
28.
Four defective bulbs are accidently mixed with six good ones. If it is not possible
to just look at a bulb and tell whether or not it is defective, find the probability
distribution of the number of defective bulbs, if four bulbs are drawn at random
from this lot.
29.
341
A furniture firm manufactures chairs and tables, each requiring the use of three
machines A, B and C. Production of one chair requires 2 hours on machine A, 1
hour on machine B and 1 hour on machine C. Each table requires 1 hour each
on machine A and B and 3 hours on machine C. The profit obtained by selling
one chair is Rs 30 while by selling one table the profit is Rs 60. The total time
available per week on machine A is 70 hours, on machine B is 40 hours and on
machine C is 90 hours. How many chairs and tables should be made per week
so as to maximise profit? Formulate the problems as a L.P.P. and solve it
graphically.
342
MATHEMATICS
Marking Scheme
Section-A
1. (B)
2. (D)
3. (B)
4. 25
5. 108
6. 2
8. 2
9. 2 Units
7.
10. 10
1
x
Marks
1 10 = 10
Sections-B
11.
(i) Since a R a, a Z, and because 0 is divisible by n, therefore

R is reflexive.
(ii) a R b a b is divisible by n, then b a, is divisible by n, so b R a.

Hence R is symmetric.
1
(iii) Let a R b and b R c, for a,b,c, Z. Then a b = n p, b c = n q,
for some p, q Z
12.
Therefore, a c = n (p + q) and so a R c.
Hence R is reflexive and so equivalence relation.
1
1
1
+ tan1 + tan1
7
8
18
LHS = tan1
1 1
+
1
1
1 15
8
1 7
= tan
+ tan1 = tan + tan1
1 1
55
18
18

1 .
7 8
3 1
+
11 18
3
1
65
= tan1 + tan1 = tan1
3 1 = tan1
11
18
195
1
11 18
= tan1
1
= cot13 = RHS
3
1
OR
Since
tan1 (2 + x) + tan1 (2 x) = tan1
Thus
4
2
=
x 3 3
x2 = 9 x = 3
x+2 x+6
13.
2
3
(2 + x) + (2 x)
2
tan1 1 (2 + x) (2 x) = tan1
3
Therefore,
343
1
x 1
Given, x + 6 x 1 x + 2 = 0
x 1 x + 2 x + 6
R 2 R 2 R1
Using R R R , we get
3
3
1
C2 C2 C1
Using C C C , we get
3
3
1
x + 2 x + 6 x 1
4
7
3 =0
3
4
7
x+2
4
3
4 3
11 1 = 0
1 10
Therefore, (x + 2) (111) 4 (37) 3 (37) = 0

which on solving gives x =
7
3
1
OR
1 2 1 1
AB =

3 4 3 2
2 7
=
3 15
3
5
344
MATHEMATICS
7 15
3
5
LHS = (AB) =
4 6
Therefore,
3
1
1 2 1
RHS = B A =
2 3 2
7 15
3
3
5
and hence LHS = RHS
=
4
4 6
1+1
14.
Since f is continous at x =
, we have lim f (x) = 5.

x
4
4
k cos 2( y )
k
.cos2
x
4
lim f ( x)
lim
= lim
y 0
= x 4 x
, where x = y,
Now x
4(
)
y
4
4
4
lim k .cos ( 2 2 y )
lim (k sin2 y ) k
=
=
=
y 0 + 4y
y 0 2. 2 y
2
Therefore,
15.
k
= 5 k = 10.
2
a cos
y= e
Therefore,
d y a cos1 x ( a)
=e
dx
1 x2
1 x2
dy
= a y.......(1)
dx
Differentiating again w.r.t. x, we get
1 x2
d2y
x
dy
ady
=
2 dx
dx 2
dx
1 x
(1 x 2 )
d2y
dy
dy
x
= a 1 x2
2
dx
dx
dx
= a ( ay)
Hence
16.
(1 x 2 )
[from 1]
d2y
dy
x
a2 y = 0 .
2
dx
dx
dx
dy
= + 3cos3t ,
= 2sin 2t
dt
dt
2sin
dy
2
2sin 2t
2 2
dy
2 =
=
=
Therefore,
,and =
dx
3cos3t
3
dx t =
3cos3
3.(
)
4
4
2
Also x = sin3t = sin 3
=
and y = cos2t = cos
2
4
2 = 0.
Therefore,
1
,0
Point is
2
Hence, equation of tangent is y 0 =
345
2 2 x 1
2
3
2 2 x 3y 2 = 0
1
OR
346
MATHEMATICS
f (x) = 4 sin3x cosx 4 cos3x sinx

= 4 sinx cosx (cos2x sin2x)
= sin 4x . Therefore,
f (x) = 0 4x = n x= n
Now, for 0 < x <
,
4
f (x) < 0
Therefore, f is strictly decreasing in ( 0,
)
4
Similarly, we can show that f is strictly increasing in (
17.
I=
6
0

, )
4 2
sin 4 x cos3 x dx
= 6 sin 4 x ( 1 sin 2 x) cos x dx

0
4
2
= 02 t (1 t ) d t , where sin x = t
1
2
0
t5 t7 2
(t t ) dt =
5 7 0
4
1 1 1 1
1 1 1
23
= = =
5 2 7 2 32 5 28 4480
18.
I=
2x
3x + 1
dx =
2x + 3
3
5
(4 x 2) +
4
2 dx
2
2x 2x + 3
3
4x 2
5
1
dx +
dx
2
4 2x 2x + 3
4 x2 x + 3
2
dx
3
5
= log | 2 x 2 2 x + 3 | +
2
2
4
4
1 5
x +
2 2
3
5 2
2x 1
= log | 2 x 2 2 x + 3 | +
tan 1
+c
4
4 5
5
1
2
1
2
3
5
2x 1
= log | 2 x 2 2 x + 3 | +
tan 1
+c
4
2
5
OR
I = x(log x) 2 . dx = (log x) 2 x dx
= (log x) 2
x2
1 x2
2log x
dx
2
x 2
x2
(log x) 2 log x. x dx
2
x2
x2
1 x2
(log x)2 log x. . dx
x 2
2
2
1
2
1
2
347
348
MATHEMATICS
19.
x2
x2
x2
(log x) 2
log x + + c
2
2
4
Given differential equation can be written as

x
y
dx 2 x e y
=
x
dy
2y. e y
1
2
x
dx
dv
Putting y = v x = vy d y = v + y d y
1
2
Therefore, v + y
dv 2 v yev y 2v ev 1
=
=
dy
2yev
2ev
dv 2 vev 1
=
v
dy
2ev
Hence 2 ev dv =
1
2
dy
y
2 ev = log | y | + c
or 2 e y = log | y | + c
when x = 0,
y=1
C=2
x
y
Therefore, the particular solution is 2 e = log | y | + 2
1
2
20.
G G
b + c = (i + 2 j 3 k) + (2 i j + 4 k) = 3 i + j + k
G
a = 2 i 2 j + k
G G G
G G
G (b + c ). a
Projection of (b + c ) along a =
is
G
|a|
6 2 +1
4 + 4 +1
21.
5
units
3
1+1
A vector perpendicular to the two lines is given as
j
i
k
(3 i 16 j + 7 k) (3 i + 8 j 5 k) = 3 16 7
3 8 5
= 24 i + 36 j + 72 k or 12(2 i + 3 j + 6 k)
1
2
Therefore, Equation of required line is

G
r = (i + 2 j 4 k) + ( 2 i + 3 j + 6 k)
22.
1
2
Let E1: selection of first (biased) coin

E2: selection of second (biased) coin
E3: selection of third (unbiased) coin
P(E1) = P(E2) = P(E3) =
1
3
Let A denote the event of getting a head
1
2
349
350
MATHEMATICS
A 1
A
A 75
40
Therefore, P E =
, P E = 100 , P E =
1 100
2
3 2
A
P (E 3 ) P
E
E3
P 3 =
A
A
A
A
P (E1 ) P + P (E 2 ) P + P (E 3 ) P
E1
E2
E3
1 1
.
10
3 2
=
=
1 40 1 75 1 1 33
.
+ .
+ .
3 100 3 100 3 2
1
2
1
2
1
2
SECTIONC
23. |A| = 4 (3) 1 (7) + 3 (1) = 12 + 7 3 = 8
A11 = 3
A12 = 7
A21 = 5
A22 = 17 A23 = 1
A31 = 2
A32 = 2
A13 = 1
Given equations can be written as

x

y =
z

1
2
A33 = 2
5 2
3
1
Therefore, A1 = 7 17 2
8
2
1 1
4 2 3
1 1 1
3 1 2
2

1
5

1
2
A. X = B X = (A )B
= (A 1 ) B
x
1
y =
z 8

1 2
3 7

5 17 1 1
2 2
2 5
1

6 +7 5 = 4 2
1
3
= 10 17 5 = 12 =
8
2
4
+
2
+
10
=
8
1
3
Therefore, x = , y = , z = 1
2
2
1
2
1
2
OR
1 2 2 1 0 0
Writing A = 1 3 0 = 0 1 0 A
0 2 1 0 0 1
1 2 2 1 0 0
R 2 R 2 + R 1 0 5 2 = 1 1 0 A
0 2 1 0 0 1
1 2 2 1 0 0
R 2 R 2 + 2R 3 0 1
0 = 1 1 2 A
0 2 1 0 0 1
1
2
351
352
MATHEMATICS
1 2 2 1 0 0
R3 R3 + 2 R 2 0 1 0 = 1 1 2
0 0 1 2 2 5
1 2
R1 R1 + 2 R 3 0 1
0 0
1 0
R1 R1 2 R 2 0 1
0 0
0 5 4 10

0 = 1 1 2 A
1 2 2 5
0 3 2 6

0 = 1 1 2 A
1 2 2 5
3 2 6
= 1 1 2
2 2 5
1 2
24. Volume v = v = r h
3
l2 = h2 + r2
v=
1
2
1
12
2
1
2
1
1
(l2 h2) h = (l2h h3)
3
3
dv 2
= (l 3h 2 ) = 0
dh 3
l=
3h , r =
tan =
r
= 2
h
2h
1
1 1
2
353
= tan1 2
d 2v
= 2h < 0
dh 2
Therefore,
25.
v is maximum
3
I = (3x 2 + 2 x + 5) dx = f ( x) dx
1
= lim h [ f (1) + f (1 + h) + f (1 + 2h) + ....... + f (1 + (n 1)h) ] ...... (i)

h o
where h =
3 1 2
=
n
n
Now
f (1) = 3 + 2 + 5 = 10
f (1 + h) = 3 + 3h 2 + 6h + 2 + 2h + 5 = 10 + 8h + 3h 2
f (1 + 2h) = 3 + 12h 2 + 12h + 2 + 4h + 5 = 10 + 8.2.h + 3.22.h 2
1
2
1
2
f (1 + (n 1) h) = 10 + 8(n 1) h + 3(n 1)2 .h 2
n (n 1)
n (n 1)(2n 1)
h 10n + 8h
+ 3h 2
I = nlim

2
6
= nlim
2
n
16 n (n 1) 12 n (n 1) (2n 1)
+ 2
10n + n
2
6
n
354
MATHEMATICS
= nlim
26.
2
n
10n + 8(n 1) n (n 1) (2n 1)
1
2
1
1
1
2 10 + 8(1 ) + 2(1 ) (2 )
= nlim

n
n
n
= 2 [10 + 8 + 4] = 44
1
2
Equation of tangent to x2 + y2 = 4 at (1, 3) is

4 x
x + 3 y = 4. Therefore, y =
Equation of normal y = 3 x
Therefore, required area =
3 xd x +
4 x
dx
3
x2
1
x2
= 3
+
4
x
2 0
2 1
3
=
27.
3 1 7
3 3 3
+
+
= 2 3 sq. units
8 =
2
2
2
3 2
Equation of required plane is

(x + 3y + 6) + (3x y 4z) = 0
(1 + 3 ) x + (3 ) y 4 z + 6 = 0
1
2
1
2
Perpendicular distance to the plane from origin is
1
2
4 x + 2y 4 z + 6 = 0 and 2x + 4y + 4z + 6 = 0
1
2
or 2x + y 2z + 3 = 0 and x 2 y 2z 3 = 0
Therefore,
(1 + 3 ) + (3 )2 + (4 )2
2
=1
or
36 = 1+ 9 2 + 6 + 9 + 2 6 + 16 2
or
26 2 = 26 = 1
Equations of required planes are
OR
Equaiton of line is 2x = y = z i.e.
or
x y z
= =
1 2 2
x y z
= =
1 1 1
2
355
356
MATHEMATICS
Equation of line P Q is
x3 y 4 z 5
=
=
=
1
2
2
Q ( + 3, 2 + 4, 2 + 5) lies on plane. Therefore,

+ 3 + 2 + 4 + 2 + 5 2 = 0
or
1
2
5 = 10 gives = 2 which gives the coordinates of Q(1, 0, 1)
Therefore, P Q = 4 + 16 + 16 = 6 units
28.
1
2
Let x denotes the number of defective bulbs

P (X = 0) =
P (X = 1) =
P (X = 2) =
P (X = 3) =
C4
6.5 .4.3 1
=
=
C4 10.9. 8.7 14
C3 4 C1 6.5.4.4.
8
=
4=
10
C4
10.9.8.7
21
10
C2 6 C2
6.5.4.3
3
=
.6 =
10
C4
10.9. 8.7
7
C1 6 C3 6.4.3.2
4
=
.4 =
10
C4
10.9. 8.7
35
4
C
4.3.2.1
1
P (X = 4) = 10 4 =
=
C 4 10.9.8.7 210
Therefore, distribution is
P (X) :
29.
1
14
8
21
3
7
4
35
1
210
357
Let number of chairs to be made per week be x and tables be y

Thus we have to maximise P = 30 x + 60 y
Subject to
2 x + y 70
x + y 40
x + 3y 90
x 0y 0
Vertices of feasible region are
A (0,30), B (15, 25), C (30,10), D (35, 0)
1
2
P (at A) = 30 (60) = 1800

P (at B) = 30 (15 + 50) = 1950
358
MATHEMATICS
P (at C) = 30 (30 + 20) = 1500

P (at D) = 30 (35) = 1050
P is Maximum for 15 chairs and 25 tables.
1
2
Set-I
DESIGN OF THE QUESTION

PAPER
MATHEMATICS - CLASS XII
Time : 3 Hours
Max. Marks : 100
The weightage of marks over different dimensions of the question paper shall be as
follows:
(A)
Weightage to different topics/content units

S.No.
Topic
1. Relations and functions
2.
Algebra
3. Calculus
4. Vectors and three-dimensional geometry
5. Linear programming
6. Probability
Total:
(B) Weightage to different forms of questions:
S.No. Form of Questions
Marks for
each Question
1. MCQ/Objective type/VSA
01
2. Short Answer Questions
04
3. Long Answer Questions
06
(C)
Marks
10
13
44
17
06
10
100
Total Number Marks
of Questions
10
10
12
48
07
42
29
100
Scheme of Option:
There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice in four questions of four
marks each and two questions of six marks each has been provided.
Blue Print
Units/Type of Question
MCQ/VSA
S.A.
L.A.
Total
4 (1)
6 (1)
10 (2)
Algebra
3 (3)
4 (1)
6 (1)
13 (5)
Calculus
4 (4)
28 (7)
12 (2)
44 (13)
Vectors and three
dimensional geometry
3 (3)
8 (2)
6 (1)
17 (6)
Linear programming
6 (1)
6 (1)
Probability
4 (1)
6 (1)
10 (2)
Total
10 (10)
48 (12)
42 (7)
100 (29)
DESIGN OF THE QUESTION PAPER
307
SectionA
Choose the correct answer from the given four options in each of the Questions 1 to 3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If
2 1
4 3
x y
x y
(A)
(1, 1)
(C)
(1, 1)
1
, then (x, y) is
2
(B) (1, 1)
(D) (1, 1)
The area of the triangle with vertices (2, 4), (2, k) and (5, 4) is 35 sq. units. The
value of k is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
The line y = x + 1 is a tangent to the curve y2 = 4x at the point

(A)
(1, 2)
(B)
(2, 1)
(C)
(1, 2)
(D) (1, 2)
Construct a 2 2 matrix whose elements a ij are given by
3i + j
,if i j
aij = 2
2
(i + j ) , if i = j.
5.
Find the value of derivative of tan1 (ex) w.r.t. x at the point x = 0.
6.
The Cartesian equations of a line are

of the line.
7.
(sin 83 x+ x123 )dx
Evaluate
x 3
2
y 2
5
z 6
. Find the vector equation
3
308
MATHEMATICS
Fill in the blanks in Questions 8 to 10.

sinx+ cos x
8.
9.
If a 2i 4 j k and b 3i 2 j
1+sin2x
dx = _____
k are perpendicular to each other, then
= ______
10. The projection of a = i + 3 j + k along b = 2i 3 j + 6k is _________
SectionB
11. Prove that cot 1
1 sin x
1 sin x
1 sin x
1 sin x
x
,
2
0 x
OR
Solve the equation for x if sin1x + sin12x =
, x>0
12. Using properties of determinants, prove that
b c c a
q r r p
y z z x
a b
p q
x y
a b c
2 p q r
x y z
13. Discuss the continuity of the function f given by f (x) = |x+1|+ |x+2| at x = 1 and
x = 2.
d2y
at
14. If x = 2cos cos2 and y = 2sin sin2, find
dx 2
OR
If x 1 + y + y 1 + x = 0, prove that
309
dy
1
, where 1< x <1
=
dx (1 + x )2
15. A cone is 10cm in diameter and 10cm deep. Water is poured into it at the rate of
4 cubic cm per minute. At what rate is the water level rising at the instant when
the depth is 6cm?
OR
Find the intervals in which the function f given by f (x) = x3 +
1
, x 0 is
x3
(i) increasing (ii) decreasing

16. Evaluate
3x 2
dx
( x 3)( x 1) 2
OR
Evaluate
log (log x)
17. Evaluate
x sin x
dx
1 cos 2 x
0
1
dx
log x) 2
18. Find the differential equation of all the circles which pass through the origin and
whose centres lie on x-axis.
19. Solve the differential equation
x2y dx (x3 + y3) dy = 0
20. If a b a c , a
0 and b
c , show that b
a for some scalar
310
MATHEMATICS
21. Find the shortest distance between the lines

r = ( 1)i + ( + 1) j (1 + ) k and r (1
)i (2
1) j (
2) k
22. A card from a pack of 52 cards is lost. From the remaining cards of the pack, two
cards are drawn and found to be hearts. Find the probability of the missing card
to be a heart.
SectionC
23. Let the two matrices A and B be given by
1
2
0
1 0
3 4 and B
1 2
2
4
2
2
2
1
4
4
5
Verify that AB = BA = 6I, where I is the unit matrix of order 3 and hence solve the
system of equations
x y 3, 2 x 3 y 4 z 17 and y 2 z 7
24. On the set R { 1}, a binary operation is defined by

a * b = a + b + ab for all a, b R { 1}.
Prove that * is commutative on R {1}. Find the identity element and prove that
every element of R { 1}is invertible.
25. Prove that the perimeter of a right angled triangle of given hypotenuse is maximum
when the triangle is isosceles.
26. Using the method of integration, find the area of the region bounded by the lines
2x + y = 4, 3x 2y = 6 and x 3y + 5 = 0.
OR
4
2
Evaluate (2 x x)dx as limit of a sum.
1
311
27. Find the co-ordinates of the foot of perpendicular from the point (2, 3, 7) to the
plane 3x y z = 7. Also, find the length of the perpendicular.
OR
Find the equation of the plane containing the lines
r i j
(i 2 j k) and r i j
( i
j 2k) .
Also, find the distance of this plane from the point (1,1,1)
28. Two cards are drawn successively without replacement from well shuffled pack
of 52 cards. Find the probability distribution of the number of kings. Also, calculate
the mean and variance of the distribution.
29. A dietician wishes to mix two types of foods in such a way that vitamin contents
of the mixture contains atleast 8 units of Vitamin A and 10 units of Vitamin C.
Food I contains 2 units/kg of Vitamin A and 1 unit/kg of Vitamin C. Food II
contains 1 unit/kg of Vitamin A and 2 units/kg of Vitamin C. It costs Rs 50 per kg
to purchase Food I and Rs 70 per kg to purchase Food II. Formulate this problem
as a linear programming problem to minimise the cost of such a mixture and solve
it graphically.
Marking Scheme
SectionA
1.
2.
3.
(C)
(D)
(A)
4
4.
Marks
1
2
5
16
2
5.
1
2
6.
r (3i 2 j 6k)
(2i 5 j 3k) , where
is a scalar.
312
MATHEMATICS
7.
8.
9.
0
x+c
= 2
10.
1
7
1 10 = 10
Sections B
1
11. L.H.S. = cot
1
= cot
1 sin x
1 sin x
1 sin x
1 sin x
2
2
x
x
x
x
cos + sin + cos sin

2
2
2
2
2
2
x
x
x
x
cos + sin cos sin

2
2
2
2
x
x
x
x
sin
cos sin
2
2
2
2
x
x
x
x
cos
sin cos sin
2
2
2
2
cos
1
= cot
= cot
1
= cot
1
2
1
2
x
x
x
since 0 < 2 < 4 cos 2 > sin 2
x
x
x
x
sin
cos sin
2
2
2
2
x
x
x
x
cos
sin cos
sin
2
2
2
2
cos
x
2
x
2sin
2
2cos
= cot 1 cot
x
2
x
2
313
since 0 < 2 < 4
1
OR
sin1x + sin12x =
sin12x =
2x = sin (
= sin
4x =
sin1 x
sin1x)
cos (sin1x) cos
3
1 x2
2
sin (sin1x)
3
1
1 sin 2 (sin 1 x)
x
2
2
1
x
2
3 1 x 2 x , 5x =
3 1 x 2
1
2
25x2 = 3 (1 x2)
28x2 = 3
x2 =
x =
3
28
1 3
2 7
314
MATHEMATICS
Hence x =
Thus x =
12. Let
1
2
1 3
(as x > 0 given)
2 7
1 3
is the solution of given equation.
2 7
b c c a
q r r p
y z z x
Using C1
a b
p q
x y
C1 + C2 + C3, we get
2(a b c) c a
2( p q r ) r p
2( x y z ) z x
a b c c a
2p q r r p
x y z z x
Using C2
=2 p + q+r
x + y+z
b
q
y
a b
p q
x y
C2 C1 and C3
a + b+c
Using C1
a b
p q
x y
C3 C1 , we get
c
r
z
C1 + C2 + C3 and taking ( 1) common from both C2 and C3
1
2
a b c
2p q r
x y z
315
1
2
13. Case 1 when x < 2

f (x) = |x + 1| + |x + 2| = (x + 1) (x+2) = 2x 3
Case 2 When 2 x < 1
f (x) = x 1 + x + 2 = 1
Case 3 When x 1
f (x) = x + 1 + x + 2 = 2x + 3
Thus
f ( x)
2 x 3 when
1
when
2 x 3 when
x 2
2 x 1
x 1
lim f ( x ) = lim 2 x 3 = 4 3 = 1
Now, L.H.S at x = 2 , x
2
x 2
lim + f ( x ) =
R.H.S at x = 2 , x
2
lim 1 1
x
Also f (2) = |2 + 1| + |2 + 2| = |1| + |0| = 1

f x = f (2) = lim f x
Thus, x lim
2
x 2
The function f is continuous at x = 2
1
2
316
MATHEMATICS
f x = lim 1 = 1
Now, L.H.S at x = 1 , xlim
1
x
f x
R.H.S at x = 1 , xlim
1
2x 3 = 1
= xlim
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
Also f (1) = |1 + 1| + |1 + 2| = 1
f x = xlim
Thus, xlim
1
1
f 1
The function is continuous at x = 1

Hence, the given function is continuous at both the points x = 1 and x = 2
14. x = 2cos cos2 and y = 2 sin sin2

3

dy
2sin
sin
dy d cos cos 2
2
2 = tan 3
=
=
=
3
dx dx
sin 2 sin
2
2cos sin
2
2
So
Differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we get
d2y
dx 2
3 23
sec
2
2
3
3
sec2
2
2
d
dx
1
2 sin 2 sin
3
3
sec3
cosec
8
2
2
3
3
sec2
4
2
1
3
2cos
sin
2
2
Thus
d2y
3
3
3
is sec3
cosec =
2 at =
2
8
4
4 2
dx
317
OR
We have
x 1
y 1 x
x 1 y
y 1 x
Squaring both sides, we get

x2(1 + y) = y2(1 + x)
(x + y) (x y) = y x (x y)
x
x + y = x y , i.e., y = 1 x
dy
dx
1 x .1 x 0 1
1 x
1
1 x
15. Let OAB be a cone and let LM be the level of

water at any time t.
Let ON = h and MN = r
dV
Given AB = 10 cm, OC = 10 cm and dt = 4 cm3
minute, where V denotes the volume of cone OLM.
Note that ONM ~ OCB
318
MATHEMATICS
MN
CB
ON
r
or
OC
5
1 2
r h
3
Now, V =
Substituting r =
V=
h
h
r=
10
2
.... (i)
h
in (i), we get
2
1 3
h
12
1
2
1
2
Differentiating w.r.t.t
dV
dt
3 h2 dh
12 dt
dh
4 dv
= 2
dt h dt
Therefore, when h = 6 cm,
dh
4
=
cm/minute
dt 9
OR
f (x) = x3 +
f (x) = 3x3
3
x4
) = 3 (x
3 x6 1
4
1
x3
)(
1 x4 + x2 + 1
x
319
As x4 + x2 + 1 > 0 and x4 > 0, therefore, for f to be increasing, we have

x2 1 > 0
1
2
(x 1) (x + 1) < 0 x ( 1, 0 ) ( 0, 1) [ x 0 as f is not defined at x = 0] 1
1
2
, 1
1,
Thus f is increasing in ( , 1) (1, )

(ii) For f to be decreasing f (x) < 0
x2 1 < 0
Thus f (x) is decreasing in ( 1, 0 ) ( 0, 1)
16. Let
3x 2
x 3 x 1
x 3
x 1
x 1
Then 3x 2 = A (x + 1)2 + B (x + 1) (x + 3) + C (x + 3)
comparing the coefficient of x2, x and constant, we get
A + B = 0, 2A + 4B + C = 3 and A + 3B + 3C = 2
Solving these equations, we get
A=
11
11
5
, B=
and C =
4
4
2
3x 2
x 3 x 1
11
4x 3
11
5
4 x 1 2 x 12
1
2
320
Hence
MATHEMATICS
3x 2
( x + 3)( x + 1)2
dx =
11
log x 3
4
11 1
11 1
5
1
dx +
dx
dx
4 x+3
4 x +1
2 ( x + 1)2
11
log x 1
4
5
2 x 1
C1
1
2
1
2
OR
log log x
1
log x
= log ( log x ) dx +
dx
( log x )2
dx
Integrating log (logx) by parts, we get
log log x dx
x log log x
1
dx
x
x
log x
x log log x
1
dx
log x
x log log x
x
x
log x
x log log x
x
log x
1
log x
1
log x
dx
1
dx
x
1
x
dx = x log (log x)
Therefore, log ( log x ) +
+C
2
log x
( log x )
17.
Let I =
321
x sin x
dx
2
0 1 cos x
( x ) sin ( x )
dx
2
0 1 + cos ( x )
since
( x ) dx = f ( a x ) dx
sin x
dx I
2
0 1 cos x
2I
1
2
sin x
dx
2
0 1 cos x
Put cos x = t for x

1
Therefore 2I
1
t 1, x 0
dt
1 t2
dt
1 1 t 2
1 and sin x dx dt.
1
2
1
2
= tan 1t 11 = tan 1 ( +1) tan 1 ( 1)

2

=+ =
2 2
I=
2
4
322
MATHEMATICS
18. The equation of circles which pass through the origin and whose centre lies on
x axis is
( x a )2 + y 2 = a 2
... (i)
1
2
1
2
Differentiating w.r.t.x, we get
2 xa
x y
dy
0
dx
2y
dy
dx
Substituting the value of a in (i), we get

y
dy
dx
x2
y2
y2
x y
2 xy
dy
dx
dy
0
dx
19. The given differential equation is

x 2 y dx x 3
y 3 dy 0
dy
x2 y
= 3 3
dx x + y
Put y vx so that
v x
dv
dx
vx3
x3 v3 x3
...(1)
dy
dx
dv
dx
v x
dv
v
dx 1 v3
dv
dx
v4
1 v3
1 v3
dv
v4
1
dv
v4
1
3v 3
dx
x
1
dv
v
log v
323
1
dx
x
log x c
x3
+ log y = c , which is the reqd. solution.
3 y3
20. We have
a b a c
a b a c 0
b c
0 or b c
(b c )
b c
1
0 or a
b c
since a 0& b c
1
1
a , for some scalar
b = c + a
324
MATHEMATICS
21. We know that the shorest distance between the lines r a

given by
b and r c
d is
(c a ) b d
b d
Now given equations can be written as

r
j k
j k and r
i j
1
2
and b d
i j k
1 1 1 3i 0. j 3k
1 2 1
9 9
c a
Hence D =
i 2 j k
2i 2 j 3k
Therefore c
b d
2 k
1
2
18 3 2
b d
b d
60 9
15
3 2
3 2
5
2
5 2
2 .
22. Let E, E2, E3, E4 and A be the events defined as follows :

E1 = the missing card is a heart card,
E2 = the missing card is a spade card,
E3 = the missing card is a club card,
E4 = the missing card is a diamond card
325
A = Drawing two heart cards from the remaining cards.
13 1
, P E2
52 4
Then P E1
13 1
, P E3
52 4
13 1
, P E4
52 4
13 1
52 4
P (A/E1) = Probability of drawing two heart cards given that one heart card is
12
missing =
51
C2
C2
P (A/E2) = Probability of drawing two heart cards given that one spade card is
13
missing =
51
C2
C2
13
C2
Similarly, we have P (A/E3) = 51 and P (A/E4) =
C2
13
51
C2
C2
By Bayes thereon, we have the

required Probability = P ( E1 A )
P E1 P A E1
P E1 P A E1
P E2 P A E2
1
4
1
4
12
C2
51
C2
1
4
12
12
C2
13
C2
13
C2
51
C2
12
51
C2
C2
1
4
C2
13
C2
13
C2
13
C2
51
C2
P E3 P A E3
1
4
13
51
C2
C2
66
11
66 78 78 78 50
P E4 P A E4
326
MATHEMATICS
Section C
23. We have
1 1 0
AB= 2 3 4
0 1 2
2 2 4
4 2 4
2 1 5
6 0 0
= 0 6 0
0 0 6
1 0 0
6 0 1 0
0 0 1
= 6I
Similarly BA = 6I, Hence AB = 6I = BA

As AB = 6I, A
IB = 6A 1 ,i.e., A
AB
1
B
6
6 A 1 I . This gives
2 2 4
1
4 2 4
6
2 1 5
1
2
The given system of equations can be written as

AX = C, where
x
y ,C
z
3
17
7
The solution of the given system AX = C is given by X = A1C
1
2
x
y
z
1
6
1
6
2 2 4
4 2 4
2 1 5
6 34 28
12 34 28
6 17 34
327
3
17
7
2
1
4
Hence x = 2, y = 1 and z = 4
24. Commutative: For any a, b R { 1}, we have a * b = a + b + ab and

b * a = b + a + ba. But {by commutative property of addition and multiplication on
R {1}, we have:
a + b + ab = b + a + ba .
a*b=b*a
Hence * is commutative on R {1}
Identity Element : Let e be the identity element.

Then a * e = e * a for all a R {1}
a + e + ae = a and e + a + ea = a
e (1+a) = 0
e = 0 [since a
1)
Thus, 0 is the identity element for * defined on R {1}

Inverse : Let a R {1}and let b be the inverse of a. Then
a*b=e=b*a
a * b = 0 = b * a ( e = 0)
a + b + ab = 0
328
MATHEMATICS
b =
a
R ( since a 1)
a +1
a
Moreover, a 1
1.Thus b
a
a 1 R {1}.
Hence, every element of R {1}is invertible and
a
the inverse of an element a is a 1 .
25. Let H be the hypotenuse AC and be the angle
between the hypotenuse and the base BC of the
right angled triangle ABC.
Then BC = base = H cos and AC = Perpendicular
= H sin
P = Perimeter of right-angled triangle
= H + H cos + H sin = P
For maximum or minimum of perimeter,
H (0 sin + cos ) = 0, i.e.
1
2
dP
=0
d
Now
d 2P
d 2
H cos
H sin
d 2P
1 1
at = = H
= 2 H<0
2
4
d
2 2
Thus Pis maximum at = .

4
329
H and Perpendicular = H
1
, Base = H cos =
2
4
2
4
Hence, the perimeter of a right-angled triangle is maximum when the
For =
1
2
triangle is isosceles.
26.
1
2
x 3 y + 50
x 5, x 0
y 0, y
5
16
3
Finding the point of interection of given lines as A(1,2), B(4,3)

and C (2,0)
1
Therefore, required Area
4
1
x 5
3x 6
dx 4 2 x dx
dx
3
2
1
2
330
MATHEMATICS
4
2
1 x2
3 2
2
= + 5x 4 x x
x 3x
1 4
3 2
2
1
1
3
16
1
20
5
2
2
8 4 4 1
1
2
12 12 3 6
1 45
7
=
1 3 = sq. units
3 2
2
1
OR
2x
I=
x dx
lim
h
f 1
where h
f 1 h
........
f 1
21
n 1 h 1
n 1 h
(i )
n 1 h
n 1 h 2 2 n 1 h 1 (1 + (n 1) h)
Therefore, f 1
f 1 2h
f 1 2h
4 1
,i.e., nh 3
n
Now, f 1 n 1h
21
f x dx
1
2.0 2 h 2 3.0.h 1 , f 1 h
2.2 2 h 2 3.2.h 1 , f 1
n 1 h
2 n 1 h2 3 n 1 h 1
2.12 h 2 3.1.h 1
2.22 h 2 3.2.h 1
1
2
Thus, I lim h n 2
h 0
n n 1 2n 1 2 3n n 1 nh h
h
6
2
lim hn
2 nh nh h 2nh h
6
lim 3
2 3 3h 6 h
6
331
3 nh nh h
2
3 3 (3 n)
2
69
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
27.
The equation of line AB perpendicular to the given plane is
x2 y3 z 7
=
=
= ( say )
3
1
1
Therefore coordinates of the foot B of perpendicular drawn from A on the
plane 3x y z = 7 will be
3
2,
Since B
33
3,
3
7
2,
3,
3
7 lies on 3x y z = 7 , we have
7
332
MATHEMATICS
Thus B = (5, 2, 6) and distance AB = (length of perpendicular) is

25
32
76
11 units
Hence the co-ordinates of the foot of perpendicular is (5, 2, 6) and the length of
perpendicular =
11
OR
The given lines are
r i
and r i
2jk
--------- (i)
j 2 k ---------(ii)
Note that line (i) passes through the point (1, 1, 0)
1
2
and has d .r. s , 1, 2, 1 , and line (ii) passes through the point (1, 1, 0)
1
2
and has d .r. s , 1, 1, 2

Since the required plane contain the lines (i) and (ii), the plane is parallel to the
vectors
b i 2 j k and c
j 2k
Therefore required plane is perpendicular to the vector b c and
b c
i
1
1
j
2
1
k
1
2
3i 3 j 3k
333
Hence equation of required plane is

ra . b c
r i j . 3i 3 j 3k 0
r. i j k 0
and its cartesian form is x + y + z = 0
Distance from (1, 1, 1) to the plane is

1(1) 1.1 1.1
1
1
unit
3
28. Let x denote the number of kings in a draw of two cards. Note that x is a random
variable which can take the values 0, 1, 2. Now
48!
2!
48
( 2 )! = 48 47
C
P ( x = 0 ) = P (no king) = 52 2 =
52!
52 51
C2
2!( 52 2 )!
48
188
221
P (x = 1) = P (one king and one non-king)

4
C1 48C1
52
C2
4 48 2 32
52 51 221
4
C2
43
1
=
=
and P (x = 2) = P (two kings ) 52 =
C 2 52 51 221
Thus, the probability distribution of x is
334
MATHEMATICS
x
P x
0
188
221
1
32
221
2
1
221
Now mean of x = E ( x) = xi P ( xi )
i =1
= 0
E(x2 )
Also
188
32 2 1 34
+1
+
=
221
221 221 221
n
xi2 p xi
i 1
02
Now
188 2 32
1
36
1
22
221
221
221 221
var (x) = E (x ) [E(x) ]

2
Therefore standard deviation
36
34
221 221
6800
221
var ( x )
6800
0.37
221
29. Let the mixture contains x kg of food I and y kg of food II.

Thus we have to minimise
Z = 50x + 70y
Subject to
2x + y > 8
x + 2y > 10
x, y > 0
335
1
2
The feasible region determined by the above inequalities is an unbounded

region. Vertices of feasible region are
A ( 0, 8 ) B ( 2, 4 ) C (10, 0 )
1
2
Now value of Z at A ( 0, 8 ) = 50 0 + 70 8 = 560

B ( 2, 4 ) = 380 C (10, 0 ) = 500
As the feasible region is unbounded therefore, we have to draw the graph of

50x + 70y < 380 i.e. 5x + 7y < 38
1
2
As the resulting open half plane has no common point with feasible region thus the
minimum value of z = 380 at B (2, 4). Hence, the optimal mixing strategy for the
dietician would be to mix 2 kg of food I and 4 kg of food II to get the minimum cost
of the mixture i.e Rs 380.
1
ANSWERS
287
ANSWERS
1.3 EXERCISE
1. (b,b), (c,c), (a,c)
2. [-5,5]
3. 4 x 2
4x 1
x 3
2
4.
5.
f 1 {( b, a ) , ( d , b ) , ( a, c ) ,(c, d )}
6.
f f x
2,
7.
x 4 6 x3 10 x 2 3x
1
8. (i) represents function which is surjective but not injective

(ii) does not represent function.
9.
fog
2,5 , 5, 2 , 1,5
12. (i) f is not function (ii) g is function (iii) h is function (iv) k is not function
14.
1
,1
3
17. Domain of R = {1,2,3,4, ..... 20} and

Range of R = {1,3,5,7,9, ..... 39}. R is neither reflective, nor symmetric and nor
transitive.
21. (i) f is one-one but not onto , (ii) g is neither one-one nor onto (iii) h is bijective,
(iv) k is neither one-one nor onto.
22. (i) transitive (ii) symmetric (iii) reflexive, symmetric and transitive (iv) transitive.
23. ( 2,5) = {(1, 4 ) , ( 2,5 ) , ( 3,6 ) , ( 4,7 ) (5,8),(6,9)}
288
25.
MATHEMATICS
(i) fog x
4x2 6 x 1
(ii) gof
2 x2
(iii) fof
x4
(iv) gog x
6x 1
6 x 3 14 x 2 15 x 5
4x 9
26.
27.
31.
35.
39.
43.
(ii) & (iv)

(i)
B
C
B
C
28.
32.
36.
40.
44.
47.
48. R =
49.
R = {(1,1) , (1, 2 ) , ( 2,1) ,(2, 2),(2,3), (3,2), (3,3), (3,4), (4,3), (4,4), (5,5)}
50.
gof = {(1,3) , ( 3,1) , ( 4,3)} and fog = {( 2,5 ) , ( 5, 2 ) , (1,5 )}
51.
53.
57.
61.
fofof
False
True
False
C
B
B
B
B
29.
33.
37.
41.
45.
B
A
D
A
D
30.
34.
38.
42.
46.
3,8 , 6,6 , (9,4), (12,2)
52. f 1 ( x ) = 7 + ( 4 x )
3x 2 1
54. False
58. False
62. False
D
C
A
A
A
55. False
59. False
1
3
56. False
60. True
2.3 EXERCISE
1.
7. 0, 1
2. 1
4.
14
15
11.
8.
12
3 3
,
4 4
5.
ANSWERS
an a1
19. 1 + a a
1 n
13.
4
tan 1 x
3
20.
24.
28.
32.
36.
C
A
A
D
A
21.
25.
29.
33.
37.
D
A
B
B
A
38.
2
3
39.
2
5
40.
42.
43.
2
3
44. 0
46.
2, 2
47. xy > 1
48. cot 1 x
50. False
54. False
51. True
55. True
49.
53.
False
True
17.
289
B
B
A
A
22.
26.
30.
34.
23.
27.
31.
35.
D
C
D
C
41.
45. 1
52. True
3.3 EXERCISE
1. 28 1, 1 28, 4 7, 7 4, 14 2, 2 14. If matrix has 13 elements then its order
will be either 13 1 or 1 13.
2. (i) 33, (ii) 9, (iii) a23 x 2 y , a31 0, a12 1
1
3. (i) 2
0
9
2
2
(ii)
1 4
1 2
e x sin x e x sin 2 x
4.
7.
e 2 x sin x e 2 x sin 2 x
e3 x sin x e3 x sin 2 x
5 2 2
(i) X + Y =
12 0 1
5. a = 2, b = 2
6. Not possible
0
(ii) 2X 3Y =
11
1
1
10 18
290
MATHEMATICS
5
(iii) Z =
12
8.
x=4
11.
A 1
2
0
2
1
10. 2, 14
1
7
2 3
1 5
1 1
1 0
12. A =
13. A = [ 1 2 1]
9 6 12
12 9
15. AB=
BA = 7 8 16
12
15
4 5 10
18. x = 1, y = 2
2 0
2 1
,Y=
19. X =
1 3
2 2
k k
20. ,
2k 2k
24. A = [ 4]
where k is a real number

30. True when AB = BA
37. (i)
1 7 -3
22 5 1
k
etc.
2k
(ii) not possible
38. x = 2, y = 4 or x = 4, y = 2, z = 6, w = 4
39.
24 10
28 38
3
40. A
187 195
156 148
1 2 5
41. a = 2, b = 4, c = 1, d = 3
42.
18 8
43.
16 18
44.True for all real values of
45. a = 2, b = 0, c = 3
3 4
ANSWERS
50.
x=
1
2
, y=
1
6
,z=
291
1
3
1 1
7 9 10
3
12 15 17
15 6 5
(ii) inverse does not exist (iii)
51. (i)
1
5 2 2
1
1
52.
53.
57.
61.
65.
69.
72.
74.
5
2
5
0 1
2

3
1
+ 1 0
2

3
3 1
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
1
2
A
54. D
D
58. D
C
62. D
D
66. D
Skew symmetric matrix
Rectangular matrix
Symmetrix matrix
76. (i) B A (ii) kA
(iii) k A B
55.
59.
63.
67.
70.
73.
75.
B
56.
A
60.
A
64.
A
68.
1
71.
Distributive
Symmetrix matrix
D
B
A
Null matrix
0
77. Skew Symmetric matrix
78. (i) Skew symmetric matrix

(ii) neither symmetric nor skew symmetric matrix
79. Symmetric matrix
80. AB = BA
82. False
83. False
84. False
86. True
87. False
88. False
90. False
91. False
92. False
94. True
95. False
96. True
98. True
99. False
100. True
81.
85.
89.
93.
97.
101.
does not exist

True
True
False
False
True
292
MATHEMATICS
4.3 EXERCISE
1. x x + 2
4. 3 (x + y + z) (xy + yz + zx)
3
2. a2 (a + x + y + z)
5. 16 (3x + 4)
n
12. = n or n + ( 1)
6
19.
24.
28.
32.
13. x = 0, 12
x = 1, y = 1, z = 1
C
25. C
C
29. A
C
33. D
3. 2x3y3z3
6. (a + b + c)3
18. x = 0, y = 5, z = 3
20. x = 2, y = 1, z = 4
26. B
27. D
30. A
31. A
34. D
35. D
36. B
37. C
38. 27 A
1
39. A
40. Zero
41.
1
2
42. (A 1) 2
43. 9
44.
46.
49.
53.
57.
Value of the determinant

(y z) (z x) (y x + xyz)
False
50. False
True
54. False
True
58. True
45.
47.
51.
55.
x=2y=7
Zero
True
True
48. True
52. True
56. True
5.3 EXERCISE
1.
5.
Continuous at x =1 2. Discontinuous 3. Discontinuous 4. Continuous

Discontinuous
6. Continuous
7. Continuous
8. Discontinuous
9.
Continuous
13. k = 1
7
2
10. Continuous
11. k =
14. k = 1
16. a = 1, b = 1
17. Discontinuous at x = 2 and x
5
2
12. k =
1
2
18. Discontinuous at x = 1,
20. Not differentiable at x = 2
21. Differentiable at x = 0
22. Not differentiable at x = 2
25.
(log 2) sin 2 x 2cos
1
and 2
2
ANSWERS
29.
cos x sin 2 x
2 x
2 x
31.
1
sin tan x 1 sec 2
2 x 1
32.
2 x cos x
cos x
n 1
ax 2
30. n 2ax b sin
2 x sin 2 x 2
34.
36.
x 1 x 2
37. 1
x 3
sin 2 x
3
a2
x2
43.
51.
56.
xy cos xy x
x
y
57.
40. 1
1 x4
46. cot
1
3
y 4 x3 4 xy 2
4 yx 2 + 4 y 3 x
t2 1
44. 2
t 1
47. 1
52.
tan x x
sin 2 x
55.
y sec x y tan x y
sec x y tan x y x
2 xy 2 y 3 cos xy y
54.
1
2
x
3
2
2 - + ++1
e
3 2
45.
+ +1
48. t
35. sin mx x cos n x ( n tan x + m cot x )
39.
3a
42.
1
33. 2 x x 1
34 x 29
1
2
38.
1 x2
9 x2
bx c cos ax 2 bx c
x 1
cos 2 x
sin x .log sin x
sin x
sin x
41.
5
28. x log x 5 log log x 5
log8 x 27.
26.
8x
x8
293
64. 2sin y cos3 y
70. Not applicable since f is not differentiable at x = 1
53.
1
2
294
MATHEMATICS
, 2
71.
79.
p 3, q 5
72. (2, 4)
85. B
89. C
93. A
96. B
97. x
3 +1
104. True
3
,0
2
78.
x
tan x
2
82. xtanx sec x log x + x +
83.
2 x 2 +1
84. C
88. A
92. A
100.
7 1
,
2 4
77.
86. A
90. B
94. B
x 1
98.
87. A
91. B
95. A
2
3x
101. 1
102. False
105. True
106. False
99.
1
2
103. True
6.3 EXERCISE
2 2 v unit/sec. 5. =
3.
8 m/s
4.
7.
0.018cm3
8. 2
9.
2000 litres/s, 3000 litre/s
12. k2 = 8
2
m/s towards light, 1 m/s
3
14. (4, 4)
11. 2x3 3x + 1
1 4 2
15. tan 7 17. x + 3 y = 8
18. (3, 2), (1, 2) 23. (1, 16), max. slope = 12

26. x = 1 is the point of local maxima; local maximum = 0
x = 3 is the point of local minima; local minimum = 28
x = 0 is the point of inflection.
27. Rs 100
6. 31.92
30. 6cm, 12 cm, 864 cm3
ANSWERS
31. 1:1
35.
39.
43.
47.
51.
55.
33. Rs 1920
C
D
B
D
A
B
B
A
B
A
C
A
36.
40.
44.
48.
52.
56.
59. C
60. (3, 34)
63. (1,
34.
2 3 2
x 1 +
3 27
37.
41.
45.
49.
53.
57.
A
A
C
B
B
B
61. x + y = 0
38.
42.
46.
50.
54.
58.
62.
295
C
D
B
C
C
B
,1
64. 2 ab
7.3 EXERCISE
3.
x2
x + 3log x + 1 + c
2
6.
x
tan + C
2
9.
2cos
11.
x
a cos 1 +
a
13.
1
1 2
1+ 2 + c
3 x
x
2
4.
7.
2sin
tan 5 x
5
x3
c 5. log x sin x c
3
tan 3 x
3
c 8. x + c
x x x
10. 2 3 2 + x log
x
c
2
x2
+c
a 2
4 3/ 4
4
12. 3 x log 1 + x
15.
1
2
sin
2
16. 3 x
4t 3
3
9 log x
14.
x2
1 1 3x
c
sin
3
4
+c
x +1 + c
296
MATHEMATICS
17.
x 1
5 2 x + x 2 + 2log x 1+ 5 2 x + x 2 + c
2
18.
1
log x 2 1 log x 2 1
4
20.
x sin 1 x
x a
a2
xa
+ log 1 x 2
2ax x 2 + sin 1
c
+
21.
2
2
2
a
1 x
1
sin 2 x sin x
2
22.
x3
a3
24.
2
sin
3
26.
1 1 2
sec ( x ) + c
2
19.
33.
1
x2
3
x
log
+
tan 1
+c
7
x+2 7
3
36.
1
x
a tan 1
2
a
a b
b tan
x3
x 1
1
6
x 2
1
3
27.
26
3
30.
log m
m2 1
34.
35.
38. log
1
1
tan x + c
2
25. 2 sin x + x + c
1
29. tan e
2 1
1
1+ x
log
4
1 x
23. tan x cot x 3x + c
28. e 2 1
32.
x
b
31.
2
2
tan 1
2
3
37.
39. xe tan
x
x
x
x
1
3
+ tan 1
+ c 41.
40. a a tan
a
a
a
2
1 x
+c
ANSWERS
42.
297
e 3 x
3e 3 x
[sin 3x cos 3x ] +
[sin x 3cos x ] + c
24
40
tan x 1 1
tan x 2 tan x + 1
tan 1
log
+
+c
2
tan x + 2 tan x +1
2 tan x 2 2
1
43.
44.
a2 + b2
3 3
a b
48. A
52. D
56. D
60.
45.
3
log 3
8
49. C
53. C
57. A
ex
x 4
61.
46.
1
log
2
2
47.
50. A
54. D
58. D
1
2
62.
1
log
4
2
51. C
55. D
59. e 1
1
2 3
2cos x
tan 1
c 63. 0
8.3 EXERCISE
1.
1
sq.units
2
2.
4 2
p sq. units
3
3. 10 sq.units
5.
27
sq.units
2
6.
9
sq. units
2
7.
9.
4
sq.units
3
10. 96 sq.units
13.
1
sq. units
6
14.
9
sq. units
2
15. 9 sq.units
17. 4 sq.units
18.
15
sq. units
2
19.
20. 6 sq.units
21.
15
sq. units
2
22. 8 sq.units
23. 15 sq.units
24. C
25. D
26. A
27. B
4.
32
sq. units
3
8. 2 sq.units
a 2
12.
sq. units
4
16
sq.units
11.
3
4
3
16
sq.units
3
8
16. 2 sq.units
3
3 + 2 a 2 sq. units
298
MATHEMATICS
28. A
32. B
29. A
33. A
30. D
34. C
31. A
9.3 EXERCISE
x
2 y k
d2y
0
dx 2
e6
1.
4.
1
x 1
y x 2 1 = log
+k
2
x +1
5. y = c.e x x
6.
( a + m ) y = e mx + ce ax
7. (x c) ex+y + 1 = 0
8.
x2
y = kx e 2
22.
24.
9. y tan x
= e 2 tan
14.
x2 y 2
1
18. tan
+c
20. x 2 y 3
y k ex y
xy y + x ( y ) yy = 0
2
x 1
11.
1
3
dy
2 xy 0
dx
1 y
16. tan = log x + c
x
3 1 x2
1
x2
x y y2
2 10.
d2y
dy
x 2=0
2
dx
dx
4 x3
17. 2 xe tan
19. x
3.
2
13. (1 x )
15.
2.
y2
dy
0
dx
ey
23.
21. y sin x =
x
+ log y = c
y
cos 2 x 3
+
2
2
2
1
tan 1 x + log 1 + y 2 = c
2
25. y cos x
2sin x 2cos x
x
x2
x log x x
cx 2
3
9
ANSWERS
26.
3sin 2 x 2cos 2 x
13
28. y
30.
sin y c e y
x sin y cos y
y 1 x 1
2x
A
C
D
C
B
C
C
C
C
A
(i) not defined
(iv)
x
33. log = cx
y
32. xy 1
36.
40.
44.
48.
52.
56.
60.
64.
68.
72.
76.
ce3 x
37.
41.
45.
49.
53.
57.
61.
65.
69.
73.
C
D
B
D
B
B
C
A
C
C
(ii) not defined
(vi) y
x2
cx
4
2
2
29. 2 x y
B
A
B
A
B
A
D
D
A
B
(iii) 3
39.
43.
47.
51.
55.
59.
63.
67.
71.
75.
p1dy
x
(ix) y ce
(x) x = c sec y
ex
(xi)
x
(iii) True
(vii) True
(xi) True
C
C
C
A
B
A
C
D
A
A
p dy
= Q1 e 1 dy + c
2
(vii) 3 y 1 x
(ii) True
(vi) False
(x) True
1 x y
35. C
(viii) xy = Aey
77. (i) True

(v) False
(ix) True
x c
34. D
38.
42.
46.
50.
54.
58.
62.
66.
70.
74.
3x
31. k e 2 x 1 x
(v) x e
dy
+ py = Q
dx
log 1 tan
27.
299
4 x3
sin x cos x
2
2
(iv) True
(viii) True
300
MATHEMATICS
10.3 EXERCISE
1.
1
2i j 2 k
3
3.
1
2i 3 j 6 k
7
7.
2 3 6
, , ;4i,6 j, 12k 8.
7 7 7
2. (i)
1
2i j 2 k
3
G 3b a
4. c =
2
2i
(ii)
1
j
37
6 k
5. k = 2
4 j
6.
2 i j k
1
9. cos
4k
1
156
10. Area of the parallelograms formed by taking any two sides represented by a , b and
c as adjacent are equal
2
7
11.

16. n
21
13.
274
2
G
a
G
a
17.
62
2
12.
G
a
G
a
G
b
G
b
G
b
G
b
18.
1 G G G
5i 2 j 2k
3
19.
23.
27.
31.
C
D
D
C
G
c
G
c
G
c
G
c
20.
24.
28.
32.
D
A
A
C
21.
25.
29.
33.
C
D
C
B
22. B
26. D
30. A
34. If a and b are equal vectors

35. 0
39. 3
43. True
36.
4
G
40. a
44. False
37. k ] 1,1[ k
41. True
G2 G2
1
38. a b
2
42. True
45. False
11.3 EXERCISE
1.
5i +5 2 j +5 k
3.
(1, 1, 1)
2. (x 1) i + (y + 2) j + (z 3) k = (3j 2j + 6k)
ANSWERS
4.
19
cos 1
21
x + y + 2z = 19 8.
7.
x+y+z=9
9.
3x 2y + 6z 27 = 0
10. 21x + 9y 3z 51 = 0
11.
x y z
x y z
= = and = =
1 2 1
1 1 2
12. 60
14. ax + by + cz = a2 + b2 + c2
14. (1, 1)
15. 15 or 75
16. (2, 6, 2) 3 5
17. 7
18.
301
19. ( x 3) j + yj + (z 1)k = (2i + j +3k)

20. 18x + 17y + 4z = 49 21. 14
22. 51x + 15y 50z + 173 = 0
24. 4x +2y 4z 6 = 0 and 2x + 4y + 4z 6 = 0
26. 3i +8j +3 k, 3i 7j + 6k
29. D
30. D
31. A
32. D
33. D
34. A
35. D
36. C
37.
38.
2 2 1
, ,
3 3 3
x y z
+ + =1
2 3 4
39. ( x 5)i + ( y + 4) j + ( z 6) k = (3i + 7j + 2k)
40. ( x 3)i + ( y 4) j + ( z + 7)k = (2i 5j + 13k)
41. x + y z = 2
42. True
46. True
45. False
49. True
43. True
47. True
44. False
48. False
12.3 EXERCISE
1.
5.
42
196
2. 4
6. 43
9.
Minimum value = 3
3. 47
7. 21
4. 30
8. 47
10. Maximum = 9, minimum = 3
1
7
302
MATHEMATICS
11. Maximise Z = 50 x 60 y , subject to:

2x + y 20, x + 2y 12, x + 3y 15, x 0, y 0
12. Minimise Z 400 x 200 y , subject to:
5 x 2 y 30
2 x y 15
x y , x 0, y 0
13. Maximise Z = 100 x 170 y subject to :

3 x 2 y 3600, x 4 y 1800, x 0, y
14. Maximise Z = 200 x 120 y subject to :
x
y 300, 3x
y 600, y x 100, x 0, y 0
15. Maximise Z = x y, subject to

2x + 3y 120, 8x + 5y 400, x 0, y 0
16. Type A : 6, Type B : 3; Maximum profit = Rs. 480
17. 2571.43
18. 138600
19. 150 sweaters of each type and maximum profit = Rs 48,000
2
20. 54 km.
7
22.
23.
25.
26.
30.
34.
38.
42.
21. 3
10
11
Model X : 25, Model Y : 30 and maximum profit = Rs 40,000

Tablet X : 1, Tablet Y : 6
24.Factory I : 80 days, Factory II : 60 days
Maximum : 12, Minimum does not exist
B
27. B
28. A
29. D
C
31. D
32. D
33. A
B
35. Linear constraints36. Linear
37. Unbounded
Maximum
39. Bounded
40. Intersection 41. Convex
True
43. False
44. False
45. True
ANSWERS
13.3 EXERCISE
1.
Independent
2. not independent
5.
P(E) =
7.
(i)
9.
(i) E1 and E2 occur
3. 1.1
4.
25
56
14.
1
10
1
5
7
, P(F) : , P(G) =
, no pair is independent
12
18
36
3
1
1
5
, (ii) , (iii) , (iv)
4
2
4
8
8.
3 3
,
4 10
(ii) E1 does not occur, but E2 occurs

(iii) Either E1 or E2, or both E1 and E2 occurs
(iv) Either E1 or E2 occurs, but not both
10. (i)
1
23
, (ii)
3
18
3
2
12.
13. Rs 0.50
15. Expectation = Rs 0.65
18.
5
9
19.
4547
22.
8192
25. (i)
28.
1
270725
23. 1
9
10
29. X
10
17.
7
15
20.
5
16
21.
7
128
24. (i) .1118
(ii) .4475
26. 0.7 (approx.) 27. 0.18

0
P (X) .54
49
31. (i)
50
85
153
8
14 1
, (ii) , , (iii) 1
15
15 15
1
2
16.
45(49)8
(ii)
(50)10
.42
.04
59(49)9
(iii)
(50)10
303
304
32.
MATHEMATICS
1
3
33.
9
44
34.
p 1
n 1
38.
775
7776
35. X
1 2 3 4 5 6
P(X) 36 36 36 36 36 36
p=
36.
39.
1
2
665
324
37.
not independent
41. (i)
43. (i) 0.49, (ii) 0.65, (iii) .314
46.
1
3
49.
(i)
51.
(i) 4.32, (ii) 61.9, (iii)
53.
Mean
55.
56.
60.
64.
68.
72.
76.
80.
84.
Mean = 6, Variance = 3
C
57. A
C
61. D
C
65. D
C
69. D
C
73. C
B
77. D
D
81. B
A
85. B
88. D
47.
110
221
1
, (ii) 5.2, (iii) 1.7 (approx.)
50
15
22
2
, S.D. = 0.377
13
89. D
7
11
, (ii)
18
18
44.
7
11
48.
5
11
42. (i)
45.
11
21
50. (i) 3, (ii) 19.05

52. 10
54.
58.
62.
66.
70.
74.
78.
82.
86.
1
2
D
B
D
D
C
C
C
A
90. A
59.
63.
67.
71.
75.
79.
83.
87.
2
9
, (ii)
11
11
C
D
D
D
B
A
C
C
91. B
ANSWERS
92. D
93. D
94. False
95. True
96. False
97. False
98. True
99. True
100. True
101. True
102. False
103. True
104.
1
3
105.
107. pi xi2 ( pi xi )
10
9
106.
1
10
108. independent
305

Ncert Exemplar - Maths

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ncert Exemplar - Maths

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ncert Exemplar - Maths

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

00 Preface.

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system

OFFICES OF THE PUBLICATION

108, 100 Feet Road

Navjivan Trust Building

Printed on 80 GSM paper with NCERT

Production Assistant : Prakash Veer Singh

comprehension, information recall, analytical thinking and problem-solving ability,

Professor Yash Pal

Relations and Functions

Inverse Trigonometric Function

Continuity and Differentiability

Three Dimensional Geometry

Design of the Question Paper, Set-II

RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

1.1.3 Types of Functions

1.1.5 Invertible Function

Z and h : Z S are functions, then

(iv) Let f : X Y and g : Y Z be two invertible functions. Then g o f is also

RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

(v) Given a binary operation * : A A A, with the identity element e in A, an

4x1 = 4x2, i.e., x1 = x2

Given that f (x) = 4x 3 = y (say), then

Example 7 Is the binary operation * defined on Z (set of integer) by

RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Long Answer (L.A.)

Example 13 Show that the function f : R R defined by f (x) =

neither one-one nor onto.

x2 x + 1 = 0 does not give any real value of x.

Similarly, the function g defined by g (x) = x x may be redefined as

Therefore, g o f gets defined as :

RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

This leads to a function g : R R defined as

( g o f ) (x) = g(f (x) = g (4x + 5)

Hence f is invertible and f 1 = g which is given by

Example 16 Let * be a binary operation defined on Q. Find which of the following

Thus (a * b) * c a * (b * c) and hence * is not associative.

Objective Type Questions

Solution The correct choice is (B).

RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

injective mappings that can be defined from A to B is

Solution (C) is the correct choice.

Solution (A) is the correct choice.

Solution R = {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3)}.

RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Let D be the domain of the real valued function f defined by f (x) =

Let f , g : R R be defined by f (x) = 2x + 1 and g (x) = x2 2, x R,

Let f : R R be the function defined by f (x) = 2x 3 x R. write f 1.

If f : R R is defined by f (x) = x2 3x + 2, write f (f (x)).

14. Let f : R R be the function defined by f (x) = 2 cos x

Long Answer (L.A.)

(iv) k(x) = x2.

22. Each of the following defines a relation on N:

RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

27. Let * be binary operation defined on R by a * b = 1 + ab,

Objective Type Questions

(B) transitive but not symmetric

(D) none of these

(B) transitive but not symmetric